Skip to main content

Full text of "Introduction to immunochemical specificity"

See other formats


3E3^^£ 


J^^^^^^^S^SI 


Marine  Biological  Laboratory  Library 


Woods  Hole,  Mass. 


Presented  by 


John  Wiley  and  Sons,  Inc< 


July  26,  1963 


3^^^^^^^^^Q^^^^S! 


Introduction  to 
IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 


3  ^'^ 


CL^ 


Introduction  to 

Immunochemical  Specificity 


by  WILLIAM  C.  BOYD 

Professor  of  Immunochemistry 
Boston  University  School  of  Medicine 


INTERSCIENCE  PUBLISHERS 

a  division  of  JOHN  WILEY  &  SONS,   NEW  YORK  •  LONDON 


Copyright  ©  1962  by  John  Wiley  &  Sons,  Inc. 

All  Rights  Reserved 

Library  of  Congress  Catalog  Card  Number  61-18288 


Preface 


This  little  book  is  intended  to  introduce  the  reader  to  our  present 
knowledge  of  immunochemical  specificity  (a  somewhat  broader 
topic  than  the  specificity  of  antibodies  and  antigens)  by  a  discussion 
of  some  of  the  important  modern  advances  in  this  field  and  an  in- 
troductory account  of  certain  earlier  work  that  has  served  as  a 
foundation  for  recent  progress.  Aimed  at  the  nonspecialist  as  well 
as  the  specialist,  the  treatment  is  on  the  whole  more  elementary  than 
that  of  my  Fundamentals  of  luununology,  but  in  some  ways  more 
detailed  and  up  to  date. 

The  material  is  based  primarily  on  a  series  of  lectures  which  I 
had  the  privilege  of  giving  in  Moscow  in  the  autumn  of  1959.  The 
book  is  not,  however,  a  mere  retranslation  of  the  Russian  text,  but  a 
thorough  revision  of  the  original  English,  with  considerable  additions. 

Certain  traces  of  the  lecture  form  in  which  the  material  was  origi- 
nally cast  still  remain.  Some  of  these  may  be  disadvantages,  but 
some  of  them  perhaps  may  not  be.  The  style  of  lectures  can  and,  in 
my  opinion,  should  be  somewhat  more  informal  than  that  of  a  text- 
book. The  lecturer  is  also  more  or  less  expected  to  do  certain 
things  (and  not  to  do  others).  He  is  expected,  for  example,  to 
bring  his  audience  up  to  date,  even  to  the  point  of  presenting  some 
material  not  yet  to  be  found  in  the  textbooks  and  in  some  cases  not 
yet  published.  He  is  expected,  or  at  least  allowed,  to  discuss  cer- 
tain aspects  of  his  own  work  in  more  detail  than  might  seem  proper 
elsewhere.    At  the  same  time  he  is  not  required  to  cover  the  field 


VI  PREFACE 

exhaustively  and  may  he  forgiven  if,  instead,  he  elects  to  emphasize 
those  portions  which  are  of  special  interest  to  him  personally.  He  is 
also  generally  excused  from  presenting  an  exhaustive  bibliography. 

Most  important  of  all,  perhaps,  lecturers  are  allowed  to  illustrate 
their  talks  with  numerous  lantern  slides,  a  feature  which  often  greatly 
increases  the  intelligibility  of  their  presentation.  This  privilege  is 
reflected  in  the  present  case  by  a  relatively  high  proportion  of  figures 
and  tables,  which  I  hope  will  help  in  a  similar  way.  In  any  case,  the 
illustrations  form  an  integral  part  of  the  plan  of  the  book. 

Although  the  topic  is  a  specialized  one,  little  previous  knowledge 
of  it  is  assumed  on  the  part  of  the  reader.  An  elementary  knowledge 
of  organic  chemistry  and,  for  the  last  two  chapters,  a  slight  ac- 
quaintance with  the  notation  of  partial  differentiation  should  be 
sufficient. 

The  author  is  grateful  to  the  John  Simon  Guggenheim  Foundation 
for  a  fellowship  that  made  the  completion  of  this  book  possible,  and 
to  friends  and  colleagues  who  read  and  criticized  portions  of  the 
manuscript. 

Casa  Rosada  W.  C.  B. 

May  1961 


Contents 


1.  Antibodies  I  - 1 

Immunity    1 

Specificity  6 

2.  Antibodies  II  12 

Specificity  and  Chemical  Structure  of  Antigen  12 

Statistical  Methods  20 

Limitations  of  Specificity  26 

Combining-  Groups  of  Antibody  27 

Formation  of  Antibody  29 

3.  Antigens   34 

Definition    34 

Antigenicity   34 

4.  Blood  Groups  50 

ABO  Blood  Groups  50 

MNS  Blood  Groups  57 

Rh  Groups  58 

Other  Blood  Groups  62 

5.  Plant  Agglutinins  (Lectins)  I  64 

Specificity  of  Proteins  Other  Than  Antibodies 64 

Plant  Agglutinins  65 

6.  Plant  Agglutinins  (Lectins)  II  72 

Nature  of  Plant  Agglutinins  72 

Specificity  of  Plant  Agglutinins  -". 75 

Role  of  Agglutinins  in  the  Plant  82 

Lessons  from  the  Study  of  Lectins  83 

7.  Blood  Group  Antigens  85 

Sources  of  Antigens  for  Study  85 

Blood  Group  Substances  A,  B,  H,  and  Le"  85 

Other  Human  Red  Cell  Receptors  93 


vu 


81578 


viii  CONTENTS 

8.  Salmonella  Antigens   103 

Endotoxins  103 

The  Salmonella  . 105 

Chemistry  of  the  Polysaccharide  Component  of 

Salmonella  Antigens  107 

Relation  of  Structure  of  Salmonella  Antigens  to  Specificity  108 
Cross-Reactions  112 

9.  Union  of  Antibody  with  Antigen:  Thermodynamics  118 

Forces  Involved  1 18 

Energy 124 

Entropy  127 

Free  Energy 129 

Free  Energy  and  Equilibrium 131 

10.    Energy  of  Antibody-Antigen  Reactions  134 

Direct  Calorimetry  134 

Free  Energy  from  Equilibrium  Measurements  135 

Significance  of  Thermodynamic  Constants 140 

Heat  of  Reaction  of  Isoagglutinins  145 

Index  1 5 1 


CHAPTER  1 
Antibodies  I 


Immunity 

Basically  speaking,  immunity  is  the  increased  resistance  to  an  in- 
fectious disease  which  often  follows  recovery  from  an  initial  attack. 
The  degree  of  this  immunity  is  different  with  different  diseases  and 
different  patients  and  persists  for  varying  periods  of  time.  Recovery 
from  certain  virus  diseases,  such  as  yellow  fever,  is  followed  by  a 
very  high  degree  of  resistance  which  seems  to  last  for  life  in  many 
patients.  Recovery  from  the  common  cold,  on  the  other  hand,  is 
followed  by  a  very  brief  state  of  increased  resistance,  if  indeed  by 
any  at  all.  We  shall  also  apply  the  term  immunity  to  the  artificially 
increased  resistance  produced  in  a  patient  by  injection  or  oral  ad- 
ministration of  living  virus  or  living  microorganisms  or  by  injection 
of  attenuated  or  dead  virus  or  microorganisms  or  of  antigenic  prod- 
ucts derived  from  such  material.  A  patient  whose  resistance  has  been 
heightened  by  such  treatment  is  said  to  have  been  immunized,  al- 
though he  may  not  be  immune  in  the  absolute  sense  of  the  word. 
Animals  which  have  been  caused  to  produce  antibodies  by  such  ad- 
ministration of  antigen  are  also  said  to  have  been  immunized,  even 
though  they  may  not  have  obtained  increased  resistance  to  any 
disease  as  a  result. 

Role  of  Antibodies  in  Imuinnity 

The  circulation  of  the  immune  animal  often  contains  soluble  pro- 
tective proteins  called  antibodies,  a  term  which  is  also  applied  to 
specifically  reactive  proteins  produced  in  response  to  any  antigen, 
whether  it  is  derived  from  a  pathogenic  microorganism  or  not. 


2  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

There  is  abundant  evidence  that  antibodies  play  an  important  role 
in  an  individual's  resistance  to  many  diseases.  For  example,  the 
transfer  of  antibody-containing  blood  from  a  convalescent  patient  to 
a  susceptible  person  will  often  make  the  recipient  temporarily  im- 
mune to  the  disease  from  which  the  donor  has  just  recovered  (pas- 
sive immunization).  Transfer  of  antibody  from  an  artificially  im- 
munized animal  may  be  similarly  efifective.  A  decisive  change  in  the 
sick  patient's  condition  for  the  better  ("crisis")  many  times  coin- 
cides with  the  appearance  of  specific  antibodies  in  the  blood.  The 
blood  level  of  specific  antibodies  is  often  a  fairly  reliable  index  of 
the  degree  of  a  person's  immunity. 

It  is  a  characteristic  feature  of  antibodies  that  they  react  with  the 
antigen  which  caused  their  production ;  in  fact,  new  proteins  appear- 
ing in  the  circulation  which  do  not  react  in  a  detectable  way  with 
the  antigen  responsible  for  their  production  in  general  are  not  called 
antibodies.  In  a  few  instances  antibodies  have  been  observed  which 
reacted  wath  an  antigen  different  from  the  one  which  caused  them  to 
be  produced  and  did  not  react  visibly  with  their  own  antigen  (Hooker 
and  Boyd,  1933;  Glutton,  Harington,  and  Yuill,  1938),  but  these  are 
exceptions. 

The  reaction  of  antibodies  with  their  antigen  can  have  one  or  more 
of  a  number  of  effects :  (a)  Antibodies  to  toxins  may  neutralize  the 
toxity  of  the  antigen,  and  antibodies  to  viruses  may  neutralize  the 
infectivity  of  the  antigen,  (b)  Antibodies  to  soluble  proteins  and 
other  soluble  antigens  may  precipitate  their  antigen  (Fig.  1-1).  (c) 
Antibodies  to  microorganisms  and  foreign  erythrocytes  may  cause 
the  antigenic  cells  to  stick  together  (agglutinate)  (Fig.  1-2).  (d) 
Antibodies  to  erythrocytes  and  certain  microorganisms  may  cause 
the  antigenic  cells  to  disintegrate.  This  phenomenon  is  called  lysis, 
and  for  its  production  the  cooperation  of  certain  normal  components 
of  plasma,  collectively  called  complement,  is  required,  (e)  Anti- 
bodies to  certain  microorganisms,  aided  by  complement,  may  cause 
the  death  of  the  antigenic  cells  (bactericidal  effect),  (f)  Antibody 
to  certain  microorganisms  causes  the  capsules  of  the  microorganisms 
to  swell  visibly.  This  phenomenon  is  generally  referred  to  by  its  Ger- 
man name  Quellung.  (g)  Gombination  of  antibody  with  micro- 
organisms and  other  foreign  cells  generally  makes  the  invaders  more 
attractive  to  the  leukocytes  of  the  patient's  circulation  and  thus  pro- 


ANTIBODIES  I 


Fig.  1-1.  Photographs  of  the  precipitin  reaction.  Reading  from  left  to  right: 
negative  reaction,  weak  positive  reaction,  strong  positive  reaction.  These  tests 
were  carried  out  by  the  interfacial  technique — placing  a  layer  of  diluted  antigen 
over  a  layer  of  immune  serum  in  a  test  tube). 


St 

■.•"**         ■ 

I    '    '■/_•'  •'  ^\ 

■      "*            O-            i,          ""^  "                '' 

^        o                                           o           c* 

^               ° 

^i 

-)          '>               ^       f>               "p 

O 

|^                          ft 

Fig.  1-2.  Photomicrographs    of    unagglutinated    red    blood    cells     (left)    and 
agglutinated  cells   (right). 


4  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

motes  phagocytosis,  (h)  Complement,  if  present,  is  generally  taken  up 
when  antibody  and  antigen  combine  ;  thus,  the  occurrence  of  an  other- 
wise undetectable  antibody-antigen  reaction  can  sometimes  be  de- 
duced from  observation  of  complement  fixation  alone.  The  classical 
Wassermann  test  for  syphilis  is  based  on  this  phenomenon,  (i)  The 
combination  of  antibody  and  antigen  may  lead  to  the  release  of 
histamine  and  other  toxic  substances  from  the  tissues  of  the  host, 
as  in  anaphylaxis  and  allergy. 

All  these  effects  of  antibody,  except  probably  those  of  class  (i), 
are  thought  to  be  beneficial  to  the  host  and  to  aid  in  resistance 
to  infection.  All  of  them  may,  under  suitable  conditions,  be  utilized 
in  laboratory  studies. 

However,  although  there  is  no  doubt  of  the  importance  of  antibodies 
in  immunity,  they  are  by  no  means  the  whole  story,  and  the  natural, 
more  or  less  nonspecific  mechanisms  of  resistance,  such  as  im- 
permeability of  the  skin  and  mucus  membranes,  and  bactericidal 
power  of  these  body  surfaces,  the  rise  in  body  temperature  which  often 
accompanies  infection,  the  action  of  normal  plasma  components  such 
as  complement  and  properdin,  and  the  ingestion  of  invading  micro- 
organisms by  the  leukocytes  (phagocytosis),  are  also  important.  In- 
deed, of  all  the  mechanisms  of  resistance,  phagocytosis  is  probably 
by  far  the  most  important.  However,  we  shall  here  be  concerned 
with  specific  mechanisms  of  immunity  and  shall  not  further  discuss 
these  other  tools  of  resistance. 

Nature  of  Antibodies 

In  view  of  the  importance  of  antibodies  in  immunity  and  of  their 
theoretical  interest  as  prime  examples  of  specifically  reacting  bio- 
logical substances,  it  is  not  surprising  that  many  attempts  have  been 
made  to  study  their  chemical  nature.  Thus  far  it  has  not  been  pos- 
sible to  ascertain  by  direct  chemical  analysis  the  structural  basis  for 
the  combining  power  and  specificity  of  antibodies,  because  (a)  it  is 
not  easy  to  obtain  large  amounts  of  purified  antibodies  and  (b) 
protein  chemistry  is  not  far  enough  advanced  for  detailed  knowledge 
of  the  structure  of  any  antibody  molecule  to  be  obtained. 

In  spite  of  the  difficulties,  some  preparations  of  purified  antibody 
have  been  studied.  There  has  also  been  analytical  work  on  antibody- 
antigen  compounds,  which  are  more  readily  available  in  a  relatively 


ANTIBODIES  I  5 

pure  state.  Studies  of  the  changes  in  the  composition  of  blood  follow- 
ing immunization  have  suggested  that  antibodies  belong  to  the  class 
of  serum  proteins  called  globulins.  The  distinction  between  serum 
albumin  and  serum  globulins  was  originally  based  on  solubility 
characteristics  in  neutral  salt  solutions  (Cohn  et  al.,  1940;  Svensson, 
1941).  It  is  now  based  more  on  the  observation  that  in  an  electric 
field  the  serum  globulins  move  more  slowly,  at  alkaline  pH  (Tiselius, 
1937).  In  his  classical  paper,  Tiselius  (1937)  pointed  out  that  nor- 
mal serum  globulin  showed  components  of  at  least  three  different 
electrophoretic  mobilities,  and  he  designated  them  as  alpha,  beta,  and 
gamma  globulins  in  order  of  decreasing  mobility.  Antibodies,  with 
some  possible  exceptions,  belong  to  the  gamma  globulin  class.  It 
is  this  group  of  globulins  that  increases  most  following  immunization 
(TiseHus  and  Kabat,  1939). 

In  man,  the  rabbit,  and  many  other  species,  antibodies  are  found  by 
ultracentrifugal  measurements  to  have  the  molecular  weight  charac- 
teristic of  serum  globulins,  namely  about  160,000.   In  the  horse,  pig. 


M 

U 

m 

(a)" 

1 

f 

iS 

l^^^^^^^l 

fl 

^ggH^ 

.^ 

^^9 

1^1 

■ 

1 

9 

1 

Fig.  1-3.  Models  of  typical  antibody  molecules  with  human  serum  albumin 
for  comparison,  (a)  Horse  anti-pneumococcus  antibody;  (b)  horse  antitoxin; 
(c)  rabbit  anti-ovalbumin  antibody;  (d)  human  anti-pneumococcus  antibody; 
(e)  rabbit  anti-pneumococcus  antibody;  (f)  human  gamma  globulin;  and  (g) 
human  serum  albumin. 


6  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

cow,  and  perhaps  other  species,  anti-pneumococcus  antibodies,  for 
example,  have  a  molecular  weight  of  about  900,000.  Certain  anti- 
bodies in  human  blood  seem  to  have  molecular  weights  somewhere 
between  these  values  (discussion  in  Boyd,  1956).  From  ultracentri- 
fugal  sedimentation  constants,  diffusion  constants,  and  Perrin's 
(1936)  relation  between  the  "frictional  ratio"  and  axial  ratio  of  a 
prolate  spheroid,  the  shape  of  protein  molecules  may  be  calculated. 
Photographs  of  models  of  typical  antibody  molecules,  with  human 
serum  albumin  for  comparison,  are  shown  in  Fig.  1-3. 

Actual  photographs  of  antibody  molecules,  taken  with  the  electron 
microscope,  reveal,  as  far  as  the  still  inadequate  resolving  power 
of  this  instrument  allows,  a  striking  similarity  to  the  models  shown 
in  Fig.  1-3  (see  Fig.  1-4).  Also  of  interest  in  the  photograph 
is  the  apparent  heterogeneity  in  size. 


Fig.  1-4.  Electron   micrographs   of   rabbit   antibody  molecules.    (Photograph 
by  Dr.  C.  E.  Hall.) 


Specificity 

It  is  a  very  old  observation  that  immunity  is  specific.  A  child  who 
has  recovered  from  whooping  cough  is  very  unlikely  to  get  this  disease 
again  in  the  immediate  future,  but  his  resistance  to  measles  is  not 


ANTIBODIES  I  7 

any  greater  than  before.  Even  recovery  from  the  superficially  very 
similar  disease  German  measles  does  not  seem  to  confer  any  im- 
munity to  ordinary  measles,  and  the  child  generally  catches  all  the 
common  childhood  infections,  one  after  the  other.  If  he  misses  one 
or  more  of  them  he  remains  susceptible  to  it,  as  he  demonstrates 
by  promptly  coming  down  with  it  when  exposed  later  in  life,  possibly 
from  one  of  his  own  children.  However,  this  specificity  is  not  ab- 
solute. As  an  example  we  may  mention  that  recovery  from  the  rela- 
tively mild  flea-borne  typhus  caused  by  Rickettsia  mooseri  is  fol- 
lowed by  immunity  to  the  much  more  serious  louse-borne  typhus 
caused  by  Rickettsia  prozmceki  (Rivers,  1952). 

Specificity  of  Antibodies 

Just  as  the  immunity  following  recovery  from  infections  is  rela- 
tively specific,  so  is  the  power  of  antibodies  to  react  with  antigens. 
Diphtheria  antitoxin  will  neutralize  diphtheria  toxin  and  possibly 
save  the  life  of  a  patient  with  diphtheria ;  it  does  not  neutralize 
tetanus  toxin  and  is  of  no  value  in  the  prevention  or  treatment  of 
tetanus.  In  general,  antibodies  seem  to  be  adapted  to  react  just  with 
the  antigen . which  called  forth  their  production  (homologous  anti- 
gen). But  the  specificity  of  antibodies,  like  the  specificity  of  im- 
munity, is  not  absolute.  Antibodies  produced  by  injecting  rabbits 
with  purified  ovalbumin  from  the  hen  react  also  with  the  ovalbumin 
of  various  other  birds  such  as  the  duck.  A  reaction  of  an  antibody 
with  a  related  antigen  is  called  a  cross-reaction.  It  is  generally  not 
as  strong  as  the  reaction  of  the  antibody  with  the  homologous  anti- 
gen. 

Today  there  is  no  doubt  that  the  specificity  of  antibodies  depends 
on  their  chemical  structure.  But  there  is  as  yet  no  agreement  whether 
the  specificity  is  a  result  of  differences  in  amino  acid  composition  or 
in  amino  acid  sequence,  or  merely  of  the  way  in  which  the  polypeptide 
chain  is  folded  to  produce  the  globular  molecules  shown  in  Fig.  1-3. 
Pauling  (1940)  proposed  the  latter  view.  It  is  a  fact  that  amino 
acid  analyses  of  antibodies  have  not  yet  revealed  any  clear-cut  dif- 
ferences in  amino  acid  composition  between  different  antibodies  or 
between  particular  antibodies  and  normal  globulin  (Boyd,  1956; 
Smith  et  al.,  1955).  If  the  differences  were  mainly  in  amino  acid 
sequence    and    were    confined    to    a    "central,    dififerential    segment" 


8  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

(Lederberg,    1959),   they  might  be  too  minor  to  be   found  by  the 
presently  available  methods  of  analysis. 

Although  the  brilliant  researches  of  Sanger  (1956)  into  the  se- 
quence of  amino  acids  in  the  polypeptide  chain  have  resulted  in  the 
complete  elucidation  of  the  structure  of  insulin  and  a  few  other 
polypeptides,  such  analysis  has  not  yet  been  carried  very  far  with 
antibodies.  However,  we  do  know  that  the  N-terminal  sequence  of 
all  rabbit  globuHns  thus  far  studied,  including  various  antibodies, 
seems  to  be  (Porter,  1950;  McFadden  and  Smith,  1955)  : 

Alanine- — leucine — valine — aspartic  acid — glutamic  acid — 
In  contrast  to  the  uniformity  of  rabbit  globulins,  horse  globulins, 
whether  antibody  or  normal  globulin,  have  proved  to  be  quite  hetero- 
geneous in  this  respect,  all  preparations  exhibiting  a  wide  variety  of 
N-terminal  groups  (McFadden  and  Smith,  1955b).  The  globulins 
of  man  likewise  differ  among  themselves  in  amino  acid  composition 
(Smith  et  al.,  1955b;  Putnam,  1955). 

Pozvers  of  Discrimination  of  Antibodies 

It  was  long  ago  suspected  that  the  cross-reactions  of  antibodies 
with  related  antigens  were  due  to  chemical  similarities  between  the 
homologous  and  the  cross-reacting  antigen.  But  in  the  absence  of 
detailed  information  about  the  chemical  structure  of  natural  antigens 
(a  situation  which  has  improved  only  slightly  since  the  earliest 
days  of  immunochemical  work),  it  was  not  possible  to  state  how 
great  the  chemical  similarity  between  two  antigens  had  to  be  to 
make  cross-reaction  possible  or,  to  put  it  another  way,  how  small  a 
chemical  differences  antibodies  could  detect.  Karl  Landsteiner  (1945) 
largely  overcame  this  difficulty  by  the  use  of  conjugated  antigens. 

It  was  known  that  chemical  treatment  (nitration,  iodination,  etc.) 
of  protein  antigens  often  changed  the  immunochemical  specificity. 
Landsteiner  showed  that  if  simple  chemical  compounds  were  coupled 
chemically  to  protein  antigens  it  was  possible  to  produce  antibodies 
which  reacted  specificially  with  the  simple  free  compound  (which 
Landsteiner  called  a  hapten).  Thus  it  was  possible  to  observe  sero- 
logical reactions  which  depended  only  on  the  hapten,  the  structure 
of  which  was  known,  and  not  on  the  natural  protein  antigen  of  yet 
undetermined  chemical  structure. 


ANTIBODIES  I 


As  an  example,  let  us  take  the  aromatic  amine,  metanilic  acid, 
and  diazotize  the  amino  group  by  treating  the  compound  with  nitrous 
acid    (Fig.   1-5). 


HNO..     -^ 

JSO3H  I         JSO.,H 

Metanilic  acid- H  CI  Diazotized  metanilic 

acid 

Fig.  1-5.  Diazotization  of  metanilic  acid. 

The  resulting  diazonium  salt  will  couple  with  phenols  in  alkaline 
solution  to  give  colored  azo  dyes  (Fig.  1-6).  It  will  also  couple  with 
the  phenolic  group  of  the  amino  acid  tyrosine,  a  constituent  of  most 
proteins. 


+ 
JSO3H  H 

Diazotized  metanilic       Phloroglucinol  Azo  dye 

acid 

Fig.  1-6.  Coupling  of  diazotized  metanilic  acid  with  phloroglucinol  to  form 
an  azo  dye. 

Let  us  suppose  we  couple  the  diazotized  metanilic  acid  (our  hapten) 
with  the  mixture  of  proteins  provided  by  horse  serum.  If  we  repre- 
sent the  horse  serum  proteins  by  H  and  the  diazotized  metanilic  acid 
by  M,  we  may  reprsent  the  coupled  azoprotein  as  HM.  Injection  of 
this  compound  HM  into  rabbits  will  usually  cause  the  production  of 
a  number  of  different  antibodies  to  the  proteins  of  horse  serum,  which 
we  may  designate  collectively  as  anti-H,  and  antibodies  to  metanilic 
acid,  which  we  may  designate  as  anti-M. 

If,  on  testing  the  rabbit  antibodies  with  the  antigen  HM  we  in- 
jected, we  get  a  positive  serological  reaction  (formation  of  a  specific 
precipitate),  we  shall  not  know  whether  this  is  due  to  the  union  of 


10 


INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 


M  and  anti-M  or  the  union  of  H  and  anti-H,  or  both.  But  let  us 
suppose  we  couple  diazotized  metanilic  acid  with  the  proteins  of 
chicken  serum,  which  we  may  designate  as  C.  Rabbit  antibodies  to 
horse  serum  proteins  do  not  precipitate  with  chicken  serum  proteins, 
so  the  confusion  caused  by  interference  of  the  protein  carrier  is  elimi- 
nated. If  we  mix  our  immune  rabbit  serum  with  CM  and  obtain  a 
precipitate,  we  know  it  is  due  to  the  reaction  of  the  anti-M  of  the 
rabbit  serum  with  the  M  (metanilic  acid)  we  have  coupled  with  the 
chicken  serum  C   (Fig.   1-7). 


Rabbit  immunized   with  complex 
antigen   (horse  serum  coupled  with 
hapten  M)   gives  ontiserum  "anti-M," 
which  contains  anti-horse  antibodies 
and  antibodies  for  hopten  (anti-M) 


+ 


Precipitote 


Precipitate 


"Anti-M"  Chicken         No  precipitate  "Anti-M"  Chicken-M         Precipitate 

Fig.  1-7.  Principle  of  detecting  antibodies  to  a  hapten  independently  of  anti- 
bodies to  the  protein  carrier. 


References 

Boyd,     W.     C,     1956,    Fundamentals    of    IininiDiology,    3rd     ed.,     Interscience, 

New    York. 
Cohn,  E.  J.,  T.  L.  McMeekin,  J.  L.  Oncley,  J.  AI.  Newell,  and  W.  L.  Hughes. 
1940,  /.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  62,  3386. 


ANTIBODIES  I  11 

Landsteiner,  K.,    1945,    The   Specificity  of  Serological  Reactions,   2nd  rev.  ed., 

Harvard  University   Press,   Cambirdge. 
Lederberg,    J.,    1959,    Science,   129,    1649. 

McFadden,  M.  L.,  and   E.  L.  Smith,    1955a,  /.   Biol.   Chem.   214,    185. 
McFadden,    M.  L.,  and   E.    L.  Smith,    1955b,  /.   Biol.  Chem.  216,   621. 
Pauling,    L.,    1940,  /.   Am.   Chem.   Soc.   62,    2643. 
Perrin,  P.,  1936,  /.  phys.  radium  7,  1. 
Porter,  R.  R.,  1950,  Biochem.  J.  46,  473. 
Putnam,   F.   W.,  1955,   Science  122.    275. 
Rivers,   T.    M.,    1952,    Viral   and    Rickettsial   Infections    of   Man,    Lippincott. 

Philadelphia. 
Sanger,   F.,   1956,    in  D.  E.   Green    (ed.),    Currents  in    Biochemical   Research 

1956,   Interscience,  New    York. 
Smith,  E.  L.,  M.  L.  McFadden,  A.  Stockell,  and  V.  Buetttner-Janusch,  1955a, 

/.   Biol.  Chem.   214,   197. 
Smith,   E.    L.,  D.   M.    Brown,   M.    L.    McFadden,   V.    Buettner-Janusch,    and 

B.  V.  Jager,    1955b,  /.   Biol.   Chem.   216,  601. 
Svensson,   H.,  1941,  /.  Biol.  Chem.   139.  805. 
Tiselius,  A.,  1937,     Biochem.  J.  31,  1464. 
Tiselius,  A.,  and  E.  A.  Kabat,  1939,  /.  E.vptl.  Med.  69,  119. 


CHAPTER  2 
Antibodies  II 


Specificity  and  Chemical  Structure  of  Antigen 

We  are  now  in  a  position  to  investigate  the  effect  on  serological 
specificity  of  known  variations,  large  or  small,  in  the  chemical  com- 
position of  cross-reactive  antigens.  Suppose,  for  example,  we  replace 
the  metanilic  acid  which  we  employed  in  making  the  azo  chicken 
serum  CM  with  a  different  aromatic  amine,  which  we  may  designate 
as  M'.  Then  if  we  test  CM'  with  our  antiserum  against  horse- 
metanilic  acid,  a  positive  reaction  will  depend  on  whether  M'  is  suf- 
ficiently similar  to  M  to  combine  with  anti-M.  If  M'  is  w-amino- 
benzoic  acid  or  w-aminoarsenic  acid,  for  example,  a  positive  reac- 
tion may  be  obtained  with  an  antiserum  to  horse-metanilic  acid, 
although  the  amount  of  precipitate  will  be  less.  This  shows  that  the 
antibodies  to  metanilic  acid,  though  best  adapted  to  the  homologous 
hapten,  can  react  also  with  other  haptens  having  a  dift'erent  acid 
group  in  the  meta  position.  If  we  make  the  difference  greater  by  em- 
ploying a  hapten  with  the  acid  group  in  the  para  position,  or  use  a 
hapten  without  any  acid  group,  little  if  any  cross-reaction  is  ob- 
served (Fig.  2-1).  We  conclude  that  antibodies  are  able  to  dis- 
tinguish structural  isomers  (molecules  containing  the  same  groups 
but  in  different  positions)  but  can  also  distinguish  simple  groups 
(acid  groups  in  this  instance)  which  occupy  the  same  position. 

It  is  a  characteristic  of  antisera  that  the  antibody  molecules  they 
contain  are  not  all  alike ;  they  may  differ  in  strength  of  reaction  with 
a  given  hapten  and  may  differ  in  their  specificity.  This  is  easily  shown 
in  the  present  case  by  allowing  the  anti-metanilic  acid  serum  to  react 

12 


ANTIBODIES  II 

NH2  NH2  NH. 

Antigen 
containing 

JSO3H        1^       JA3O3H2      ^       JCOOH 

SO-jH 

Metanilic  acid  w-Aminoarsonic  ;w-Aminobenzoic  Sulfanilic  Aniline 
acid  acid  acid 

Strength  of  ^  q 

reaction  ^^=^  ^  ±  =  u 

Fig.  2-1.  Reaction  of  antiserum  for  metanilic  acid  (Landsteiner,  1945). 

with  a  protein  coupled  with  one  of  the  cross-reacting  haptens  vmtil 
no  further  reaction  takes  place,  then  testing  the  treated  antiserum  with 
the  homologous  and  other  related  haptens.  In  order  to  avoid  having 
soluble  complexes  of  antibody  and  antigen  left  in  the  mixture,  the 
anti-metanilic  serum  may  be  treated  with  haptens  coupled  to  the 
insoluble  structures  (stromata)  left  after  lysis  of  red  blood  cells  and 
removal  of  the  hemoglobin.  A  serum  which  has  been  thus  treated 
to  remove  all  the  antibody  which  will  react  with  a  given  antigen  is 
said  to  have  been  absorbed  with  that  antigen.  The  results  of  such  an 
experiment  (Landsteiner  and  van  der  Scheer,  1936)  are  shown  in 
Fig.  2-2. 

It  can  be  seen  that  in  each  case  absorption  with  heterologous 
hapten-protein  compound,  to  the  point  of  reducing  the  reaction  with 
that  hapten  to  zero,  leaves  considerable  precipitating  power  for 
antigens  containing  the  homologous  hapten.  Generally,  it  also  leaves 
some  reactivity  for  other  heterologous  haptens.  Each  hapten,  evi- 
dently, combines  with  that  fraction  of  the  antibody  molecules  for 
which  it  has  the  highest  affinity.  The  majority  of  the  antibody  mole- 
cules react  best  with  the  homologous  hapten,  most  of  which  is  left 
after  heterologous  absorption. 

Similar  results  were  obtained  by  Hooker  and  Boyd  (1934)  and 
Landsteiner  and  van  der  Scheer  (1940)  with  egg  albumins  of  vari- 
ous species,  although  here  the  exact  nature  of  the  chemical  similari- 
ties which  led  to  cross-reaction  was  not  known. 

From  these  and  similar  experiments  (Landsteiner  and  van  der 
Scheer  (1936)  drew  the  conclusion  that  "antibodies  formed  in  re- 
sponse to  one  antigen,  although  adjusted  to  a  certain  structure,  are  not 
entirely  uniform  but  vary  in  specificity  to  some  degree."  Boyd  (1943) 


14  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

Anti-metanilic  acid(M)  Antigens  made  with  chicken  serum  and: 

antiserum  absorbed  with 

azo-stromata  made  with:  M  GAB 


+  +  ± 


+  +  +  +± 


+  +  +  +± 


(Unabsorbed)  +  +  +  ±  ++  +  +± 

Fig.  2-2.  Precipitin  reactions  of  absorbed  anti-metanilic  acid  antiserum  with 
various  conjugated  antigens. 

suggested  that  we  should  think  of  the  antibody  molecules  of  an  im- 
mune serum  as  "a  large  family,  with  varying  degrees  of  deviation  from 
a  mean."  Pauling,  Pressman,  and  Grossberg  (1944)  made  a  similar 
and  more  precise  suggestion.  In  their  opinion,  the  free  binding  ener- 
gies of  the  different  antibody  molecules  (for  the  determinant  that 
induced  their  formation)  are  distributed  according  to  the  Gauss 
error  function.* 

In  the  description  of  the  reactions  of  antibodies  with  simple  sub- 
stances (haptens)  it  was  stated  that  to  detect  anti-metanilic  acid 
(anti-M)  antibodies,  for  example,  we  make  use  of  a  protein,  different 
from  the  one  used  as  the  carrier  of  the  hapten  during  immunization, 
coupled  with  diazotized  metanilic  acid.  It  may  have  occurred  to  the 
reader  to  ask  what  would  happen  if  we  mixed  the  anti-M  serum  di- 
rectly with  metanilic  acid? 


*  This  is  the   well-known    "normal   distribution"   formula   of  statistics, 
fix)    =  [l/aV(27r)]exp  i-xyia') 
where  a,  called  the  standard  deviation,  is  a  measure  of  the  "dispersion"  or  degree 
of  heterogeneity  of  the  population  whose   composition  is   summarized  by   the 
curve.  Two  graphic  examples  of  this  distribution  are  shown  in  Fig.  2-3. 


ANTIBODIES  II 


15 


-6    -5     -4    -3    -2 


Fig.  2-3.  Probability    ("error")    distribution   when   standard   deviation   equals 
1  and  2. 


The  answer  is  that  with  simple  haptens  such  as  metanih'c  acid 
no  visible  reaction  occurs  as  a  rule.  Originally,  it  was  thought  that 
the  simple  hapten  was  too  small  to  take  part  in  a  precipitin  reaction, 
but  we  are  now  inclined  to  believe  that,  although  size  may  have 
something  to  do  with  it,  the  main  deficiency  of  metanilic  acid  and  other 
simple  haptens  in  this  respect  is  that  they  have  only  one  point  of  attach- 
ment (combining  group)  for  the  antibody.  Haptens  containing  two 
or  more  combining  groups  sometimes  precipitate  with  the  anti-hapten 
antibody. 

Nevertheless,  the  anti-metanilic  acid  antibody  has  a  strong  af- 
finity for  metanilic  acid,  for  it  combines  with  this  hapten  when  it  is 
part  of  a  metanilic  acid-protein  compound  and  forms  a  specific  pre- 
cipitate in  the  usual  way  though  it  does  not  precipitate  metanilic  acid 
from  simple  solution.  The  anti-M  antibody  may  even  combine  with 
metanilic  acid  itself  without  producing  a  precipitate. 

Inhibition  Reactions 

Now  it  was  known  that  an  excess  of  antigen  usually  prevents  the 
production  of  a  specific  precipitate  or  greatly  diminishes  the  amount. 
Clearly  it  must  do  this  by  combining  with  the  antibody,  for  addition 
of  an  imrelated  antigen  has  no  such  inhibitory  efifect.  Therefore, 
Landsteiner   reasoned  that  an  excess   merely  of  the  hapten,   which 


16 


INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 


logically  must  combine  with  specific  antibody,  ought  in  a  similar 
way  to  prevent  or  diminish  precipitation  of  the  anti-hapten  antibody 
with  a  hapten-protein  compound.  Experiments  showed  that  this  does 
in  fact  happen.  Thus  Landsteiner  invented  the  inhibition  reaction, 
which  has  been  of  enormous  value  in  the  study  of  immunochemical 
specificity.  How  specific  inhibition  works  is  shown  schematically  in 
Fig.  2-4. 


Antibody 


Antigen 


Precipitate   or  ogglutinate 


Antibody 


Antibody-  hapten 
complex 


No   precipitate 
or  agglutinate 


Antibody- tiopten  Antigen 

complex 

Fig.  2-4.  Principle   of  inhibition  by   a  iiaptcn   of  serological    reactions. 


ANTIBODIES  II  17 

To  inhibit  completely  the  reaction  of  an  anti-hapten  antibody  with 
the  conjugated  hapten-antigen  generally  requires  a  good  deal  more  of 
the  inhibiting  hapten,  in  dissolved  form,  than  that  contained  in  the 
conjugated  antigen.  From  this  we  might  deduce  that  the  binding  force 
of  the  hapten  alone  with  the  antibody  is  less  than  the  force  which 
unites  the  antibody  and  the  conjugated  antigen.  The  hapten  does 
combine  with  the  antibody,  however,  for  unrelated  haptens  have  no 
inhibitory  effect,  and  a  given  hapten  does  not  inhibit  unrelated  anti- 
body-antigen reactions.  In  other  words,  inhibition  is  specific.  In 
Fig.  2-5  the  inhibition  is  completely  specific,  that  is,  each  hapten  pre- 
vents precipitation  only  of  the  homologous  antibody  and  antigen.  That 
haptens  combine  with  their  specific  antibody  can  be  demonstrated  by 
the  power  of  antibody  to  prevent  a  diffusible  hapten  from  dialyzing 
through  a  membrane  otherwise  permeable  to  it. 

If  closely  related  haptens  are  tested  against   the   same  antibody- 


Amount  of  precipitate  given  by  antisera 
for  corresponding  antigen,  in  presence  of 


Antiserui 
for 


H2N 


AsOsHz     H2N 


H2N 


COOH 


SO3H 


H2N 


+  +  + 


+  +  + 


+  +  + 


+  +  + 


+  + 


+  +  + 


COOH 

Fig.  2-5.  Inhibition  of  precipitin  reaction  with  homologous  and  heterologous 
haptens. 


18  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

antigen  system,  it  is  usually  found  that  the  homologous  hapten  in- 
hibits best  and  that  other  haptens  inhibit  more  or  less  well,  depend- 
ing on  the  degree  of  their  resemblance  to  the  hapten  contained  in  the 
immunizing  antigen.  Thus,  in  Table  2-1  we  see  that  mononitro- 
strychnine  inhibits  the  reaction  of  an  anti-strychnine  antiserum  with 
a  conjugated  strychnine-antigen  as  well  as  does  strychnine  itself, 
whereas  the  related  alkaloid  brucine,  which  differs  from  strychnine 

TABLE  2-1 

Inhibition  of  Anti-Strychnine  Sera  by  Various  Haptens* 
Hooker  and  Boyd,  1940 


Micromoles  of  test  subst 

ance^" 

Test  substance 

1.00 

0.67 

0.44 

0.30 

0.20 

0.13 

0.09 

0.06 

0.04 

Strychnine 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

t 

Mononitrostrychnine 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

t 

Dinitrostrychnine 

+ 

+ 

Monoaminostrychnine 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

t 

t 

+ 

Diaminostrychnine 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

t 

t 

Brucine 

0 

0 

0 

0 

t 

± 

+ 

Morphine 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

»  Hooker  and  Boyd,  1940. 

*>  The  symbols  indicate  the  degree  of  precipitation  obtained  when  the  hapten- 
serum  mixture  was  overlayered  with  a  suitable  concentration  of  the  strychnine- 
protein  antigen.  The  symbol  +  indicates  a  positive  precipitation  reaction,  ±  a 
weak  reaction,  "t"  a  faint  trace,  and  0  no  precipitation.  Absence  of  a  symbol 
means  that  the  test  was  not  done  or  could  not  be  read  because  of  nonspecific 
precipitation. 

only  in  possessing  two  methoxy  groups,  does  not  inhibit  as  well ;  that 
is,  a  larger  amount  of  it  is  required  to  prevent  the  antibody-antigen  re- 
action. The  unrelated  alkaloid  morphine  does  not  inhibit  at  all.  In 
this  case  the  effectiveness  of  different  haptens  was  compared  by 
testing  decreasing  amounts  (increasing  dilutions)  of  the  haptens 
against  a  constant  amount  of  antiserum,  to  which  was  later  added  a 
suitable  amount  of  antigen. 

In  general,  we  may  expect  the  results  obtained  with  haptens  H,  H', 
H",  and  G,  where  H'  is  closely  related  chemically  to  H,  W  less 


ANTIBODIES  II 


19 


closely  related,  and  G  unrelated,  to  give  results  similar  to  those  in 
Table  2-1.  This  is  shown  schematically  in  Table  2-2. 

TABLE  2-2 

Precipitation  Reaction  of  Anti-H  Antibody  and  H  Antigen, 
in  Presence  of  Hapten* 


Dilution 

of  hapten 

Hapten 

1:2 

1:4 

1:8 

1:16 

1:32 

1:64 

H 

0 

0 

0 

0 

+ 

+  ± 

H' 

0 

0 

± 

+ 

+  + 

+  + 

H" 

0 

± 

+ 

+  + 

+  + 

+  + 

G 

+  + 

-F-H 

+  + 

+  + 

+  + 

+  + 

*  ++   =  Strong  reaction.  Other  symbols  as  in  Table  2-1. 

The  relative  effectiveness  of  different  haptens  as  inhibitors  can 
also  be  shown  by  plotting  concentrations,  or  maximum  dilutions 
which  inhibit  (Fig.  2-6). 


O 


O 


1 


o 


o 


o 


o 


I  I  1 1 1 


o 


o 


Fig.  2-6.  Inhibition   of  precipitin   reaction  of   anti-benzoic   acid  antibody   by 
various  haptens. 


20  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

Another  way  of  comparing  the  inhibiting  powers  of  different  hap- 
tens is  to  use  constant  concentrations  (preferably  expressed  as  molari- 
ties) of  haptens  against  successive  dilutions  of  the  antiserum.  In 
this  case,  again  using  the  hypothetical  haptens  H,  H',  H",  and  G, 
we  might  obtain  the  sort  of  result  shown  in  Table  2-3. 

TABLE  2-3 

Precipitation  Reaction  of  Anti-H  Antibody  and  H  Antigen, 
in  Presence  of  Hapten* 


Dilution  of 

antiserum 

Hapten 

1:2 

1:4 

1:8 

1:16 

1:32 

1:64 

H 

+ 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

H' 

+  + 

+ 

± 

0 

0 

0 

H" 

-I-  + 

+  + 

+ 

+ 

± 

0 

G 

-f-1- 

+  -H 

+  + 

+  -f 

+ 

± 

*  Symbols  as  in  Table  2-2. 

Instead  of  trying  to  find  the  antibody  concentration  which  is  com- 
pletely inhibited  by  a  given  concentration  of  hapten,  or  the  hapten 
concentration  which  will  completely  inhibit  a  given  concentration  of 
antibody,  it  is  more  accurate  to  measure  the  amount  of  precipitate 
produced  under  the  various  conditions,  and  estimate  the  amount  of 
hapten  which  gives  just  50  per  cent  inhibition. 

Statistical  Methods 

If  several  such  series  of  quantitative  measurements  are  carried 
out,  it  is  possible  to  obtain  a  mean  (average)  estimate  of  the  50 
per  cent  inhibiting  dose  and,  from  the  standard  deviation  of  this 
mean,  an  estimate  of  its  reliability.  When  such  standard  errors 
are  calculated  they  tend  to  be  rather  large,  for  the  quantitative 
precipitin  technique  is  not  as  reproducible  as  the  measurements  of 
inorganic  quantitative  analysis  or  physical  chemistry  are.  For  this 
and  a  variety  of  other  reasons,  standard  errors  are  not  usually 
calculated  for  such  estimates :  (a)  The  necessary  determinations  would 
require  too  great  an  outlay  of  the  experimenter's  time  and  of  an 


ANTIBODIES  II  21 

antibody  that  may  be  in  short  supply,  (b)  The  goal  of  such  experi- 
ments is  not  usually  an  estimate  of  the  actual  inhibiting  dose  of  any 
one  particular  hapten,  but  an  estimate  of  the  relative  inhibiting  power 
of  two  different  haptens ;  in  other  words,  a  ratio.  It  is  quickly 
found  that  attempts  to  calculate  the  standard  error  of  a  ratio  from 
the  standard  errors  of  the  two  numbers  involved  leads  one  into 
Higher  Statistics. 

It  might  seem  to  the  non-serologist  that  in  the  simple  type 
of  inhibition  study  shown  schematically  in  Tables  2-2  and  2-3  sta- 
tistical methods  could  be  applied  and  would  be  helpful,  but  this  is 
not  generally  the  case  either.  To  begin  with,  inhibition  experiments 
are  ordinarily  interpreted  as  if  inhibition  were  an  all-or-none 
phenomenon.  Thus  from  the  first  line  of  Table  2-2  we  conclude 
that  for  complete  inhibition  (tube  4,  counting  from  the  left)  of 
the  amount  of  serum  used  in  the  experiment  1/16  of  the  amount 
of  hapten  H  contained  in  a  unit  volume  of  stock  solution  is  sufficient. 
But  for  all  we  know  the  amount  of  hapten  in  tube  4  may  be  any- 
where from  1.02  to  1.98  times  the  minimal  inhibiting  dose  (MID) 
of  H.  If  tube  4  contains  1.02  MID,  then  tube  5  in  turn  contains 
only  0.51  MID,  and  the  unavoidable  accidental  variations  in  experi- 
mental conditions  are  not  likely  to  cause  tube  5  to  give  a  nega- 
tive reading,  though  they  well  might  make  tube  4  positive.  But  if 
tube  4  contains  1.98  MID,  which  is  equally  possible,  then  tube  5 
would  contain  0.99  MID,  and  a  slight  variation  in  the  conditions 
of  the  experiment  might  mean  that  tube  5  would  read  negative  in- 
stead of  positive.  Thus  in  different  experiments  our  estimate  of  the 
smallest  amount  of  hapten  that  will  completely  inhibit  a  given  amount 
of  antiserum  might  vary  from  1.0  to  2.0  to  0.5  mM.  An  experimenter 
is  likely  to  feel  that  he  is  wasting  his  time  in  averaging  numbers  like 
1.0,  2.0,  and  0.5,  not  to  speak  of  trying  to  estimate  a  standard  devia- 
tion and  a  standard  error  of  the  resulting  mean. 

Also,  it  must  be  realized  that,  just  as  the  results  with  hapten  H 
might  vary  from  1.0  to  2.0  to  0.5  mM,  so  the  results  with  hapten  H' 
might  vary  from  0.25  to  0.5  to  0.125  mM.  It  is  expected  that  the 
variations  in  estimated  MID's  of  the  two  haptens  will  generally 
go  in  the  same  direction ;  indeed,  this  is  one  of  the  reasons  for  run- 
ning all  the  tests  simultaneously,  but  it  is  apparent  that  the  ratio 
of  the  apparent  MID's  might  vary  from  16  to  1. 


22  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

In  the  second  place,  the  all-or-none  interpretation  of  inhibition 
experiments  is  an  oversimpHfication.  The  experiment  summarized 
in  the  first  Hne  of  Table  2-2  actually  yields  more  information  than 
is  contained  in  the  mere  statement  that  tubes  1  to  4  are  negative  and 
tubes  5,  6,  etc.,  are  positive.  The  strength  of  the  reaction  in  the 
first  tube  to  the  right  of  the  last  negative  tube  also  contributes  in- 
formation, for  the  reaction  can  vary  from  weak  to  strong.  Taking 
the  simple  point  of  view,  for  example,  we  should  estimate  from 
Table  2-2  that  hapten  H'  is  only  one-fourth  as  effective  an  inhibitor  as 
hapten  H,  for  it  takes  four  times  as  much  to  produce  complete  in- 
hibition. But  if  we  take  account  of  the  fact  that  the  next  tube  after 
complete  inhibition  gives  a  reaction  of  +  in  the  case  of  hapten  H 
and  only  ±  in  the  case  of  H',  it  is  clear  that  H'  is  actually  some- 
what more  than  one-fourth  as  effective  as  H'.  But  how  much  more? 
It  is  hard  to  put  such  things  into  numerical  terms.  It  is  possible  to 
invent  codes  for  the  translation  of  such  readings  into  quantitative 
terms,  or  appropriate  numerical  scores  may  be  found  by  statistical 
methods  (see,  for  example,  Fisher,  1950,  pp.  289—295).  In  general, 
however,  such  treatments  of  the  results  of  inhibition  tests  have  not 
been  found  to  extract  enough  extra  information  from  the  results 
to  justify  the  calculations  involved. 

Recognizing,  therefore,  that  the  results  of  inhibition  experiments 
are  only  semiquantitative  at  best,  serologists  who  are  attempting  to 
compare  the  inhibitory  power  of  two  different  haptens  do  not 
generally  attempt  to  make  quantitative  estimates,  but  are  content 
to  say  merely  that  hapten  H  is  more  effective,  for  this  particular 
serum,  than  H'  is.  Some  tend  to  rely  on  the  old  rule  of  thumb, 
which  is  pretty  well  borne  out  in  practice,  that  a  difference  in  the 
results  obtained  with  two  haptens  is  significant  if  the  difference  in 
their  inhibiting  capacity  differs  rather  consistently,  from  one  ex- 
periment to  another,  by  two  tubes  (ordinarily  meaning  a  four- fold 
difference  in  effective  concentrations).  If  the  results  do  not  differ 
by  this  much,  one  may  suspect  a  difference  in  the  effectiveness  of  the 
two  haptens,  without  venturing  a  confident  opinion.  Even  such  a 
difference,  however,  arbitrarily  judged  to  be  "non-significant,"  may 
be  of  value  as  a  guide  to  further  experiments. 

The  value  of  statistical  methods  in  general  is  of  course  not  in 
doubt.     For   a   lonsj   time   certain   biologists,    and   immunologists   in 


ANTIBODIES  II  23 

particular,  often  failed  to  avail  themselves  as  fully  as  they  might 
have  of  statistical  methods  (Batson,  1951).  The  situation  has 
pretty  well  been  corrected  in  recent  years,  however.  A  summary  of 
some  of  the  current  applications  of  statistics  to  immunology  will 
be  found  in  my  Fundamentals  of  Immunology  (Boyd,  1956).  Indeed, 
it  is  to  be  feared  that  today  there  are  a  few  biologists  who  feel, 
as  many  physical  anthropologists  did  30  years  ago,  that  statistics 
will  cure  all  ills.  Actually,  of  course,  the  results  of  statistical  analysis 
can  never  be  better  than  the  data  themselves.  A  false  sense  of  security 
stemming  from  a  blind  application  of  statistical  methods  to  situations 
where  they  are  not  appropriate  can  be  as  bad  as  the  former  tendency 
to  avoid  their  use. 

Stereoisomerism 
Having  shown  that  antibodies  can  distinguish  structural  isomers, 
Landsteiner  naturally  asked  if  they  could  also  distinguish  stereoiso- 
mers and  therefore  next  turned  his  attention  to  this  problem.  In 
organic  chemistry  it  is  established  that,  whenever  a  carbon  atom  has 
four  different  groups  attached  to  it,  there  are  two  possible  arrange- 
ments of  these  groups  which  are  essentially  different  from  each  other, 
somewhat  as  the  right  and  left  hands  differ  from  each  other  (Fig.  2-7). 

X 


z  z 

Fig.  2-7.  Models  of  right-  and  left-handed  molecules. 

The  essential  difference  between  the  two  possible  isomers  in  such 
a  case  is  correctly  shown  only  in  three  dimensions.  Since  it  is  not 
generally  convenient  to  have  three-dimensional  models  in  front  of 
us  when  discussing  isomerism,  it  is  customary  to  represent  such  com- 
pounds by  a  projection  on  two  dimensions,  as  shown  below. 

X  X 

I  I 

W  -  C  -  Y  Y  -  C  -  W 

I  I 

z  z 


24  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

As  long  as  we  remember  that  such  projections  must  not  be  taken  out 
of  the  plane  of  the  paper,  no  incorrect  conclusions  will  be  drawn  from 
their  use. 

Organic  compounds  differing  in  the  spatial  arrangement  of  the 
four  different  groups  attached  to  a  carbon  atom  have  the  same  chemi- 
cal and  physical  properties  but  differ  in  their  effect  on  polarized  light. 
Therefore,  they  are  said  to  be  optical  isomers.  An  example  of  such 
an  optically  isomeric  compound  is  aminobenzoylphenylaminoacetic 
acid,  which  exists  in  two  forms.  One,  the  d  form,  rotates  the  plane 
of  polarized  light  to  the  right.  The  other,  the  /  form,  rotates  it  to  the 
left  (Fig.  2-8). 

H  COOH 

Hon/       \— conhc— /       \    h.n/       \— conhc— /       \ 

COOH  H 

rf-/)-aminobenzoylphenylamino-  /-/)-aminobenzoylphenylamino- 

acetic  acid  acetic  acid 

Fig.  2-8. 

Containing  an  aromatic  amino  group,  these  compounds  can  be 
diazotized,  coupled  to  proteins,  and  made  to  function  as  haptens. 
Since  optical  isomerism  plays  a  very  important  role  in  biochemistry, 
we  would  expect  that  antibodies  would  be  able  to  distinguish  these 
two  isomeric  haptens.  In  fact,  Landsteiner  and  van  der  Scheer  (1928) 
found  that,  although  the  undiluted  antigens  gave  some  cross-reaction, 
they  reacted  quite  specificially  when  diluted  one  to  one  hundred 
(1:100). 

In  later  work  Landsteiner  and  van  der  Scheer  (1929)  showed  that 
D-  and  L-tartaric  acid  (Table  2-4),  where  two  asymmetric  carbon 
atoms  are  involved,  could  be  differentiated  by  the  appropriate  anti- 
bodies and  that  both  were  distinguishable  from  the  "internally  com- 
pensated" mesotartaric  acid. 

Next  to  proteins,  polysaccharides  are  the  most  important  natural 
antigens.  It  was  therefore  logical  to  ask  if  isomers  of  sugars  which 
differ  in  the  configuration  of  one  or  more  carbon  atoms  and  are  not 
necessarily  optical  antipodes  could  be  distinguished  by  antibodies. 
Goebel  and  Avery  (1929)  showed  that  the  monosascharides  D-glucose 
and  D-galactose,  which  differ  only  in  the  configuration  of  the  fourth 


ANTIBODIES  II 


25 


TABLE  2-4 
Serological  Specificity  of  Stereoisomers  of  Tartaric  Acid 


Antigen  from* 

/-Tartaric  acid 

d-Tartaric  acid 

Mesotartaric  acid 

COOH 

1 

COOH 

COOH 

1 
HOCH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

HCOH 

1 

HOCH 

HCOH 

I 
COOH 

COOH 

COOH 

Immune  serum  for: 
/-Tartaric  acid 
J-Tartaric  acid 
Mesotartaric  acid 

+  +  + 
0 

± 

± 

+  +  + 

0 

+ 

+ 

+  +  + 

"  Symbols  indicate  degree  of  precipitation  when  antisera  for  conjugated  proteins 
containing  isomers  on  left  were  mixed  with  proteins  containing  isomers  shown  on 
right.  The  symbol  -|-  +  +  indicates  strong  positive  reaction ;  0,  negative  reaction. 

carbon  atom  (Fig.  2-9),  could  be  distinguished  serologically.  Later 
work  (Avery,  Goebel,  and  Babers,  1932)  even  showed  that  the  alpha 
and  beta  anomers  of  glucose,  when  converted  to  the  />-aminophenyl- 


eCHgOH 


H.OH 


H,OH 


H  OH  H  OH 

D- Glucose  D- Galactose 

Fig.  2-9. 

glucosides,  diazotized,  and  coupled  to  a  protein,  gave  rise  to  different 
antibodies  (Fig.  2-10).  The  distinction  was  not  as  sharp  as  between 

N  =  N  — 


CH,OH 


CH2OH 


Fig.  2-10.  a-  and  /3-D-glucoside  haptens. 


26  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

glucose  and  galactose,  which,  in  view  of  the  fact  that  a-  and  y8-glucose 
are  spontaneously  interconvertible  in  solution,  seems  reasonable. 

Limitations  of  Specificity 

It  is  apparent  from  this  and  similar  work,  that  though  the  power 
of  antibodies  to  distinguish  small  chemical  differences  in  antigens  is 
very  considerable,  this  discrimination  has  certain  limits,  limits  which, 
in  the  case  of  the  alpha  and  beta  anomers  of  glucose,  we  have  almost 
reached.  The  number  of  different  antibodies  is  certainly  large,  but 
we  are  moved  to  ask :  Is  there  perhaps  a  limit  to  the  number  of 
substances  which  can  be  distinguished  serologically? 

We  have  by  no  means  tested  all  possibilities,  but  I  believe  that  the 
answer  to  the  above  question  is  that  there  probably  is  a  limit.  In 
the  first  place,  cross-reactions  are  regularly  found  with  closely  re- 
lated antigenic  determinants  (haptens),  as  we  have  just  seen.  In 
the  second  place,  antibodies  to  natural  antigens  are  not  directed 
toward  the  molecules  as  a  whole  but  toward  relatively  restricted  por- 
tions of  the  molecule  (Chapter  3).  These  restricted  portions  of  the 
molecule  consist  of  amino  acid  residues  and  combinations  of  amino 
acid  residues  in  the  case  of  proteins  and,  in  the  case  of  carbohydrates, 
of  monosaccharide  residues  and  combinations  of  monosaccharide  resi- 
dues. The  number  of  amino  acid  residues  occurring  naturally  is  only 
somewhat  greater  than  twenty  (Yeas,  1958).  The  number  of  mono- 
saccharide residues  occurring  in  any  considerable  amount  in  nature 
is  probably  not  much  greater.  The  number  of  possible  antigenic 
specificities  is  therefore  not  infinite.  It  is  accordingly  not  surprising 
that,  as  more  and  more  cross-reactions  between  antigens  of  unrelated 
or  remotely  related  origins  are  tried,  more  and  more  cross-reactions 
are  found  to  take  place. 

Thus,  cross-reaction  occurs  between  human  blood  group  A  sub- 
stance and  pneumococcus  type  14  capsular  polysaccharide  (Finland 
and  Curnen,  1940).  Anti-pneumococcus  type  14  sera  strongly  cross- 
react  with  a  galactan  isolated  from  cow  lung  (Heidelberger  and 
Wolfram,  1954).  Pneumococcus  type  2  capsular  polysaccharide  and 
the  polysaccharide  from  encapsulated  type  B  Friedlander  bacillus 
cross-react  (Avery,  Heidelberger,  and  Goebel,  1925).  Highly  active 
substances  with  specificity  similar  to  that  of  the  human  blood  group 


ANTIBODIES  II 


27 


substances  are  found  in  certain  plants  (Springer,  1958).  One  may 
predict  that  the  number  of  such  serological  similarities  will  grow 
as  the  number  of  individual  antigens  tested  for  cross-reactivity 
increases. 

Combining  Groups  of  Antibody 

The  fact  that  no  striking  chemical  differences  between  antibodies 
or  between  antibody  and  normal  globulin  have  yet  been  found  sug- 
gests that  the  portion  of  the  antibody  molecule  responsible  for  its 
specific  combining  properties  cannot  be  very  large.  This  idea  is  sup- 
ported by  the  evidence,  to  be  discussed  in  the  next  chapter,  that  the 
portion  of  the  antigen  with  which  an  antibody  combines  is  relatively 
small,  at  least  compared  with  the  size  of  a  protein  molecule.  From 
experiments  of  Landsteiner  and  van  der  Scheer  (1938),  Campbell  and 
Bulman  (1952)  computed  that  the  specific  combining  site  of  an  anti- 
body is  not  larger  than  700  square  angstrom  units  (700  A^). 

It  is  believed  that  van  der  Waals  forces  are  among  the  most  im- 
portant in  the  union  between  antibody  and  antigen.  Since  these  are 
very  short  range  forces,  being  inversely  proportional  to  the  seventh 
power  of  the  distance,  the  combining  groups  of  antibody  and  antigen 
probably  come  into  intimate  contact  to  produce  union  as  firm  as  that 
actually  observed.    (The  free  energy  change  — AF  is  of  the  order  of 


Fig.  2-11.  \^an    der    Waals    outlines    of    o-,    m-,    and    /'-azobenzenearsonates. 
(From  L.  Pauling  and  H.  A.  Itano   (eds.),  1957,  Molecular  Structure  and  Bio- 
logical Specificity,  American  Institute   of   Biological   Sciences,   Washington,   by 
permission  of  the  editors  and  publishers). 


28 


INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 


5  to  9  kcal.  per  mole.  See  Chapters  9  and  10.)  Hooker  and  Boyd 
(1941)  suggested  that  the  combining  group  of  the  antigen  might  fit 
into  a  cavity  in  the  antibody.  Pauling  made  a  similar  suggestion. 
Figure  2-11  shows  Pauling's  conception  of  antibody  cavities  corre- 
sponding to  0-,  m-,  and  /'-aminoarsonic  acid. 

To  what  extent  such  a  cavity  in  the  antibody  is  merely  schematic 
;and  to  what  extent  it  is  real  is  not  yet  decided.  The  concept  has 
certainly  proved  useful  in  thinking  about  antibody-antigen  reactions. 


Fig.  2-12.  Schematic  drawings  of  three  possible  types  of  cavities  (deter- 
minants) in  antibody  molecule:  1,  invagination;  2,  shallow  trough;  3,  slit 
trench. 


ANTIBODIES  II  29 

In  any  case,  the  cavity  is  not  necessarily  the  deep  invagination  sug- 
gested by  Fig.  2-11  and  example  1  in  Fig.  2-12.  The  antigenic  deter- 
minant might  alternatively  be  accomodated  lying  on  its  side  in  a 
shallow  trough  (example  2  in  Fig.  2-12),  or  sidewise  in  a  sort 
of  slit  trench  (example  3  in  Fig.  2-12).  According  to  Pressman 
(1957),  there  is  evidence  that  all  three  types  of  antibody  cavity 
exist. 

If  the  combining  group  of  an  antibody  molecule  is  relatively  small 
(one  such  group,  according  to  the  above  estimate,  would  amount  to 
about  2  per  cent  of  the  surface  of  an  antibody  molecule),  we  naturally 
ask  how  many  such  groups  an  antibody  has.  It  seems  conceivable  that 
one  group  would  be  enough  to  account  for  the  reactions  of  antibody. 
For  some  time  Dr.  S.  B.  Hooker  and  I  and  some  other  workers  in 
this  field  maintained  that  on  the  basis  of  economy  of  hypotheses 
(Occam's  razor)  it  should  be  assumed  that  antibody  was  univalent. 
Others  assumed  that  antibody  was  multivalent.  There  is  now  con- 
siderable experimental  evidence  indicating  that  neither  party  to  this 
controversy  was  wholly  right,  for  the  valence  of  antibody  seems  to 
be  two.  There  are  certain  antibodies,  especially  in  connection  with 
the  Rh  blood  groups,  behaving  in  peculiar  ways  which  have  led  to 
their  being  described  as  "incomplete"  or  "univalent."  The  presently 
available  evidence,  however,  indicates  that  the  peculiarity  of  their 
behavior  is  not  due  to  their  having  less  than  the  usual  number  of  com- 
bining groups  but  to  other  features  of  the  molecule. 

Formation  of  Antibody 

We  must  now  ask  ourselves :  How  does  the  body  manage  to  pro- 
duce relatively  large  amounts  of  globulin  molecules,  so  precisely 
adapted  to  combining  with  definite  chemical  groupings? 

It  is  not  easy  to  answer  this  question.  A  number  of  hypothetical 
mechanisms  of  antibody  formation  have  been  proposed,  of  which  we 
may  mention  (a)  the  cast-off  receptor  theory  of  Ehrlich,  (b)  the 
template  theory  of  Haurowitz,  (c)  the  template  theory  of  Pauling, 
(d)  the  "trained  enzyme"  theory  of  Burnet,  and  (e)  the  "natural 
selection"  theory  of  Jerne,  which  is  supported  by  Talmage  and 
Lederberg. 

(a)    According  to  the   theory   of  Ehrlich,   antibodies   are   simply 


30  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

natural  preformed  receptors  of  the  body  cell  for  various  chemical 
groupings.  When  the  number  of  such  chemical  groupings  coming  in 
contact  with  the  cell  is  increased  (antigenic  stimulus),  an  excess  of 
such  receptors  is  formed.  Some  are  cast  off  into  the  circulation  and 
constitute  circulating  antibody.  This  theory  was  given  up  when  it 
was  found  that  antibodies  could  be  formed  against  artificial  groupings 
with  which  the  organism  had  never  come  in  contact  in  the  course 
of  its  evolution  and  for  which  it  could  hardly  be  expected  to  possess 
preformed  receptors. 

(b)  According  to  Haurowitz  (1953),  a  template,  which  (as  the 
result  of  the  presence  of  a  molecule  of  antigen)  reflects  in  reverse 
the  significant  portions  of  the  structure  of  the  antigen  held  in  the 
expanded  configuration  by  polar  forces  of  a  molecule  of  nucleic  acid, 
attracts  to  itself  molecules  of  amino  acids  from  which  a  duplicate  of 
itself  is  built  up  and  cast  off  into  the  circulation.  This  theory  seems  to 
require  the  persistence  of  small  amounts  of  antigen  throughout  anti- 
body formation,  although  this  might  not  strictly  be  a  necessary  part 
of  the  theory. 

(c)  Pauling's  theory  (1940)  is  a  modification  of  that  of  Hauro- 
witz and  differs  mainly  in  Pauling's  supposition  that  preformed 
normal  globulin,  becoming  unfolded  ("denatured")  at  the  ends  of  the 
polypeptide  chain  (he  assumes  that  they  have  accessible  to  them  a 
number  of  about  equally  stable  folded  configurations),  fold  up  (are 
"renatured")  on  contact  with  a  molecule  of  antigen  and  thus  become 
specific  antibody.  This  theory  definitely  presupposes  the  persistence 
of  antigen. 

(d)  Burnet  and  Fenner  (1949)  suggested  that  enzymes  involved 
in  the  destruction  of  normal  body  constituents  become  adapted  to 
acting  on  similar  molecules  of  foreign  substances,  are  self-reproducing, 
and  continue  to  multiply  after  the  elimination  of  the  antigen.  Anti- 
bodies are  supposed  to  be  enzymatically  inactive  partial  replicas  of 
these  adapted  enzymes.  Burnet  has  apparently  more  recently  changed 
his  views  (Burnet,  1957,  1959). 

(e)  Jerne  (1955)  suggested  that  globulin  molecules  of  a  very 
wide  variety  of  configurations  and  therefore  of  specific  reactivities  are 
continually  being  produced  by  the  body.  Some  of  these  molecules 
happen  to  have  configurations  complementary  to  surface  groups  of 
some  antigens ;  these  are  the  "natural  antibodies."  When  an  antigen 


ANTIBODIES  II  31 

enters  the  circulation,  it  combines  with  those  molecules  which  happen 
to  have  the  corresponding  specificity.  These  combinations  are  phago- 
cyted  and  transported  to  the  antibody-forming  cells.  There  the  antigen 
is  dissociated  and  probably  discarded,  and  the  cell — for  reasons  not 
specified — proceeds  to  make  more  globulin  molecules  like  those  just 
introduced.  The  casting  ofif  into  the  circulation  of  these  new  specific 
globulins  constitutes  the  phenomenon  of  antibody  rise. 

Jerne's  theory,  in  spite  of  having  been  proposed  only  recently, 
has  found  considerable  favor.  Talmage  (1957,  1959)  considers  it 
essentially  similar  to  the  theory  of  Ehrlich  but  suggests  that  the 
replicating  elements  are  cells  rather  than  extracellular  protein.  Bur- 
net (1957)  and  Lederberg  (1959)  also  support  the  theory.  According 
to  Burnet,  antigen  combines  with  specific  receptors  on  the  surface 
of  lymphocytes  and  thereby  stimulates  these  particular  cells  to  settle 
down  and  multiply  in  an  appropriate  tissue.  The  result  of  this 
replication  of  selected  cells  is  the  production  of  more  of  the  type  of 
globulin  molecule  with  which  the  antigen  combined  in  the  first  place. 

Burnet  and  Lederberg  both  assume  that  the  antibody-forming  cells 
are  "hypermutable,"  i.e.,  that  normally  there  are  frequent  changes  in 
the  types  of  globulin  molecules  a  cell  is  genetically  capable  of  pro- 
ducing. Thus,  all  possible  types  of  gamma  globulin  molecules  would 
generally  be  represented  in  the  circulation  zinth  the  exception  of  those 
produced  by  those  cells  that  happened  to  combine  with  antigen  while 
they  were  still  immature ;  this  is  supposed  to  result  in  the  elimina- 
tion of  such  cells.  This  additional  assumption  is  made  to  account  for 
the  nonproduction  of  antibodies  to  antigens  of  the  body  itself  and  for 
"acquired  immunological  tolerance."* 

Any  attempt  to  revive  the  Ehrlich  theory  must  take  account  of 
the  objection  that  antibodies  can  be  formed  to  antigens  for  which 
the  body  can  hardly  be  expected  to  have  preformed  natural  receptors. 
Talmage  (1959)  tries  to  do  this  by  supposing  that  sharp  specificity, 
when  observed,  results  from  a  mixture  of  globulin  molecules,  not  all 
alike,  each  with  some  degree  of  specificity  for  the  antigen  or  hapten. 
With  the  help  of  a  diagram  (Fig.  2-13)  and  by  thermodynamic  calcu- 
lations he  tries  to  show  how  the  "information"  and  net  specificity  of 


*  When  animals  are  injected  with  an  antigen  during  fetal  life,  or  in  some 
cases  shortly  after  birth,  they  may  be  incapable  of  responding  immunologically 
to  this  antigen  as  adults    (see  Chapter  3). 


32 


INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 


Globulin  C  Globulins  A,  B  and  C 

Fig.  2-13.  Two-dimensional  diagrams  illustrating  the  concept  that  the  in- 
formation and  net  specificity  of  a  combination  of  three  different  globulin  mole- 
cules may  be  greater  than  that  of  one  globulin  alone.  (Redrawn  from  Talmage 
1959.) 

a  combination  of  different  globulin  molecules  could  be  greater  than 
those  of  any  one  type  of  globulin  alone.  Talmage  suggests  that  the 
average  "monospecific"  serum  contains  ten  to  100  different  kinds  of 
globulin  molecules  and  points  out  that  on  such  a  basis  the  assumption 
of  about  5000  different  possible  natural  globulins  could  account  for 
approximately  3  X  10^-"^  different  specificities.  Since  this  number  is 
larger  than  the  number  of  electrons  the  universe  is  supposed  to  con- 
tain, Talmage  believes  it  is  satisfactorily  large.  In  fact,  Haurowitz 
(1956)  estimated  that  not  more  than  50,000  different  antibodies  exist. 


References 

Avery,  O.  T.,  W.  F.  Goebel,  and  F.  H.  Babers,  1932.  /.  Exptl.  Med.  55,  769. 
Avery,  O.  T.,  M.  Heidelberger,  and  W.  F.   Goebel,  1925,  /.   Exptl.  Med.  42, 
709. 


ANTIBODIES  II  33 

Batson,  H.  C,  I'JSl.  ./.  Immunol.  66,  7^7. 

Boyd,  W.   C,    l'M3,    l-'iDidamciitah  <if  Immunology,  3r(l   ed.,    V)SC^,   Interscicnce, 

New  York. 
Burnet,  F.  M.,   1957,  Australian  J.  Sci,  20,  67. 
Burnet,    F.    M.,    1959,    The   Clonal   Selection    Theory   of    Acquired   Immunity, 

Vanderbilt    University  Press,   Nashville. 
Burnet,  F.  M.,   and   F.   Fenner,  1949,   The  Production  of  Antibodies,  2nd   ed., 

MacMillan,  Melbourne. 
Campbell,  D.  H.,   and  N.   Bulman,   1952,  Fortschr.  Chem.  org.  Naturstoffe   9, 

443. 
Glutton,    R.   F.,    C.    R.  Harrington,  and    M.  E.   Yuill,   1938,    Biochem.  J.  32, 

1111. 
Finland,  M.,  and   E.   C.  Curnen,   1940,  /.   Immunol.  38,  457. 
Fisher,  R.  A.,  1950.  Statistical  Methods  for  Research  Workers.  11th  cd.,  Oliver 

and  Boyd,  Edinburgh. 
Goebel,  W.  F.,   and  O.  T.   Avery,    1929,  /.   Exptl.   Med.  50,  521. 
Haurowitz,    F.,     1953,        in    A.    M.     Pappenheimer    (ed.).    The    Nature    and 

Significance     of     the     Antibody     Response,     Columbia      University      Press, 

New   York. 
Haurowitz,  F.,   1956,    /.   Cellular   Com  p.    Physiol.    47,  Sup  pi.  1,    1. 
Heidelberger,  M.,  and   M.  L.   Wolfram,  1954,    Federation   Proc.  13,    496. 
Hooker,  S.  B.,  and  W.  C.  Boyd,   1933,  J.  Immunol.  24.   141. 
Hooker,  S.   B.,   and  W.  C.   Boyd,  1934,  /.   Immunol.  26,  469. 
Hooker,  S.   B.,  and  W.  C.  Boyd,  1941,   /.  Immunol.  42,   419. 
Jerne,  N.  K.,  1955,  Proc.  Nat.  Acad.  Sci.  U.  S.  41,  849. 
Landsteiner,  K.,  and  J.  van  der  Scheer,    1928,  /.  Exptl.  Med.   48,  315. 
Landsteiner,  K.,    and    J.    van  der  Scheer    1929.  /.   Exptl.    Med.    50,  407. 
Landsteiner,  K.,  and  J.  van  der  Scheer   1936,  /.  Exptl.  Med.  63,  325. 
Landsteiner,  K.,  and  J.  van  der  Scheer   1938,   /.  Exptl.  Med.  67,  709. 
Landsteiner,  K.  and  J.  van  der  Scheer  1940,  /.  Exptl.  Med.  71,  445. 
Pauling,  L.  D.  Pressman,  and  A.  L.  Grossberg,   1944,  /.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  66, 

784. 
Pressman,  D.,  1957,  in  L.   Pauling  and  H.  A.  Itano    (eds.).  Molecular  Struc- 
ture  and  Biological   Specificity,   American  Institute  of    Biological    Sciences, 

Washington,  D.   C. 
Springer,   G.   F.,   1958,   in   G.   E.   W.   Wolstenholme   and   M.   O'Connor    (eds.), 

Ciba  Foundation  on  the  Chemistry  and  Biology  of  Mueopolysaceharides,  Little, 

Brown,  Boston. 
Talmage,   D.  W.,    1957,  Ann.  Rev.   Med.   8,  239. 
Talmage,  D.  W.,  1959,  Science  129,  1643. 
Yeas,   M.,    1958,   in    Y.   P.  Yockey    (ed.),  Symposium   on  Liformation    Theory 

in  Biology,  Pergamon,  New  York. 


CHAPTER  3 
Antigens 


Definition 

We  use  the  term  antigen  in  at  least  two  senses.  Primarily,  an 
antigen  is  a  substance  which,  when  introduced  into  an  animal,  usually 
not  by  way  of  the  digestive  tract,  causes  the  production  of  specific 
antibodies.  Immunologists  commonly  use  the  term  antigen  also  for 
preparations  which  merely  react  with  antibodies  in  vitro ;  for  in- 
stance, the  mixture  of  normal  tissue  lipids  used  in  the  Wassermann 
test  for  syphilis  is  referred  to  as  the  Wassermann  antigen,  although 
injection  of  it  into  an  animal  would  probably  not  cause  the  produc- 
tion of  syphilitic  antibodies. 

Immunologists  are  also  imprecise  in  another  way  in  their  usage 
of  the  term  antigen.  The  word  is  applied  to  both  a  purified,  supposedly 
molecularly  homogeneous  preparation,  as  for  example  crystalline 
bovine  serum  albumin,  which,  when  injected,  will  cause  the  pro- 
duction of  antibodies  to  this  substance,  and  also,  following  tradition, 
to  preparations  which,  chemically  speaking,  are  complex  mixtures, 
such  as  the  suspensions  of  killed  organisms  which  are  used  in  the 
practical  production  of  certain  types  of  immunity. 

Antigenicity 

In  spite  of  many  studies  on  the  subject  we  are  not  yet  in  a  position 
to  state  positively  what  physical  and  chemical  characteristics  make  a 
substance  antigenic.  We  can  only  offer  certain  rules  of  thumb:  (a) 
antigens  are  substances  the  molecules  of  which  are  larger  than  mini- 

34 


ANTIGENS  35 

mum  in  size,  and  (b)  they  must  be  foreign  to  the  circulation  of  the 
animal  in  which  they  stimulate  antibody  production. 

It  is  not  possible  to  give  a  definite  figure  for  the  minimal  molecular 
weight  which  a  substance  must  possess  to  be  an  antigen,  but  good 
antigens  generally  have  a  molecular  weight  of  not  less  than  10,000. 
It  is  also  found  that  by  adsorbing  small  molecules  particulate  material 
may  become  antigenic,  just  as  conjugated  antigens  may  be  produced 
by  coupling  simpler  compounds  (haptens)  to  proteins.  Some  simple 
substances  not  conjugated  to  a  protein  cause  the  production  of  anti- 
bodies, but  it  is  believed  that  they  act  by  first  combining  with  some 
of  the  proteins  of  the  body. 

Size  alone  does  not  seem  to  be  enough.  In  addition  to  being 
large,  a  molecule,  to  be  antigenic,  must  possess  other  characteristics. 
It  has  been  suggested  that  a  certain  degree  of  internal  complexity 
may  be  required,  and  it  has  been  found  that  sulfonated  polystyrene 
(Fig.  3-1),  which  is  a  large  molecule  polymer  made  up  of  a  single 

CH2-CH2-(-CH-CH2).-C  =  CH., 


SO3H  SO3H  SO3H 

Fig.  3-1.  Sulfonated  polystyrene. 

repeated  unit,  is  not  antigenic  (Boyd,  1952).  Haurowitz  (1952)  sug- 
gested that  the  necessary  feature  is  a  rigid  structure  of  the  determi- 
nant groups  of  the  antigen.  In  support  of  this  idea,  it  has  found 
that  gelatin,  a  non-rigid  molecule,  which  is  ordinarily  a  very  poor 
antigen,  can  be  made  into  a  relatively  good  antigen  by  being  coupled 
with  chemical  groupings  which  would  be  expected  to  increase  the 
rigidity  of  the  molecule  (Hooker  and  Boyd,  1932;  Glutton,  Haring- 
ton,  and  Yuill,  1938;  Sela  and  Arnon,  1960).  Contrary  to  earlier 
opinion,  the  introduced  groups  do  not  have  to  be  aromatic  (Sela 
and  Arnon,  1960).  Haurowitz's  suggestion  is  also  supported  by 
studies  on  the  antigenicity  of  synthetic  polypeptides.  Polyglutamic 
acid  was  found  to  be  non-antigenic  (Maurer  1957),  and  most  of  the 
polymers  studied  by  Stahmann  and  his  colleagues  (references  in 
Sela,    1962)    were   either   non-antigenic   or  poor   antigens.    On   the 


36  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

other  hand,  Gill  and  Doty  (1960)  found  a  synthetic  linear  polymer 
containing  tyrosine,  which  would  increase  the  rigidity  of  the  mole- 
cule, to  be  antigenic,  and  Sela  (1962)  found  that  a  multichain 
copolymer,  in  which  the  chains  of  polypeptides  containing  L-tyrosine 
and  L-glutamic  acid  were  built  on  a  multichain  poly-DL-alanine,  is 
a  powerful  and  sharply  specific  antigen. 

It  was  once  believed  that  only  proteins  could  be  antigenic,  but 
we  now  know  that  some  carbohydrates  are  also  good  antigens.  The 
rigid  sites  in  polysaccharide  antigens  may  be  the  pyranose  or 
furanose  rings  (Sela,  1962).  Large-molecule  carbohydrates  vary 
in  their  antigenicity.  Pneumococcus  polysaccharides  are  antigenic  in 
man  and  in  the  mouse  but  not  in  rabbits  (Dubos,  1945).  Dextrans, 
apparently  not  antigenic  for  rabbits,  are  antigenic  in  man  (Kabat 
and  Berg,  1952,  1953).  Purified  blood  group  substances  A  and  B 
are  fair  antigens  in  man  but  not  in  rabbits  (Morgan  and  van  Heynin- 
gen,  1944;  Kabat,  Baer,  Day,  and  Knaub,   1950). 

We  repeat  that  substances  must  be  foreign  to  the  circulation  to 
be  antigenic  for  an  animal.  The  normal  animal  does  not  produce  anti- 
bodies to  the  protein  and  carbohydrate  constituents  of  its  own  blood 
or  to  the  tissue  components  which  ordinarily  reach  the  blood.  Normal 
animals,  however,  can  be  induced  to  form  antibodies  to  constituents 
of  their  bodies  which  normally  do  not  find  their  way  into  the  cir- 
culation, such  as  lens  protein  of  the  eye  and  casein,  even  from  an 
animal's  own  milk  (Lewis,  1934). 

At  one  time  it  was  believed  that  only  proteins  could  be  antigenic. 
We  now  know  that  many  carbohydrates  are  also  good  antigens.  Other 
classes  of  antigens  exist,  but  with  some  possible  exceptions  all  of 
them  contain  some  protein  or  carbohydrate,  or  both. 

Immunological  Tolerance 

For  a  long  time  it  was  a  complete  mystery  why  an  animal  did  not 
make  antibodies  for  the  proteins  and  other  substances  of  his  own  cir- 
culation, many  of  which  are  good  antigens  for  an  individual  of  a 
different  species.  A  clue  has  recently  been  found  in  the  phenomenon 
of  immunological  tolerance.  If  embryos  are  injected  in  utcro  or  early 
in  postnatal  life  with  an  antigen,  not  only  may  they  not  produce 
any  antiboch'  to  the  antigen,  but  they  may  be  rendered  incapable  of 
responding  to  this  antigen  for  the  rest  of  their  life   (Burnet,   1956) 


ANTIGENS  Z7 

although  they  will  generally  respond  perfectly  normally  to  other 
antigens.  This  refractory  state  is  called  immunological  tolerance. 

To  explain  it  and  related  phenomena,  modern  theories  of  antibody 
formation  postulate,  as  was  pointed  out  in  Chapter  1,  that  the  com- 
bination of  antigen  with  immature  antibody-forming  cells  results  in 
the  death  of  these  cells  or  at  least  their  elimination  from  the  body. 
It  seems  likely  that  the  mechanism  that  produces  acquired  immunologi- 
cal tolerance,  whatever  it  is,  accounts  also  for  the  failure  of  the  body 
to  produce  antibodies  to  its  own  circulating  antigens. 

It  is  known  that  the  rejection  of  tissue  transplants  from  one  in- 
dividual to  another,  in  contrast  to  the  acceptance  of  transplants  from 
another  part  of  the  patient's  body  or  from  an  identical  twin,  is  an 
immunological  phenomenon.  Acquired  immunological  tolerance  has 
been  strikingly  demonstrated  in  animals  by  injecting  adult  tissue 
cells  into  embryos.  Such  injected  embryos,  when  they  are  born  and 
grow  up,  may  accept  skin  grafts,  for  example,  from  a  donor  of  the 
stock  which  provided  the  injected  tissue,  something  they  would  not 
do  if  not  previously  injected  during  fetal  life.  Billingham,  Brent,  and 
Medawar  (1953)  believe  that  in  such  cases  some  of  the  injected  cells 
have  survived  in  the  recipients,  thus  accounting  for  the  continued  re- 
ceptive state  for  transplants  from  that  stock. 

A  utoimmunisation 

Physiological  mechanisms,  like  other  machinery,  can  go  wrong.  It  is 
therefore  not  too  surprising  that  occasional  individuals  are  suspected 
of  producing  antibodies  to  their  own  antigens.  This  process  is  called 
autoimmunization,  and  naturally  it  is  not  a  good  thing  when  it  occurs. 
In  fact,  the  process  may  be  part  of  the  etiology  of  a  number  of 
hitherto  mysterious  diseases,  most  of  them  fortunately  rare,  such  as 
acquired  hemolytic  anemia,  idiopathic  thrombocytopenic  purpura, 
chronic  leukopenia,  periarteritis  nodosa,  lupus  erythematosis,  and 
possibly  other  diseases. 

The  production  of  autoantibodies  is  made  possible  by  a  number 
of  abnormal  factors,  which  may  include  (a)  modification  of  one  of 
the  patient's  own  antigens  by  combination  with  a  drug,  a  bacterial 
toxin,  or  something  of  the  sort,  so  as  to  make  it  at  least  partially 
"foreign"  to  his  circulation,  and  (b)  an  unusual  propensity  of  the 
patient  to  form  antibodies  in  general. 


38  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

Anti(/cnic  Determinants 

Antibodies  combine  with  the  surface  of  antigenic  cells  or  mole- 
cules. Even  an  antigen  molecule  of  only  moderate  size  can  combine 
with  several  molecules  of  antibody.  This  shows  that  the  portion  of 
the  antigenic  surface  toward  which  the  antibody  is  directed  (anti- 
genic determinants)  is  only  part  of  the  whole  molecule.  In  Chapter 
1  we  saw  that  antibodies  can  be  produced  which  combine  specifically 
with  relatively  small  molecules  such  as  arsanilic  acid  or  glucose.  The 
cjuestion  arises :  How  much  of  the  surface  of  a  antigen  molecule  is 
actually  involved  in  the  combination  with  antibody? 

Some  information  on  this  question  has  been  obtained,  mostly  by  use 
of  Landsteiner's  inhibition  technique.  Landsteiner  (1942)  found 
that  hydrolysis  products  of  silk,  peptides  with  molecular  weights  about 
600  to  1000,  were  capable  of  specifically  inhibiting  the  reactions  or 
precipitin  sera  for  silk.  This  work  has  recently  been  confirmed  by 
Cebra  (1961),  who  found  that  tyrosine  forms  an  important  part  of 
the  antigenic  determinant  in  silk  fibroin,  but  that  a  considerable 
length  of  the  glycyl-alanyl  chain  is  also  required  for  detectable 
specific  combination.  Dodecapeptides  (MW  ca.  900)  were  the  most 
active  of  the  peptides  compared,  giving  up  to  50  per  cent  inhibition. 
Of  the  octopeptides  tested,  Gly  (Glys,  Alas)  Tyr  (MW  ca.  600) 
was  the  most  effective  inhibitor  and  probably  represents  a  major 
part  of  the  specific  antigenic  determinant. 

Better  evidence  comes  from  reactions  with  conjugated  antigens  con- 
taining complex  haptens.  From  quantitative  studies  of  the  inhibition  of 
antibodies  to  simple  haptens  Hooker  and  Boyd  (1933,  1941)  concluded 
that  the  specificity  of  the  antibody  was  influenced  to  some  extent  by 
the  protein  tyrosine  or  histidine  residues  with  which  the  diazotized 
amines  combine.  This  suggested  that  the  antigenic  determinant  in 
conjugated  antigens  is  not  quite  as  simple  a  structure  as  the  hapten 
alone  (Fig.  3-2).  Landsteiner  (1945)  studied  the  question  by  coupl- 
ing to  proteins  haptens  containing  peptides  made  up  of  several 
amino  acids.  Goebel,  Avery,  and  Babers  (1934)  and  Kabat  (1957) 
investigated  antibodies  directed  toward  determinants  consisting  of 
several  sugar  molecules  linked  together  to  form  an  oligosaccharide. 
Let  us  review  some  of  these  experiments  briefly. 

Peptide  Determinants.  Since  some  proteins  are  made  up  entirely 
of  amino  acids,  and  since  there  is  no  evidence  that  the  specificity  of 


ANTIGENS 


39 


Antibody 

5::::;    ::::::: 

i ^» 

Y^^^Hj- ;- 

:::::::, ::^ 

ffi 

::::: P 

^ 

::;::■      H^ 

^H  i 

-A      \ 

if    \ 

:::::::/         . 

■t 

r       \ 

1 

Antibody           

lirl 

^ 

Fig.  3-2.  Reactions 
substances. 


anti-gelatin-arsanilic     acid     antibody     with     various 


proteins  containing  a  small  percentage  of  carbohydrate  is  affected  in 
any  way  by  the  presence  of  the  carbohydrate,  we  are  forced  to  con- 
clude that  the  specific  antigenic  determinants  of  protein  antigens 
consist  of  various  combinations  of  amino  acids.  Anything  we  can  find 
out  about  the  specificity  of  peptides  might  therefore  apply  also  to 
native  proteins. 

Landsteiner  prepared  /'-aminophenyl  compounds  containing  pep- 
tides made  up  of  the  amino  acids  glycine  and  leucine 


NH2 

I 
HCHCOOH 


CH3   NH2 
I      I 
CHCH2CHCOOH 

CH3 

Leucine 


Glycine 

in  various  combinations  (Fig.  Z-Z).  These  haptens  were  diazotized 
and  coupled  to  protein  in  the  usual  way,  using  one  protein  for  the 
immunizing  antigens  and  another  for  the  test  antigens  to  avoid 
complicating  cross-reactions  due  to  antibody  to  the  protein  part  of  the 
antigens. 

The  strongest  precipitation  was  obtained  with  the  homologous  anti- 
gen (Table  3-1),  but  cross-reactions  were  also  obtained,  generally 
strongest  when  the  terminal  amino  acid  of  the  peptide  in  the  test 
antigen  was  the  same  as  that  in  the  immunizing  antigen.  Since  these 


40 


INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 


H,NY  ^CONHCH.CONHCH.COGH 

/>-Aminobenzoylglycylglycine 

CH3     CH3 

Vh 

I 
CH2 

I 

H.,n/  \cONHCH2CONHCHCOOH 

/'-Aminobenzoylglycylleucine 
CH3    CH3 

Yh 

I 

CH, 

1 
H.n/  \cONHCHCONHCH2COOH 

p-Aminobenzoylleucylglycine 
Fig.  3-3. 


haptens  had  an  amino  acid  — COOH  at  the  end,  Landsteiner  in- 
terpreted this  as  showing  the  predominant  influence  of  the  acid- 
carrying  group  on  specificity.  Today  we  are  more  incHned  to  attribute 
Landsteiner's  cross-reactions  to  the  fact  that  the  terminal  unit,  acid 
or  not,  of  a  composite  hapten  has  greater  influence  on  the  specificity 
than  any  other  group  does ;  for,  as  we  shall  see,  a  similar  rule  applies 
to  haptens  consisting  of  oligosaccharides  where  no  acid  group  is 
present. 


TABLE  3-1 
Cross-Reactions  of  Glycine  and  Leucine  Haptens* 


Antigen  containing'' 

Antibody  for     G     L 

GG 

GL 

LG    GGG    GGL    GGGG 

GGGL 

GGGGG 

GGGGG           0     0 
GGGGL            0     + 

± 
0 

0 

+  ± 

0       -H±        0          +± 
0         0         ++         0 

0 

+  + 

0 

Landsteiner,   1945. 
G  =  glycine,  L  =  leucine. 


ANTIGENS  41 

When  Landsteiner  tested  antibodies  to  larger  peptides,  he  stiil 
found  that  cross-reactions  occurred  with  peptides  having  the  same 
terminal  amino  acids,  but  such  cross-reactions  did  not  always  occur, 
and  some  cross-reactions  were  found  to  be  due  to  common  amino 
acids  in  other  positions.  The  cross-reactions  were  definitely  related 
to  similarities  of  constitution  (Table  3-1).  For  instance,  an  antibody 
for  the  pentapeptide  GGGGG,  where  G  stands  for  glycine,  precipitated 
— GG  but  not  — LG  antigen,  where  L  stands  for  leucine,  and  pre- 
cipitated much  less  — LGG  than  — GGG.  The  amount  of  precipitate 
produced  by  an  anti-GGGGL  antiserum  with  various  peptide-con- 
taining  antigens  increased  in  the  order  — L,  — GL,  — GGL,  — GGGL, 
-GGGGL  (Table  3-2). 

TABLE  3-2 
Increase  in  Strength  of  Cross-Reactions  with   Increase  in  Length  of  Hapten" 


Antigen  containing'' 

Antibody  for 

L 

GL             GGL            GGGL 

GGGGL 

GGGGL 

+  ± 

++±         +++         +++± 

+  +  -f-  + 

"  Landsteiner,  1945. 

''  G  =  glycine,  L  =  leucine. 

The  strongest  reactions  were  not  always  obtained  with  haptens 
having  the  terminal  portions  identical  with  those  of  the  immunizing 
hapten.  For  instance,  when  Landsteiner  prepared  antisera  against 
polypeptides  in  which  the  terminal  carboxyl  group  had  been  con- 
verted  to   the   amide    (Fig.   3-4)    he   found   than   an   antiserum    for 


HjX^^  ^CONHCH2CONHCH,CONH,. 

Fig.  3-4.  Amide  of  /'-aminobenzoylglycylglycine. 

GGLGGAm  reacted  with  — GGLAm  and  — GGGGLAm  but  not 
with  — LGGAm  (Table  3-3),  in  spite  of  the  fact  that  the  terminal 
three  units  of  this  last  hapten  are  identical  with  the  terminal  three 
units  of  the   immunizing  hapten.   Landsteiner  attributed    this   to   a 


42  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

TABLE  3-3 
Cross-Reactions  of  Glycine-Leucine-Amino  Polypeptides* 


Antigen  containing'' 

Antibody  for 

GGLGGAm 

GGLAm          GGGGLAm 

LGGA 

GGLGGAm 

+  +  ± 

+  ±                    +± 

0 

»  Landsteiner,  1945. 

'^  G  =  glycine,  L  =  leucine. 

failure  of  the  amide  groups  to  have  as  strong  an  effect  on  serological 
specificity  as  the  free  carboxyl  groups  have. 

Landsteiner  obtained  evidence  that  the  antibodies  to  such  complex 
peptide  haptens  were  at  least  partly  directed  toward  the  whole  peptide 
and  not  merely  to  the  component  amino  acids.  For  one  thing, 
varying  the  order  of  the  amino  acids  in  the  peptide  made  a  marked 
change,  so  that  — GGL,  — GLG,  and  — LGG  were  serologically 
different,  as  were  — GGGGL,  — GGGLGG,  and  — LGGGG. 

Other  evidence  that  antibody  is  directed  toward  the  whole  peptide 
was  obtained  by  "absorbing"  an  antiserum,  i.e.,  by  reacting  the  anti- 
serum with  heterologous  antigens  until  no  further  precipitate  formed, 
and  then  reacting  the  absorbed  antiserum  with  hapten.  Suitable  ab- 
sorption of  an  antiserum  for  GGLGG  left  antibodies  which  reacted 
with  the  homologous  hapten  but  not  with  related  haptens,  except  for 
a  slight  reaction  with  —LGG.  Tests  made  for  comparison  with  diluted 
antiserum  showed  that  this  change  in  reactivity  was  not  due  merely 
to  diminution  in  total  antibody  content. 

A  third  line  of  evidence  came  from  inhibition  experiments.  Land- 
steiner found  that  antibodies  to  a  given  peptide  were  generally  better 
inhibited  by  homologous  than  by  heterologous  hapten,  even  when  they 
reacted  with  a  heterologous  antigen    (Table   3-4). 

From  the  evidence  that  antibodies  can  be  directed  toward  the 
whole  of  a  peptide  containing  as  many  as  five  amino  acids  we  may 
conclude  that  the  antigenic  determinants  in  natural  proteins  may  be 
as  large  as  this.  Nevertheless,  there  seems  to  be  a  limit  to  the  size 
of  the  antigenic  determinant  to  which  the  combining  group  of  a 
single  antibody  molecule  can  be  directed,  for  Landsteiner  and  van 
der  Scheer  (1938)  found  that  when  they  used  symmetrical  aminoiso- 


ANTIGENS  43 

TABLE  3-4 
Inhibition  of  Heterologous  Reaction  by  Homologous  Hapten* 


Reaction 

in  presence 

of  hapten'' 

Antibody  for  Antigen  containing 

GGG 

GGGGG 

GGLGG 

GGG                              GGG 
GGGGG                      GGG 
GGLGG                       GGG 

± 
+ 

± 
± 

+  + 
0 

"  Landsteiner,  1945. 

•^  G  =  glycine,  L  =  leucine. 

phthalyl  glycine-leucine  (Fig.  3-5),  which  they  referred  to  as  GIL, 
as  hapten  they  obtained  two  distinct  antibodies.  One  reacted  with 
w-aminobenzoyl   glycine    (G)    and   the   other   with   77?-aminobenzoyl 

NH, 


HOOCCH2NOCI         IcONHCHCOOH 

CH2CH(CH3)2 
GIL 

Fig.  3-5. 

leucine  (L)  (Fig.  3-6).  The  anti-G  of  stich  a  serum  was  not  re- 
movable with  antigen  containing  only  L,  and  the  anti-L  was  not 
removable  with  antigen  containing  only  G.  Evidently  the  two  amino 

NH2  NH2 


I         ICONHCHCOOH 

CH2CH(CH3)2 
L 
Fig.  3-6. 

acid  residues  in  GIL  were  too  far  apart  to  be  spanned  simtiltaneously 
by  a  typical  antibody  determinant,  although  there  was  some  evidence 
for  the  presence  in  the  antiserum  of  a  slight  amount  of  a  special 


44 


INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 


o        =         ^         ^ 


«    ^  ^  ^ 


^  "JJ, 


ANTIGENS 


45 


•42   >> 

§1 

■;2     O 
CO 


^   ^  ^   -^ 


pq 


46  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

antibody  which  might  have  been  directed  toward  the  whole  hapten 
GIL.  At  the  same  time,  evidence  was  obtained  that  the  anti-G  and 
anti-L  of  the  antiserum  produced  by  injecting  the  GIL  antigen  were 
not  quite  identical  with  those  produced  by  injecting  G-  and  L-coupled 
antigens. 

Carbohydrate  Determinants.  Experiments  with  carbohydrate 
haptens  have  given  similar  results.  Goebel  and  co-workers  (Avery, 
Goebel,  and  Babers,  1932;  Goebel,  Avery,  and  Babers,  1934)  in- 
jected conjugated  antigens  containing  monosaccharides  and  disac- 
charides  as  haptens  (Fig.  Z-7).  Coupling  was  done  by  way  of  an 
aminophenyl  group  in  each  case.  It  will  be  seen  that  the  cross-reac- 
tions of  the  antisera  to  the  disaccharide  haptens  occurred  mainly  with 
the  terminal  sugars.  Inhibition  experiments  showed  that  the  /'-amino- 
phenyl  glycosides  of  the  terminal  sugars  (monosaccharides)  were 
nearly  as  good  inhibitors  of  the  anti-disaccharide  sera  as  the  /'-amino- 
phenyl  glycosides  of  the  disaccharides  themselves  were.  This  again 
points  to  a  predominant  influence  of  the  terminal  group  of  a  com- 
posite hapten  on  the  antibody  produced  when  an  antigen  containing 
it  is  injected.  Nevertheless,  the  fact  that  the  /'-aminophenyl  glycosides 
of  the  disaccharides  were  still  somewhat  better  than  the  disaccharides 
alone  as  inhibitors  of  their  corresponding  antisera  suggested  that  the 
anti-disaccharide  antibodies  were  to  some  extent  directed  toward 
the  whole  hapten  and  that  a  carbohydrate  hapten  could  be  larger 
than  a  disaccharide. 

Kabat  (1957)  was  able  to  obtain  further  information  on  this  point 
by  studying  the  antibodies  produced  in  human  beings  by  injections 
of  dextran,  a  large-molecule  polysaccharide  produced  by  certain 
bacteria.  Dextran  appears  to  be  made  up  entirely  of  glucose,  pre- 
dominantly connected  by  1-6  linkages  (Fig.  3-8).  With  such  a 
simple  antigen  the  possible  antigenic  determinants  are  merely  one 
or  more  glucose  units.  Finding  out  how  big  an  antigenic  carbohydrate 
determinant  may  have  a  specifically  corresponding  antibody  determi- 
nant is  simply  a  matter  of  finding  out  how  many  glucose  units  an 
oligosaccharide  must  contain  to  fill  the  combining  site  on  the  anti- 
body. Kabat  studied  this  question  by  measuring  the  relative  inhibiting 
power  of  glucose,  isomaltose  (two  glucose  units),  isomaltotriose 
(three  glucose  units),  and  larger  polysaccharides  for  an  anti-dextran 
serum  acting  on  dextran.  The  results  are  shown  in  Fig.  3-9.  It  is 


ANTIGENS 


47 


(4) 
G1(1-6)G1(1-6)G1(1-6)G1(1-6)G1 

G1(1-6)G1(1-6)G1(1-6)G1(1-4)G1 
(6) 


Fig.  3-8.  Suggested  structure  of  dextran. 

apparent  that  isomaltose  (two  glucose  units)  is  distinctly  better  than 
glucose  as  an  inhibitor  but  that  isomaltotriose  is  much  better  than 
either,  suggesting  that  the  antibody  determinant  corresponds  to  an 
antigenic  determinant  of  at  least  three  glucose  units.  Actually,  the 
data  suggest  that  the  antibodies  can  distinguish  even  isomaltohexaose 
(six  glucose  units)  from  any  smaller  antigenic  determinant,  but  the 
difference  between  the  pentaose  and  the  hexaose  is  not  great.  Kabat 
suggests  that  the  hexaose  is  the  largest  group  capable  of  entering  the 
cavity  in  the  anti-dextran  antibody  molecule. 

If  the  hexasaccharide  is  accepted  as  the  largest  group  which  can 
totally  combine  with  the  combining  site  of  the  antibody,  the  contri- 
bution of  each  glucose  residue,  starting  with  the  terminal  unit,  to 
the  total  free  binding  energy  between  antibody  and  antigen  can  be 
computed.   Such   calculations   are   shown   in   Table   3-5,   taken   from 


::::-s 


GIGIGI 
(Isomaltotriose) 


GIGIGIGI 
(Isomaltotetroose) 


GIGIGIGIGI 
(Isomoltopentaose) 


GIGIGIGIGIGI 
(Isomaltohexoose) 


Fig.  3-9.  Relative  inhibitory  power  of  oligosaccharides  for  anti-dextran  serum 
acting  on  dextran.  (Redrawn  from  data  of  Kabat,  1957.) 


48  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

TABLE  3-5 

Calculated   Contribution   to  the   Free   Fnerg>-  of   Combination  of   Glucoses  in 
Reactive  Groups  of  Dextran" 

Contribution  to 
Number  of  glucose  units  binding  energy,  % 

5  98 

4  95 

3  90 

2  60 

1  (terminal  unit)  39 

-  Kabat,  1957. 

Kabat  (1957).  It  will  be  seen  that  the  terminal  glucose  contributes 
as  much  as  39  per  cent  of  the  total  binding  energy.  The  first  five  units 
together  contribute  98  per  cent  of  the  binding  energy,  leaving  only 
2  per  cent  to  be  contributed  by  the  sixth  glucose  residue. 

These  calculations  give  us  a  fairly  good  idea  of  the  size  of  the 
antigenic  determinant  in  a  typical  carbohydrate  antigen.  We  shall 
see  later  how  this  information  can  be  applied  to  practice. 


References 

Avery,  O.  T.,  W.  F.  Gocbel,  and  F.  H.  Babcrs,  1932,  /.  Exptl.  Med.  55,  769. 

Billingham,  R.    E.,    L.  Brent,    and    P.   B.    Medawar,    1953,  Nature    172,    603. 

Boyd,  W.  C,   1952,   Unpublished   experiments. 

Boyd,   W.    C,   and    P.    Doty,    1958,    Unpublished    experiments. 

Burnet,   F.  M.,   1954,    Proc.  Roy.   Soc.    (London)   B    146,    1. 

Cebra,  J  .J.,  1961,  /.  Immunol.  86,  205. 

Glutton,  R.  F.,  C.  R.  Harington,  and  M.  E.     Yuill,  1938,  Biochem.  J.  32,  1111. 

Dubos,  R.  J.,  1945,  The  Bacterial  Cell  in  its  Relation  to  Problems  of  Viru- 
lence. Immunity  and  Chemotherapy,  Harvard  University  Press,  Cambridge. 

Gill,  T.  J.,  and  p!  Doty,  1960,  /.  Mol.  Biol.  2,  65 

Goebel,  W.  F.,  O.  T.  Avery,  and  F.  H.  Babers,  1934.  /.  E.vptl.  Med.  60,  599. 

Haurowitz,  F.,  1952,  Biol.  Rev.  27,  247. 

Hooker,  S.  B.,  and  W.  C.  Boyd.  1932,  /.  Immunol.  23,  465. 

Hooker,  S.  B.,  and  W.  C.   Boyd,   1941,   Unpublished  data. 

Hooker,    S.  B..   and  W.    C.    Boyd,    1933,    /.   Immunol.  25,   61. 

Kabat,  E.  A.   1957,  /.   Cellular  Comp.  Physiol.  50,  Suppl.  1,  79. 

Kabat,  E.  A.,  H.  Baer,  P.  I.  Day,  and  V.  Knayb,  1950,  .1.  E.vptl.  Med.  91, 
433. 


ANTIGENS  49 

Kabat,  E.  A,  and  D.  Berg,   1953,  /.  Inimuiwl.  70,  514. 

Kabat,  E.  A,  and  D.  Berg,  1952,  Ann.  N.  Y.  Acad.  Sci.  55,  471. 

Landsteiner,  K.,    1942,    /.  Exptl.   Med.    75,    269. 

Landsteiner,  K.,   1945,    The   Specificity    of  Serological  Reactions  2nd    rev.  ed.. 

Harvard   University  Press,   Cambridge. 
Landsteiner,   K.,  and  J.  van  der   Scheer,   1938,  /.   Exptl.   Med.  67,  709. 
Lewis,  J.  N.   H.,  1934,   /.   Infectious  Diseases   55,    203. 
Maurer,   P.   H.,  1957,  Proc.  Soc.  Exptl.  Biol.  Med.  96,   394. 
Morgan,  W.  T.  J.,  and  R.  van  Heyningen,  1944,  Brit.  J.  Exptl.  Pathol.  25,  5. 
Sela,  M.,  1962,  Paper  contributed  to  a  symposium  on  poly-alpha-amino  acids. 

To  be  published  by  the  Wisconsin  Univ.  Press. 
Sela,  M.,  and  M.  Arnon,  1960,  Biochem.  J.  75,  91. 


CHAPTER  4 
Blood  Groups 


ABO  Blood  Groups 

It  does  not  take  profound  knowledge  of  science  to  realize  that  no 
two  human  beings,  with  the  possible  exception  of  identical  twins, 
are  exactly  alike.  There  are  sometimes  strong  resemblances  in  families, 
and  sometimes  even  unrelated  persons  look  enough  alike  to  be  mis- 
taken one  for  the  other  by  those  who  do  not  know  them  well,  but 
close  associates  are  very  seldom  deceived.  Features,  voice,  movements, 
and  modes  of  response  nearly  always  distinguish  each  human  being 
from  all  others  in  the  world. 

If  we  believe,  and  the  belief  hardly  needs  defending  today,  that 
structural  and  functional  differences  between  individuals,  aside  from 
the  effects  of  accidents  resulting  in  scars  or  deformity  and  from 
learned  behavioral  patterns,  are  due  to  underlying  biochemical  dif- 
ferences, we  should  not  be  surprised  to  find  that  between  different 
individuals  of  the  same  species  biochemical  differences  can  also  be 
demonstrated.  Surprisingly  enough,  this  was  done  for  the  first  time 
at  the  beginning  of  the  present  century.  Karl  Landsteiner,  then  work- 
ing in  Vienna,  discovered  that  not  all  normal  human  blood  is  alike. 
Landsteiner  and  his  pupils  showed  that  human  beings  could  be 
classified  into  four  groups  on  the  basis  of  the  reactions  of  their  blood 
with  that  of  other  normal  individuals.  This  discovery  made  blood 
transfusion  a  safe  and  practical  procedure  for  the  first  time  and  had 
great  influence  on  the  study  of  serological  specificity. 

Landsteiner's  discovery  consisted  of  the  observation  that,  when 
the   bloods   of  certain   individuals   were   mixed,   the   red  blood   cor- 

50 


BLOOD  GROUPS  51 

puscles  adhered  to  each  other  and  formed  ckmips  that  under  the 
microscope  looked  something  hke  bunches  of  grapes.  (See  Fig.  1-2, 
p.  3).  In  strong  reactions  all  the  red  cells  in  the  preparation  stuck 
together,  leaving  a  clear  supernatant  fluid.  Landsteiner  showed  that 
this  behavior  could  be  explained  by  assuming  that  there  may  be  two 
reactive  substances  in  the  erythrocytes  and  two  corresponding  anti- 
substances  in  the  plasma  which  react  with  the  erythrocyte  substances. 
The  substances  in  the  erythrocytes  have  been  shown  to  be  antigens ; 
they  are  also  called  isoagglutinogens.  The  substances  in  the  plasma 
or  serum  which  combine  with  them  and  thus  cause  agglutination  have 
all  the  properties  of  agglutinating  antibodies,  and  are  called  isoagglu- 
tinins. 

It  is  obvious  that  the  substance  in  the  plasma  which  combines 
with  the  erythrocytes  of  another  individual  and  causes  them  to  ag- 
glutinate could  hardly  coexist  in  the  same  blood  stream  with  the 
corresponding  agglutinogen ;  for,  if  it  did,  an  individual's  plasma 
would  agglutinate  his  own  erythrocytes.  The  rule,  first  stated  by 
Landsteiner  and  known  by  his  name,  is  that  those  agglutinins  will 
be  present  which  can  coexist  with  the  agglutinogens  present  in  the 
cells.  The  agglutinogens,  called  arbitrarily  A  and  B,  can  be  present 
in  the  cell  singly  or  together,  or  can  both  be  absent.  This  gives  us 
the  combinations  of  the  four  classical  blood  groups.   (Table  4-1). 

Landsteiner's  discovery  explained  why  transfusions  of  blood  from 
one  individual  to  another  had  previously  only  occasionally  been  suc- 
cessful. If  a  blood  donor  is  selected  at  random,  the  chances  of  obtain- 
ing one  whose  blood  group  is  compatible  with  that  of  the  recipient 
are  not  good.  It  was  only  when  pretransfusion  blood  grouping  be- 
came a  routine  that  l:)lood  transfusion  became  a  safe  and  reliable 
procedure. 

TABLE  4-1 
The  Landsteiner  Blood  Groups 

Blood  group  Antigens  in  cells  Agglutinins  in  plasma 


0 

— 

Anti-A  and  Anti-B 

A 

A 

Anti-B 

B 

B 

Anti-A 

AB 

A  and  B 

— 

52  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

If  a  donor  of  the  same  blood  group  as  the  recipient  is  chosen,  it 
is  ol)vious  that  the  chances  of  a  successful  transfusion  are  good, 
unless  other  blood  factors  yet  to  be  discussed  come  into  operation, 
or  unless  the  technique  is  faulty.  Transfusion  consists  in  introducing 
a  relatively  small  amount  of  the  donor's  blood,  500  ml.  or  less,  into 
the  circulation  of  the  recipient.  This  means  that  the  donor's  cells  are 
exposed  to  a  large  amount  of  whatever  agglutinins  the  recipient 
possesses,  in  full  concentration.  If  the  donor's  cells  contain  an  ag- 
glutinogen capable  of  reacting  with  the  recipient's  agglutinin  or 
agglutinins,  the  donor's  cells  may  be  agglutinated,  and  a  serious  or 
even  fatal  transfusion  reaction  may  result. 

It  is  not,  however,  always  necessary  to  use  a  donor  of  exactly  the 
same  blood  group  as  the  recipient.  Introduction  of  a  donor's  ag- 
glutinin which  could  react  with  the  recipient's  cells  is  often  not 
serious,  for  the  agglutinin  gets  diluted  by  the  recipient's  plasma  and 
is  also  partly  neutralized  by  soluble  blood  group  substance  in  the  re- 
cipient's plasma  and  in  his  tissues.  This  means  that,  in  general,  trans- 
fusions in  the  directions  shown  in  Fig.  4-1  are  possible,  although 
it  is  always  preferable  to  use  a  donor  of  the  same  group  as  the 
patient. 

0 

I 

0 


/ 


AB 

t 
AB 

Fig.  4-1.  Theoretical    possibilities   of   transfusion,   based   on   blood   groups    of 

donor  and  recipient. 

Blood  groups  are  inherited.  Parents  with  any  given  combination 
of  blood  groups  may  produce  children  of  certain  blood  groups  but 
not  of  others,  except  that  the  mating  of  A  X  B  may  produce  children 
of  any  of  the  four  groups.  Inheritance  is  based  on  three  allelomorphic 
genes.  A,  B,  and  O,  which  can  occur  in  any  combination  of  two : 
OO,  AA,  AO,  BB,  BO,  or  AB.  The  blood  groups  of  individuals 
of  genotype  AO  are  the  same,  so  far  as  we  can  tell  in  the  laboratory, 


BLOOD  GROUPS  53 

as  those  of  individuals  of  genotype  AA.  The  same  holds  for  BB 
and  BO.  Consequently,  we  have  to  classify  both  AA  and  AO  as 
group  A,  and  BB  and  BO  as  group  B,  giving  the  four  Landsteiner 
blood  groups,  as  shown  in  Table  4-2. 

TABLE  4-2 

Genetically  Determined  Types  (Genotypes)  and  Serologically  Determined  Types 
(Blood  Groups) 

Approximate  percentage  of 
Genotype  Blood  group  U.S.A.  population 


00  O  45 

aaI 

AOl 

bb| 

BOj 

AB  AB  3 


A  42 

B  10 


It  was  soon  found  that  there  were  two  kinds  of  A  antigen.  The 
more  common  one,  and  in  Asian  populations  the  only  one  present, 
reacts  strongly  with  anti-A  agglutinins  and  is  designated  as  Ai.  The 
other,  confined  to  Europeans  and  Africans  and  their  descendents 
in  other  parts  of  the  world,  often  reacts  weakly  with  anti-A  and  is 
called  A2.  This  distinction  enables  us  to  divide  the  population  of 
Europe  and  Africa  into  six  blood  groups  instead  of  four,  as  follows : 
O,  Ai,  A2,  B,  AiB,  and  A2B.  The  difference  seems  to  be  of  little 
importance  for  transfusion  but  is  interesting  to  anthropologists  and 
students  of  legal  medicine. 

Althotigh  in  Table  4-1  group  O  erythrocytes  are  shown  as  having 
no  antigen,  this  is  not  strictly  true.  They  possess  antigens  connected 
with  other  blood  group  systems  still  to  be  discussed  and  also  have 
an  antigen  connected  with  the  ABO  blood  group  system.  Human 
plasma  does  not  ordinarily  contain  an  agglutinin  for  this  antigen, 
but  the  plasma  of  individuals  of  the  subgroup  AiB  and  the  normal 
serum  of  certain  animals  may  contain  one.  The  agglutinin  can  be 
found  in  the  serum  of  certain  eels,  apparently  more  regularly  in  the 
European  than  the  American  eel,  and  may  be  produced  by  immuniz- 
ing a  goat  with  SJiiga  bacilli.  None  of  these  sources  is  always  availa- 
ble, nor  is  the  agglutinin  so  obtained  always  strong  and  reliable.  It 


54  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMAIUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

was  therefore  a  considerable  advance  in  blood  grouping  technique 
when  it  was  discovered  that  saline  extracts  of  the  seeds  of  certain 
plants,  such  as  Ulex  europeus,  which  grows  wild  in  Western  and 
Southern  Europe  and  in  North  Africa,  contain  an  agglutinin  specific 
for  this  antigen  of  the  group  O  erythrocytes  (Cazal  and  Lalaurie, 
1952;  Boyd  and  Shapleigh,  1954a).  This  plant  agglutinin  has  ap- 
parently replaced  all  other  reagents  in  this  application. 

At  first  it  was  believed  that  the  agglutinogen  detected  by  this 
agglutinin,  whatever  the  source  of  the  agglutinin,  was  an  O  antigen 
which  had  the  same  relation  to  the  O  gene  as  the  B  antigen  has  to 
the  B  gene.  The  agglutinin  was  therefore  called  anti-O.  It  was  soon 
found,  however,  that  erythrocytes  of  the  subgroups  A2  and  A2B  are 
also  agglutinated  by  the  agglutinin,  A2  cells  being  affected  about  as 
strongly  as  O  cells.  This  is  apparently  true  even  when  the  genotype  of 
the  Ao  individual  is  A2A2,  so  that  no  O  gene  is  present.  It  seemed  im- 
proper to  retain  the  name  anti-O  for  a  reagent  that  detects  an  anti- 
gen produced  by  both  the  O  and  Ao  genes.  Following  the  practice 
of  Morgan  (Morgan  and  Watkins,  1948),  the  term  anti-H  is  now 
generally  used  for  the  agglutinin  and  the  term  H  for  the  antigen  it 
detects. 

Taking  account  of  this  and  other  discoveries  about  the  blood 
groups,  we  may  revise  Table  4-1   (see  Table  4-3). 

TABLE  4-3 
Subgroups  of  Landsteiner  Blood  Groups 


Blood  group 

Subgroup 

Antigens  in  cells 

Agglutinins  in  plasma 

0 

0 

H 

Anti-A,  anti-Ai,  anti-B 

A 

(A. 
\A. 

[A, 

fAnti-B  (sometimes  anti-H) 

IA2  +  H 

(Anti-B  (sometimes  anti-Ai) 

B 

B 

B 

Anti-A,  and  anti-Ai 

AB 

fA,B 

/Ai-fB 

/(Sometimes  anti-H) 

IA2B 

IA2  +  B 

\  (Sometimes  anti-Ai) 

Secretors  and  Nonsecretors 

The  antigens  of  the  ABO  blood  group  system  are  not  confined  to 
the  erythrocytes.  They  may  occur  in  practically  all  tissues  and  fluids 
of  the  body,  with  the  probable  exception  of  the  central  nervous  sys- 


BLOOD  GROUPS  55 

tern.  They  may  occur  in  two  forms :  water  soluble  and  lipid  soluble 
(i.e.,  soluble  in  lipid  solvents  such  as  alcohol-ether  mixtures  and 
chloroform).  All  individuals  apparently  have  the  lipid-soluble  form 
in  their  tissues,  in  conformity  with  their  blood  group  (Boyd  and 
Boyd,  1937).  The  water-soluble  form,  however,  is  found  in  only 
about  85  per  cent  of  European  individuals.  Such  persons  are  called 
secretors,  and  those  in  whose  tissues  and  body  fluids  water-soluble 
antigens  corresponding  to  their  blood  group  are  not  found  are  called 
nonsecretors  (Schlff  and  Sasaki,  1932).  The  ability  to  secrete  the 
A  and  B  antigens  in  water-soluble  form  is  inherited,  being  con- 
trolled by  a  pair  of  genes  S  and  s. 

The  saliva  of  all  secretors,  no  matter  what  their  group,  contains 
enough  of  the  H  antigen  to  make  it  possible  to  diagnose  such  in- 
dividuals by  the  inhibition  technique  with  an  anti-H  reagent  such 
as  Ulex  extract  (Boyd  and  Shapleigh,  1954b).  Saliva  of  group  O 
secretors  is  richest  in  H  antigen,  and,  according  to  Race  and  Sanger 
(1958),  some  AiB  salivas  may  not  contain  enough  H  antigen  to 
make  the  use  of  Ulex  extracts  reliable  for  the  diagnosis  of  secretors  in 
this  subgroup. 

The  above  sketch  does  not  by  any  means  give  an  adequate  picture 
of  the  ABO  blood  group  system,  which  is  one  of  the  most  complicated 
known  in  man.  A  good  discussion  is  given  in  the  book  by  Race  and 
Sanger  (1948).  We  may  simply  mention  that  a  number  of  other 
variants  of  the  A  antigen  are  known,  all  of  them  fortunately  rare, 
and  that  genes  exist,  also  rare,  which  can  modify  the  expression  of 
the  ABO  genes.  The  "Bombay"  gene,  x,  when  present  in  double 
dose,  XX,  prevents  the  development  of  antigens  B  and  H  ;  whether 
it  also  suppresses  A  is  not  yet  known.  There  seems  to  be  another 
gene,  y,  which  when  present  in  double  dose,  yy,  modifies  the  de- 
velopment of  the  A  antigen  in  the  red  cells  and,  to  a  much  lesser  ex- 
tent, in  the  saliva.  Variants  of  the  B  antigen  have  also  been  observed. 

Blood  Groups  of  the  Ancient  Dead 

Antigens  A  and  B  are  much  more  stable  than  most  protein  antigens. 
(The  chemical  nature  of  the  A  and  B  antigens  will  be  discussed  in 
Chapter  7.)  It  is  comparatively  easy  to  demonstrate  A  and  B  in 
dried  tissue,  boiled  erythrocytes,  or  tissues  which  have  been  pre- 
served in  formaldehyde.   These   facts   led   Boyd   and   Boyd    (1934, 


56  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

1937)  to  attempt  to  demonstrate  A  and  B  in  mummified  human 
remains.  The  attempt  seemed  to  be  successful.  These  workers  tested 
more  than  300  specimens,  mostly  from  Egypt  in  the  Old  World  and 
from  Mexico  and  Peru  in  the  New  World.  The  technique,  though 
exacting  and  at  times  even  exasperating,  was  simple  in  theory ;  pul- 
verized dried  tissue  (usually  muscle)  was  mixed  with  carefully 
titrated  anti-A  and  anti-B  agglutinins  and  the  mixture  tested  after 
a  suitable  interval  for  evidence  of  removal  of  one  or  more  of  the 
agglutinins.  Removal  of  anti-B  was  considered  to  indicate  the  pres- 
ence in  the  tissue  of  the  B  antigen,  removal  of  anti-A  the  presence 
of  A.  Removal  of  neither  suggested  either  that  the  specimen  came 
from  an  individual  of  group  O  or  that  any  antigens  originally  present 
had  deteriorated.  Removal  of  both  anti-A  and  anti-B  suggested  group 
AB  or  nonspecific  destruction  or  removal  of  agglutinins  or  anti- 
bodies in  general. 

The  results  obtained  were  on  the  whole  in  line  with  the  present 
distribution  of  the  A  and  B  antigens  in  human  races,  confirming 
the  antiquity  of  the  ABO  blood  group  system.  (Some  authors  had 
suggested,  amazingly,  that  the  A  and  B  genes  were  of  recent  origin.) 
The  B  antigen  was  apparently  found  in  pre-Columbian  specimens 
from  Mexico  (Taylor  and  Boyd,  1943),  a  finding  which,  if  ever 
confirmed,  might  support  the  suggestion,  made  on  other  grounds, 
that  the  B  gene  was  eliminated  in  the  aboriginal  inhabitants  of 
America  by  natural  selection  (Boyd,  1959).  This  subject  has  been 
reviewed  by  Smith  (1960). 

Origin  of  Isoagglutinins  Anti-A  and  Anti-B 

The  presence  of  anti-A  and  anti-B  in  normal  human  plasma  seems 
at  first  glance  to  be  an  exception  to  the  rule  that  antibodies  to  blood 
group  antigens  do  not  usually  appear  without  some  history  of  un- 
usual antigenic  stimulus.  The  exception  is  a  marked  one,  for  the 
occurrence  of  these  isoagglutinins  is  very  regular.  When  anti-A 
or  anti-B,  if  expected  according  to  Landsteiner's  rule,  are  absent, 
there  is  usually  a  special  explanation,  as  Race  and  Sanger  point  out. 
It  is  natural  to  ask  why  these  agglutinins  appear  with  such  regularity. 
There  have  been  two  main  theories. 

According  to  one  theory,  the  isoagglutinins  anti-A  and  anti-B  are  a 
result  of  the  action  of  the  ABO  genes  just  as  the  ABH  antigens  are. 


BLOOD  GROUPS  57 

This  theory  has  been  supported  l)y  Furiihata  (1927)  and  tlie  Wurni- 
sers  ( Fihtti-Wurmser  et  al.,  1954).  Whether  this  theory  seems 
plausible  depends  partly  on  which  theory  of  antibody  formation  we 
happen  to  believe. 

Another  theory  suggests  that  anti-xA.  and  anti-B  are  immune  anti- 
bodies, as  most  other  agglutinins  are,  being  formed  in  response  to 
antigens,  in  food,  in  bacteria,  and  in  animal  parasites,  which  are 
chemically  similar  to  the  A  and  B  antigens  of  man.  It  is  known  that 
a  number  of  such  related  antigens  exist ;  in  Chapter  2  the  cross- 
reaction  of  blood  group  A  antigen  and  type  14  pneumococcus  was 
mentioned. 

If  the  second  theory  of  isoagglutinin  formation  is  correct,  one 
wonders  why  natural  isoagglutinins  for  other  human  blood  antigens, 
such  as  M,  N,  and  Rh,  are  so  seldom  encountered.  One  possible  rea- 
son is  the  lower  antigenicity  of  these  agglutinogens ;  some  evidence 
for  this  exists.  Another  reason  might  be  that  the  human  agglutino- 
gens M,  N,  and  Rh  are  more  unusual  in  their  structure  than  A  and  B, 
so  that  closely  related  antigens  in  lower  organisms  and  in  food,  serv- 
ing as  stimuli  for  the  formation  of  anti-M,  anti-N,  and  anti-Rh  anti- 
bodies in  man,  are  only  rarely  encountered.  Later  on  I  shall  mention 
some  recent  evidence  in  support  of  this  speculation. 


MNS  Blood  Groups 

Although  unknown  for  so  long,  the  existence  of  the  ABO  blood 
groups  was  relatively  easy  to  demonstrate  because  of  the  normal 
presence  of  the  isoagglutinins  anti-A  and  anti-B.  However,  over  a 
quarter  of  a  century  went  by  before  any  other  blood  group  system 
was  discovered  in  man.  In  1927,  Landsteiner  and  Levine  demonstrated 
the  existence  of  M  and  N  antigens  (also  P)  by  the  use  of  absorbed 
sera  of  rabbits  injected  with  human  erythrocytes.  Because  anti-M 
and  anti-N  isoagglutinins  rarely  occur  and  because  patients  are  not 
readily  immunized  to  these  antigens,  they  have  little  importance  for 
transfusion ;  their  applications  have  been  mainly  to  legal  medicine 
and  to  anthropology. 

A  number  of  variants  of  the  M  and  N  antigens  and,  in  addition, 
other  antigens  associated  with  the  M  and  N  factors  in  inheritance 
have  been  discovered.  Two  of  these,   S  and  s    (to  be  distinguished 


58  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMAIUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

carefully  from  the  Ss  gene  pair  which  controls  the  secreting  phe- 
nomenon in  the  ABO  system)  are  fairly  common  nearly  everywhere 
and  add  greatly  to  the  anthropological  usefulness  of  the  system. 
Two  others,  called  Hunter  and  Henshaw  after  the  donors  in  whom 
they  were  first  found,  are  not  too  common  in  Africans  and  are 
virtually  unknown  in  persons  of  European  descent. 

Distribution  of  M  and  N  in  the  Body 

Boyd  and  Boyd  (1934)  were  not  able  to  demonstrate  M  and  N 
in  human  tissues  with  the  technique  which  they  had  devised  for 
A  and  B.  Kosyakov  and  Tribulev  (1939,  see  also  Kosyakov  1954) 
devised  a  method  by  which  M  and  N  could  be  demonstrated.  Their 
work  was  confirmed  by  Boorman  and  Dodd  (1943).  Whereas  Boyd 
and  Tayian  (1935)  could  not  detect  M  and  N  in  boiled  erythrocytes, 
Kosyakov  (1954)  was  able  to  do  so,  and  also  showed  these  antigens 
to  be  heat  stable. 

Rh  Groups 

In  1939.  Levine  and  Stetson  reported  a  case  of  erythroblastosis 
fetalis  and  ascribed  this  disease  of  the  newborn  to  sensitization  of 
the  mother  to  a  blood  antigen  the  fetus  had  inherited  from  the 
father.  It  is  now  known  that  this  proposed  explanation  of  the  disease 
is  correct  and  that  the  antigen  operating  in  the  case  described  was 
one  of  those  now  known  as  Rh.  Levine  and  Stetson,  however,  did 
not  propose  any  name  for  the  new  blood  factor  (on  such  a  slender 
hair  sometimes  dangles  the  apple  of  priority).  It  was  not  until 
Landsteiner  and  Wiener  (1940)  discovered  that  serum  from  one  of 
their  rabbits  immunized  with  rhesus  erythrocytes  detected  a  new 
factor  in  human  blood  that  the  term  Rh  was  introduced.  The  new 
factor  still  might  not  have  attracted  any  more  attention  than  had 
others  previously  reported  had  not  Wiener  and  Peters  (1940)  shown 
that  certain  transfusion  reactions  were  due  to  sensitization  to  Rh 
and  Levine  et  al.  (1941)  shown  that  Rh  incompatibility  between 
mother  and  fetus  could  be  the  cause  of  erythroblastosis  fetalis. 

Reduced  to  the  simplest  terms,  the  way  Rh  incompatibility  can 
cause  erythroblastosis  fetalis  is  apparently  this :  The  mother  is  Rh- 
negative,  and  the  fetus  inherits  the  Rh  blood  factor  from  his  father. 


BLOOD  GROUPS 


59 


o 


o 


o 


60  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

Fetal  antigen-containing  erythrocytes,  or  perhaps  in  some  cases 
merely  antigen  from  disintegrating  fetal  erythrocytes,  passes  the 
placental  barrier  or  crosses  minute  breaks  in  the  placental  capillaries 
and  starts  an  immune  response  in  the  mother.  This  results  in  the  ap- 
pearance of  anti-Rh  antibodies  in  the  maternal  circulation.  These 
diffuse  through  the  placental  barrier  back  into  the  fetal  circulation 
(Fig.  4-2)  where  they  combine  with  the  fetal  erythrocytes  causing 
red  cell  destruction  and,  in  severe  cases,  anemia,  jaudice,  edema, 
and  death. 

It  should  be  mentioned  that  erythroblastosis  fetalis,  although  seri- 
ous when  it  occurs,  is  rare.  In  the  United  States  it  occurs  in  about 
one  out  of  400  births  and  rarely  affects  the  first  pregnancy,  even 
when  Rh  incompatibility  exists. 

The  Rh  blood  groups  are  much  more  complicated  than  would  the 
case  be  if  there  were  simply  two  possibilities :  Rh-positive  (the 
erythrocytes  contain  the  Rh  antigen)  or  Rh-negative  individuals 
(the  erythrocytes  do  not  contain  the  Rh  antigen).  Our  knowledge 
of  the  Rh  blood  groups,  which  extends  now  to  five  basic  Rh  antigens, 
is  the  result  of  the  work  of  many  able  and  industrious  researchers. 
Only  a  simplified  outline  of  it  can  be  given  here. 

Although  it  does  not  have  priority,  the  notation  devised  for  the 
Rh  antigens  by  Fisher  and  Race  (see  Race,  1944)  has  proven  clearer 
and  more  convenient  than  Wiener's  notations.  The  five  basic  Rh 
antigens  are,  according  to  Race,  designated  as  C,  c,  E,  e,  and  D. 
Genetically  C  and  c  are  alleles,  and  so  are  E  and  e.  It  is  not  yet  cer- 
tain whether  this  means  that  three  closely  linked  loci  are  involved  in 
their  mechanism  of  inheritance,  as  the  British  workers  believed,  or 
a  series  of  alleles  at  one  locus,  as  Wiener  continues  to  maintain.  In 
any  case,  the  allelic  behavior  of  C  and  c  and  E  and  e  is  an  important 
phenomenon  for  their  application  in  legal  medicine.  The  allele  cor- 
responding to  D  is  d,  but  no  d  antigen  has  been  demonstrated  with 
certainty. 

The  number  of  Rh  blood  groups  that  can  l^e  distinguished  de- 
pends on  the  number  of  anti-Rh  agglutinins  available.  Anti-e  is  seldom 
available  and  anti-c  is  not  always  easy  to  get  for  routine  determina- 
tions. If  all  five  agglutinins  are  at  hand,  three  different  blood  groups 
can  be  distinguished  with  respect  to  the  C  locus,  namely  C-positive 
c-negative,   C-negative  c-positive,  and   C-positive  c-positive.    (Since 


BLOOD  GROUPS  61 

C  and  c  hchave  like  alleles,  the  possibility  of  a  C-negative  c-negative 
grouping  does  not  exist.)  Use  of  anti-E  and  anti-e  further  sub- 
divides each  of  these  three  types  into  three  others,  and  the  use  of 
anti-D  subdivides  all  types  once  more  into  D-positive  and  D-negative. 
Thus,  eighteen  types  (3  X  3  X  2  =  18)  of  Rh  antigen  can  be 
distinguished.  If  anti-e  is  not  available,  as  is  usually  the  case,  he 
number  of  Rh  types  becomes  twelve  (3  X  2  X  2  =  12)  (Table  4-4). 
Variants  of  these  antigens,  described  by  the  British  workers  as 
further  alleles,  have  been  found,  and  antigens  which  seem  to  be  due 
to  other  gene  loci  on  the  same  chromosome  are  known.  A  rare  type 
of  blood,  classified  D,  which  contains  only  the  D  antigen,  has  been 
found. 

TABLE  4-4 
Reactions  of  the  Twelve  Rh  Blood  Groups  Distinguished  by  Four  Anti-Rh  Sera 


Reaction 

with  serum 

Group 

Anti-C 

Anti-D 

Anti-E 

Anti-c 

L  cde 

0 

0 

0 

+ 

2.  cdE 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

3.  cDe 

0 

+ 

0 

+ 

4.  cDE 

0 

+ 

+ 

+ 

5.  Cde/c 

+ 

0 

0 

+ 

6.  CdE/c 

+ 

0 

+ 

+ 

7.  CDe/c 

+ 

+ 

0 

+ 

8.  CDE/c 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

9.  Cde/c 

+ 

0 

0 

0 

10.  CdE/c 

+ 

0 

-f 

0 

11.  CDe/c 

+ 

+ 

0 

0 

12.  CDE/C 

+ 

+ 

-f- 

0 

The  frequencies  of  the  occurrence  of  Rh  antigens  vary  widely  in 
different  populations.  The  Rh-negative  type  (cde)  is  most  strikingly 
absent  from  Asian  and  Pacific  populations  and  the  American  Indians. 
It  has  its  highest  frequency  in  the  Basques,  a  population  in  certain 
regions  of  France  and  Spain,  and  certain  inhabitants  of  Switzerland. 
The  Basques  speak  a  non-Indo-European  language  and  are  known 
to  represent  the  remnant  of  an  earlier  European  population  which 
was  once  dispersed  over  a  much  wider  area,  including  perhaps  North 


62  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEAIICAL  SPECIFICITY 

Africa.  The  D  antigen  is  most  frequent  in  African  populations  and 
is  so  much  more  common  there  that  it  could  almost  be  called  an 
African  antigen. 

Stability  of  Rh  Antigens 
The  chemical  nature  of  the  Rh  antigens  is  still  completely  unknown 
(see,  however,  Chapter  7).  The  antigens  appear  to  be  less  stable  than 
A,  B,  M,  and  N;  at  least  Kosyakov  (1954)  reported  that  they  are 
destroyed  by  boiling  for  10  minutes. 

Other  Blood  Groups 

Once  laboratories  were  set  up  to  examine  routinely  human  sera 
which  showed  atypical  agglutination  reactions,  the  discovery  of 
other  human  blood  groups  followed  rapidly.  It  is  doubtful  if  all 
have  yet  been  reported.  Those  already  demonstrated  have  generally 
been  named  after  the  donor  in  whose  blood  the  new  antigen  or  anti- 
body was  first  identified.  They  have  names  such  as  Lutheran,  Lewis, 
Duffy,  Kell,  and  Kidd.  A  blood  factor  which  may  possibly  be  different 
from  any  of  these  has  been  found  with  the  aid  of  a  plant  agglutinin 
from  peanuts  (see  Chapter  5). 


References 

Boyd,  W.  C,  1959,  /.  Med.  Educ.  34,  398. 

Boyd,  W.  C,  and  L.  G.  Boyd,  1934,  /.  Immunol.  26,  489. 

Boyd,  W.  C,  and  L.  G.  Boyd,  1937,  /.  Immunol.  32,  307. 

Boyd,  W.  C,  and  E.  Shapleigh,  1954a,  /.  Lab.  Clin.  Med.  44,  235. 

Boyd,  W.  C,  and  E.  Shapleigh,  1954b,  Blood  9,  1195. 

Boyd,  W.  C,  and  E.  Tayian,  1935,  /.  Immunol.  29,  511. 

Boyd,  W.  C,  D.  M.  Green,  D.  M.  Fujinaga,  J.  S.  Drabik,  and  E.  Waszczenko- 

Zacharczenko,  1959,  Vox  Sanguinis  4,  456. 
Boorman,  K.  E.,  and  B.  E.  Dodd,  1943,  /.  Pathol.  Bacterial.  55,  329. 
Cazal,  P.,  and  M.  Lalurie,  1952,  Acta  Haematol.  8,  73. 
Filitti-Wurmser,  S.,  et  al.,  1954,  Ann.  Eugenics  18,  183. 
Furuhata,  T.,  1927,  Japan  Med.  World  7,  197. 
Kosyakov,  P.  N.,  1954,  Antigennye  Veshchestva  Organismu  i  ikh   Znachenie  v 

Biologii  i  Meditsine  (Antigenic  Substances  of  the  Body  and  Their  Significance 

in  Biology  and  Medicine),  Medgiz,  Moscow. 
Kosyakov,  P.  N.,  and  G.  P.  Tribulev,  1939,  J.  Immunol.  37,  283. 
Landsteiner,  K.,  and  A.  S.  Wiener,  1940,  Proc.  Sac.  E.rptl.  Biol.  Med.  43,  223. 


BLOOD  GROUPS  63 

Levine,  P.,  and  R.  E.  Stetson,  1939,  /.  Am.  Med.  Assoc.  113,  126. 

Levine,   P.,   P.  Vogel,   E.   M.  Katzin,   and   L.   Burnham,   1941,   Am.   J.    Obstcf. 

Gynocol.  42,  925. 
Morgan,  W.  T.  J.,  and  W.  M.  Watkins,  1948,  Brit.  J.  E.vptl.  Pathol.  29,  159. 
Race,  R.  R.,  1944,  Nature  153,  771. 

Race,  R.  R.,  and  R.  Sanger,  1958,  Blood  Groups  in  Man,  Blackwell,  Oxford. 
Schiff,  F.,  and  H.  Sasaki,  1932,  Klin.  IVochschr.  11,  1426. 
Smith,  M.,  1960,  Science  131,  699. 
Taylor,  W.  W.,  and  W.  C.  Boyd,   1943,   Year  Book  Am.  Phil.  Soc,  p.   178, 

Year  Books,  New  York. 
Wiener,  A.  S.,  and  H.  R.  Peters,  1940,  Ami.  Infernal.  Med.  13.  2306. 


CHAPTER  5 
Plant  Agglutinins  (Lectins)  I 


Specificity  of  Proteins  Other  Than  Antibodies 

Antibodies  are  not  the  only  large  molecules  with  specific  biological 
activity.  Enzymes  (also  proteins)  and  hormones,  many  of  which  are 
proteins,  also  exhibit  this  phenomenon.  Enzymes,  outstanding  ex- 
amples in  this  respect,  show  various  degrees  of  specificity.  Some  en- 
zymes, such  as  barley  maltase  and  succinic  acid  dehydrogenase,  are 
very  specific,  catalyzing  one  reaction  and  only  one  reaction.  Other 
enzymes  are  specific  for  a  particular  chemical  grouping  in  their  sub- 
strate. Enzymes  catalyzing  reactions  in  which  optically  active  sub- 
stances such  as  sugars  or  amino  acids  are  involved  frequently  act 
primarily  or  exclusively  on  one  of  the  enantiomorphs.  Even  enzymes 
such  as  trypsin  attack  only  certain  linkages  in  their  substrates.  En- 
zymes can  be  inhibited  by  an  excess  of  one  of  the  products  of  the 
reaction  they  catalyze,  a  behavior  reminiscent  of  the  specific  inhibition 
of  antibody-antigen  reactions  by  haptens. 

Although  enzymes  resemble  antibodies  in  many  ways,  there  are 
striking  differences.  An  enzyme  combines  with  its  substrate  and  then 
catalyzes  a  chemical  reaction  in  which  the  substrate  is  involved.  The 
result  is  often  complete  destruction  of  the  substrate.  Antiliodies,  on 
the  other  hand,  have  no  known  catalytic  activity  and  do  not  them- 
selves cause  chemical  changes  in  the  antigens  with  which  they  com- 
bine. 

Other  proteins  exhibit  specific  comljining  power.  Serum  albumin 
has  the  power  of  binding  certain  dyes  and  a  number  of  other  natural 
and  synthetic  substances  (Klotz,  Walker,  and  Pivan,  1946;  Karush, 
1950). 

64 


PLANT  AGGLUTININS   (LECTINS)   I  65 

Grabar  (1947)  suggests  that  the  power  of  plasma  proteins  to 
combine  with  various  substances  explains  one  of  their  important 
roles — that  of  carrier  (transportcitr).  According  to  his  view,  the 
lipid  carrying  role  of  beta  globulins  is  analogous  to  the  function  of 
antibodies  in  their  union  with  antigens. 


Plant  Agglutinins 

Possession  of  proteins  capable  of  such  firm  and  relatively  specific 
combination  with  other  substances  is  not  confined  to  the  higher  ani- 
mals. It  has  long  been  known  that  extracts  of  certain  plant  seeds  will 
bring  about  the  agglutination  of  animal  erythrocyte  suspensions  to 
which  they  are  added.  In  fact,  the  agglutinative  action  of  extracts  of 
the  castor  bean,  Ricinus  communis  (Table  5-1),  was  discovered  be- 

TABLE  5-1 

Agglutination  of  Animal  Erythrocytes  by  Ricin* 


Extract  of  Rich 

nus  communis,  diluted 

Red  cells  from 

1:64 

1:128 

1:256 

1:512 

1:1024 

1:2048 

1 :4096 

1:8192 

Rabbit 

4 

4 

4 

4 

3 

3 

1.5 

Cat 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

1.5 

0.5 

Man 

4 

4 

4 

1.5 

0.5 

0 

0 

Chicken 

4 

4 

1.5 

0 

0 

0 

0 

Rat 

4 

3 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

^  Numbers  indicate  degree  of  agglutination;  4  indicates  complete  agglutination, 
0.5,  weak  agglutination,  0,  no  agglutination. 

fore  agglutinins  for  erythrocytes  were  demonstrated  in  the  blood 
of  animals  (Lau,  1901),  and  was  described  soon  after  bacterial  ag- 
glutination. Extracts  of  other  plant  seeds,  such  as  Abrus  precatorius 
and  certain  other  Leguminosae,  were  shown  to  have  similar  action. 
Because  these  plant  agglutinins  act  on  the  red  cells  of  several 
animal  species  they  were  called  nonspecific  by  many  workers.  Yet 
Landsteiner  (1945)  observed  that  the  substances  are  not  without  a 
certain  degree  of  specificity.  He  illustrated  this  fact  with  a  little  table 
in  his  book  on  the  specificity  of  serological  reactions  (Table  5-2).  It 


66  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

TABLE  5-2 
Titers  of   Different    Plant   Agglutinins  for  the   Red   Cells  of   Different   Species* 


Titer  for  blood  of: 

Agglutinin  from: 

Rabbit 

Horse 

Pigeon 

Beans 

Lentils 

A  brus  precatorius 

Castor  beans 

125 
160 

128 
4 

2000 

0 

256 

512 

■^  After  Landsteiner,  1945. 

will  be  seen  that  some  of  the  seed  extracts  show  specificity,  since 
they  agglutinate  the  erythrocytes  of  one  species  more  strongly  than 
those  of  another  and  in  one  case  do  not  agglutinate  blood  of  a 
certain  species  at  all. 

Blood  Group-Specific  Plant  Agglutinins 
One  day  toward  the  end  of  1945,  looking  at  this  table  (Table  5-2) 
in  the  new  edition  of  Landsteiner's  book,  I  was  seized  with  the 
idea  that  if  such  seed  extracts  could  show  species  specificity,  they 
might  even  show  individual  specificity ;  that  is,  they  might  possibly 
affect  the  red  cells  of  some  individuals  of  a  species  and  not  affect 
those  of  others  of  the  same  species.  I  asked  one  of  my  assistants  to 
go  out  and  buy  dried  lima  beans.  Why  I  said  lima  beans  instead  of 
pea  beans  or  kidney  beans  I  shall  never  know.  But  if  we  had  bought 
practically  any  other  kind  of  bean  we  should  not  have  discovered  any- 
thing new. 

The  lima  beans  were  ground  and  extracted  with  salt  solution. 
The  extract  agglutinated  erythrocytes  of  some  human  individuals 
very  strongly,  btit  those  of  others  only  weakly  if  at  all.  It  was  im- 
mediately evident  that  the  differences  were  correlated  with  blood 
groups  (Table  5-3).  The  agglutinin  from  lima  beans  is  almost  com- 
pletely specific  for  the  blood  group  A  antigen. 

This  discovery  was  made  so  easily  that  I  was  disarmed.  The  whole 
process  of  thinking  of  the  experiment,  obtaining  the  materials,  and 
testing  the  idea  were  the  events  of  perhaps  two  hours.  So  it  is  not 
surprising,  perhaps,  that  I  failed  to  realize  the  importance  of  the 
observation  and  did  not  immediately  follow  it  up.  I  was  also  then  in 


E\\^ 

+  +  +  + 

MF 

+  +  +  + 

DA 

+  +  +  + 

JB 

+  +  +  + 

AL 

+  +  +  + 

WCB 

+  +  +  + 

PLANT  AGGLUTININS   (LECTINS)   I  67 

TABLE  5-3 
Test  of  Lima  Bean  Extract  (December  10,  1945) 

Reaction  of  extract  with  cells  of  group: 

A  BO 

LH     ±  BD  0 

BR  0 

SJ  0 

ON  0 

BA  0 

CTS  0 

the  process  of  writing  the  second  edition  of  my  book  on  immunology. 
I  did  inckide  a  short  and  rather  obscure  reference  to  the  observation 
in  the  new  edition  (Boyd,  1947). 

After  about  two  years,  I  returned  to  the  study  of  the  plant  ag- 
glutinins. In  1949,  I  published  a  report  on  262  varieties  of  plants  be- 
longing to  sixty-three  families  (Boyd  and  Reguera,  1949).  Of 
these  plants,  191  showed  no  agglutinating  activity.  Some  agglutinated 
human  erythrocytes  of  all  blood  groups.  Extracts  of  certain  varieties 
of  Phascolus  limensis  and  Ph.  lunatus  agglutinated  strongly  only 
blood  of  groups  A  and  AB.  One  species  only,  Vitis  aestivalis,  gave  a 
weak  reaction  only  with  B,  but  I  have  not  been  able  to  reproduce 
this  result  w^ith  later  material. 

Meanwhile,  in  1948,  Renkonen  had  published  a  paper  dealing  with 
independent  studies  on  fifty-seven  species  belonging  to  twenty-eight 
genera.  Among  the  blood  group-specific  plants  he  studied  were  Vicia 
cracca,  specific  for  A,  and  Laburnum  alpiniim,  Cytisiis  scssijolius, 
and  Lotus  tctragonolobus,  specific  for  H. 

A  number  of  laboratories  are  now  engaged  in  the  study  of  these 
interesting  substances.  Reviews  have  been  published  by  Krtipe 
(1956),  Makela  (1957),  and  Bird  (1959).  Seeds  of  a  number  of 
plants  are  reported  to  contain  anti-A;  that  of  Dolichos  biflorus  re- 
acts so  much  more  strongly  with  Ai  than  with  Ao  as  to  be  virtually 
specific  for  Aj  (Bird  1951).  An  anti-N  has  been  found  in  Vicia 
graminea  (Ottsooser  and  Silberschmidt,  1953)  and,  more  recently, 
in  Bauhinia  purpurea  (Makela,  1957;  Boyd,  Everhart,  and  McMaster, 
1958).  An  anti-M  is  on  the  market. 


68  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

I  shall  discuss  the  nature  of  the  plant  agglutinins  in  Chapter  6. 
In  the  meantime  may  I  anticipate  by  saying  that  although  it  is  proper 
to  refer  to  them  as  agglutinins,  as  has  been  done  for  more  than  half 
a  century,  it  would  be  begging  the  question  to  refer  to  them  as  anti- 
bodies. In  fact,  I  do  not  believe  that  this  is  what  they  are.  I  have 
therefore  suggested  referring  to  these  proteins  as  lectins,  from  the 
Latin  legere,  t»  pick  out  or  choose  (Boyd  and  Shapleigh,  1954a),  in 
order  to  call  attention  to  their  specificity  without  implying  any  as- 
sumptions concerning  their  origin.  I  suggested  that  the  term  be 
applied  also  to  those  normal  antibodies  supposedly  not  the  result 
of  antigenic  stimulus.  But,  if  Jerne's  "natural  selection"  theory  of 
antibody  formation  proves  to  be  correct  (Chapter  2),  it  may  turn 
out  that  the  difference  between  "normal"  and  "immune"  antibodies 
is  not  as  great  as  has  been  thought.  In  that  case  the  term  lectin  may 
come  to  be  restricted  to  antibody-like  plant  proteins.  In  fact,  there 
already  seems  to  be  a  tendency  to  use  the  word  in  this  way. 

No  good  anti-B  lectin  is  routinely  available.  Extracts  of  Sophora 
japonica  agglutinate  blood  of  group  B  more  strongly  than  that  of 
group  A  but  react  too  strongly  with  A  to  be  satisfactory  as  a  labora- 
tory anti-B  reagent  (Kriipe,  1953).  Euonymus  eiiropeiis  extracts 
contain  anti-B  and  anti-H  (Schmidt,  1954).  Marasmius  oreades, 
which  sometimes  furnishes  a  satisfactory,  though  weak,  anti-B,  is 
a  small  mushroom  not  commercially  available  (Elo,  Estola,  and 
Malmstrom,  1951).  The  best  anti-B  is  said  to  be  that  from  Bandeiraea 
simpUcijoUa  (Makela  and  Makela,  1956),  although  the  samples  of 
this  plant  I  have  tested  have  been  disappointing. 

Because  of  the  absence  of  an  anti-B,  lectins  are  not  used  routinely 
in  the  determination  of  the  ABO  blood  groups,  in  spite  of  the  fact 
that  satisfactory  anti-A  is  available  from  several  plants.  However, 
the  anti-Ai  of  Dolichos  biflorus  and  the  anti-H  of  Ulex  europeiis 
make  an  ideal  combination  of  reagents  for  the  routine  determination 
of  the  subgroups  of  A  and  AB  (Boyd  and  Shapleigh,  1954c),  as 
shown  in  Table  5-4.  Anti-A  lectins,  especially  from  lima  beans,  have 
had  a  number  of  applications  in  special  experiments  where  a  large 
amount  of  anti-A  agglutinin  is  needed  (At wood  and  Scheinberg, 
1958).  Testing  for  H  substance  in  saliva,  by  inhibition  of  the  anti-H 
of  Ulex  (Boyd  and  Shapleigh,  1954b),  has  become  the  preferred 
method  of  diagnosing  secretors  and  nonsecretors   (Table  5-5). 


PLANT  AGGLUTININS   (LFXTINS)   I  69 

TABLK  5-4 
Determination  of  Subgroups  of  A  and  AB  with  Lectins^' 


Reaction  with 

extract  of: 

Subgroup 

Dolichos  biflorus 

Ulex  europeus 

Ai 
A2 
AiB 
A2B 

+  +  +  + 

0 

+  +  + 

0 

0 

+  +  + 

0 
+  +  + 

^  Boyd  and  Shapleigh,  1954c. 

Lectins  have  been  used  by  Morgan  and  Watkins  (1956)  to  show 
that  the  blood  group  antigen  of  group  AB  individuals  is  not  a 
mixture  of  A  and  B  substances,  but  a  unique  molecule  containing 
both  A  and  B  specificities.  The  anti-N  of  Vicia  graminca  is  actually 
better  than  the  absorbed  anti-N  prepared  from  immune  rabbit  serum 
and  v^ould  doubtless  be  used  routinely  if  more  of  the  tiny  seeds 
of  this  South  American  plant  were  available.  This  lectin  has  already 
proven  valuable  in  clarifying  the  MN  system  in  chimpanzees  (Levine 
et  al.,  1955).  The  anti-N  of  Bauhinia  is  not  quite  as  good,  but  may 
nevertheless  come  into  routine  use  because  the  seeds  are  availalile  in 
many  parts  of  the  world  (Boyd,  Everhart,  and  McMaster,  1958). 

TABLE  5-5 
Inhibition  of  Anti-H  (Ulex)  by  SaHvas  of  Secretors  and  Nonsecretors* 


Re 

action  of  Ule 
Sa 

X  lectin  with 
liva,  diluted 

group  0  cells 

Blood  groups 

1:2 

1:4 

1:8 

1:16 

1:32 

A  (secretor) 
A  (nonsecretor) 
B  (secretor) 
0  (secretor) 
0  (nonsecretor) 

0 

+  +  +  + 
0 
0 

++++ 

0 

+  +  +  + 
0 
0 

++++ 

0 

+  +  +  + 

± 

0 
+  +  +  + 

0 

+  +  +  + 

+ 

0 
+  +  +  + 

0 

+  +  +  + 

+  + 

0 

+  +  +  + 

Boyd  and  Shapleigh,  1954b. 


70  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

Another  example  of  the  practical  use  of  lectins  was  discovered  by 
Levine,  Celano,  Lange,  and  Berliner  (1957).  Using  the  anti-N  of 
Vicia  graminea,  they  observed  that  horse  erythrocytes  contain  the 
N  antigen,  a  fact  that  absorbed  rabbit  sera  had  failed  to  reveal  because 
species-specific  agglutinins  had  remained  in  the  absorbed  sera.  The 
finding  of  N  in  the  erythrocytes  of  the  horse  led  Levine  and  his 
colleagues  to  look  for  natural  anti-M  in  horse  serum.  Having  found 
it,  they  were  led  to  predict  that  the  horse  should  be  a  good  producer 
of  immune  anti-M.  This  prediction  was  verified,  and  thus  a  new  and 
abundant  source  of  immune  anti-M  was  discovered. 

Until  recently  all  plant  agglutinins  tested  fell  into  two  categories : 
either  they  agglutinated  the  red  cells  of  all  human  beings  and  were 
thus  considered  of  little  interest  because  they  were  "nonspecific,"  or 
they  reacted  with  one  of  the  already  known  agglutinogens  of  human 
blood.  (It  is  a  striking  fact  that  in  spite  of  the  thousands  of  species 
of  plants  already  tested,  no  lectin  reacting  specifically  with  any  of 
the  Rh  antigens  has  been  found.  I  shall  suggest  a  possible  explana- 
tion for  this  in  Chapter  7.)  Recently,  Boyd  et  al.  (1959)  found  in 
extracts  of  ordinary  peanuts  (AracJiis  hypogaea)  an  agglutinin  which 
seems  to  be  an  exception  to  this  rule.  It  agglutinates  some  human 
erythrocytes  and  does  not  agglutinate  others.  But  the  agglutinogen 
detected,  if  a  distinct  agglutinogen  is  involved,  seems  to  be  different 
from  A,  B,  H,  M,  N,  P,  S,  s,  C,  D,  E,  c,  e,  V,  Fy^  Fy^  K,  k, 
Le^,  Le",  Lu"*,  Lu*",  Jk",  Jk'',  or  Js.  Unfortunately  the  new  agglutinin  is 
very  weak  and  works  only  with  erythrocytes  suspended  in  serum 
albumin. 

References 

Atwood,  K.   C,  and  S.   L.   Scheinberg,    1958,   /.  Cellular  Comt^.   Physiol.  52, 

Suppl.  1,  97. 
Bird,  G.  W.  G.,  1951,  Current  Sei.  (India)  20,  298. 
Bird,  G.  W.  G.,  1959,  Brit.  Med.  Bull.  15,  165. 
Boyd,  W.  C,  D.  L.  Everhart,  and  M.  H.  McMaster,   1958,  /.   Immunol.  81, 

414. 
Boyd,  W.  C,  D.  M.  Green,  D.  M.  Fujinaga,  J.  S.  Drabik,  and  E.  Waszczenko- 

Zacharczenko,  1959,  ['o.r  Sanguinis  4,  456. 
Boyd,  W.  C,  and  R.  M.  Reguera,  1949,  /.  Immunol.  62,  22,i. 
Boyd,  W.  C,  and  E.  Shapleigh,  1954a,  /.  Immunol.  73,  226. 
Boyd,  W.  C,  and  E.  Shapleigh,  1954b,  Blood  9,  1195. 


PLANT  AGGLUTININS   (LECTINS)   I  71 

Boyd,  W.  C.,  and  E.  Shapleigh,  1954c,  /.  Lab.  Clin.  Med.  44,  235 

Elo,  J.,  E.  Estola,  and  N.  Malmstroni,  1951,  Ann.  Med.  E.rptl.  et  Biol.  Fcnniae 

(Helsinki)  29,  297. 
Grabar,  P.,  1947,  Les  Globulins  du  Scrum  Sanguin,  Editions  Desoer,  Liege. 
Karush,  F.,  1950,  /.  Am.  Chcm.  Soc.  72,  2714. 
Klotz,  I.  M.,  F.  M.  Walker,  and  R.  B.  Pivan,  1946,  /.  Am.   Chem.  Soc.  68, 

1486. 
Krupe,  M.,  1953,  Z.  Hyg.  Injckiionskrankh.  318,  167. 
Kriipe,   M.,    1956,    Blutgruppcnspczifische    Pfldnclichc   Eizi'cis::kdrpcr    (Phytag- 

glufininc),  Ferdinand  Enke  Verlag,  Stuttgart. 
Landsteiner,   K.,   1945,   The  Specificity   of  Serological  Reactions,  2nd   rev.   cd.. 

Harvard  University  Press,  Cambridge. 
Lau.    C,     1901,    tJber    vcgetabilische     Blutagglutinine,     Inaugural-Dissertation, 

Rostock. 
Levine,  P.,  F.  Ottensooser,  M.  J.  Celano,  and  W.  Pollitzer,  1955,  Am.  J.  Phys. 

Arthropol.  13,  29. 
Levine,  P.,  M.  J.   Celano,  S.  Langc,  and  \'.  Berliner.   1957,   I'o.v  Sangitinis  2. 

433. 
Makela,  O.,  1957,  Studies  in  Hemagglutini)is  of  Legumiuosae  Seed.  W'eilin  and 

Goos,  Helsinki. 
Makela,  O.,  and  P.  Makela,  1956,  Ann.  Med.  E.vpfl.  et  Biol.  Peuniae  (Helsinki) 

34,  402. 
Morgan,  W.  T.  J.,  and  W.  M.  Watkins,  1956,  Nature  177,  521. 
Ottensooser,  F.,  and  K.  Silberschmidt,  1953,  Nature  172,  914. 
Renkonen,  K.'O.,  1948,  Ann.  Med.  E.rptl.  et  Biol.  Fcnniae  (Helsinki)  26,  66. 
Schmidt,  G.,  1954,  Z.  Immunitdtsforsch  111,  432. 


CHAPTER  6 
Plant  Agglutinins  (Lectins)  II 


Nature  of  Plant  Agglutinins 

There  is  no  reason  to  suppose  that  the  blood  group-specific  ag- 
glutinins for  which  I  proposed  the  name  lectins  are  essentially  dif- 
ferent from  the  "nonspecific"  agglutinins  which  have  been  known 
so  long.  Ricin,  from  Ricinus  communis,  has  been  studied  more 
thoroughly  than  any  other  of  the  plant  agglutinins.  Although  a  toxin 
as  well  as  a  hemagglutinin,  it  is,  on  the  whole,  a  typical  lectin.  The 
chemistry  and  immunology  of  ricin  were  studied  and  reviewed  fairly 
recently  by  Kabat,  Heidelberger,  and  Bezer  (1947)  and  by  Kriipe 
(1956).  It  is  a  globulin  (i.e.,  soluble  in  salt  solutions  but  not  in  dis- 
tilled water),  with  an  isoelectric  point  of  5.4-5.5  and  a  molecular 
weight  of  about  80,000.  It  can  be  crystallized ;  the  crystalline  protein 
is  highly  toxic  and  strongly  hemagglutinative. 

The  most  complete  immunochemical  study  on  a  specific  lectin 
carried  out  so  far  seems  to  be  that  of  Boyd,  Shapleigh,  and  McMaster 
(1955).  These  authors  found  this  anti-A  lectin  (from  lima  beans)  to 
be  globulin  also.  They  were  not  able  to  obtain  it  in  crystalline  form 
but  studied  concentrated  and  partially  purified  preparations  of  which 
about  36  per  cent  were  specifically  reactive  with  A  antigen.  The 
partially  purified  material  was  electrophoretically  heterogeneous  but 
nearly  homogeneous  in  the  ultracentrifuge.  The  observed  sedimenta- 
tion constant  suggested  a  molecular  weight  of  about  80,000. 

Boyd  and  co-workers  observed  that  the  lectins,  in  addition  to 
their  ability  specifically  to  agglutinate  erythrocytes  of  the  appropriate 
blood  groups,  precipitate  specifically  with  the  purified  antigens  (Boyd 

72 


PLANT  AGGLUTININS   (LECTINS)  II 


72> 


and  Shapleigh,  1954a;  Bird,  1959).  Boyd,  Shapleigh,  and  McMaster 
made  a  quantitative  study  of  the  precipitin  reaction  of  their  partially 
purified  lima  bean  anti-A  and  purified  A  antigenic  substance  from 
hog  stomach.  The  general  course  of  the  precipitin  reaction  was  found 
to  be  very  similar  to  that  of  the  precipitation  of  A  substance  by  hu- 
man anti-A  antibody  (Fig.  6-1). 


5  10        15        20        25       30       35       40       45       50 


Micrograms   A  substance  added 
Fig.  6-1.  Protein   nitrogen    specifically   precipitated    from    anti-A    lima    bean 
lectin  solution    (open   circles)    by  hog   A   substance,   compared   with  nitrogen 
precipitated  from  human  anti-A  serum    (solid  circles). 


A  characteristic  of  the  lectins,  and  one  that  strikingly  differentiates 
them  from  immune  antibodies,  is  their  homogeneity.  I  do  not  mean 
physical  homogeneity,  for  in  most  cases  the  lectins  have  not  been 
purified  sufficiently  for  us  to  know  whether  they  are  electrophoretically 
and  ultracentrifugally  homogeneous.*  I  mean  they  are  homogeneous 
in  their  affinity  for  red  cell  antigens. 


*  By  eluting  proteins  of  different  mobilities  from  paper  electrophoresis  paper, 
Ensgraber,  Kriipe  and  Ensgraber-Hattingen  (1960)  obtained  evidence  sug- 
gesting that  the  agglutinins  of  twelve  species  studied  by  them  were  not 
homogeneous  electrophoretically.  In  two  cases  they  were  able  to  obtain  fractions 
of  the  total  agglutinin  present  that  did  seem  to  be  electrophoretically  (and 
ultracentrifugally)    homogeneous. 


74  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

When  an  immune  serum  or  a  "normal"  isoagglutinin  is  found  to 
agglutinate  more  than  one  type  of  cell,  absorption  with  one  of  these 
types  will  generally  remove  the  antibodies  which  affect  it,  leaving  the 
antibodies  which  react  with  other  types  of  cells.  The  method  of 
preparation  of  a  reagent  for  Ai,  used  before  the  introduction  of 
Dolichos  lectin  for  this  purpose  (see  Table  5-4  in  Chapter  5)  demon- 
strates the  behavior  of  "normal"  isogglutinin.  The  serum  of  an  in- 
dividual of  group  B  agglutinates  erythrocytes  of  both  subgroups  Ai 
and  A^.  Absorption  with  A2,  however,  removes  the  antibody  which 
reacts  with  A2  cells,  leaving  an  anti-Ai  agglutinin.  Absorption  of 
an  antibody  to  hen  ovalbumin  with  duck  ovalbumin  removes  the  duck- 
reactive  antibody,  leaving  the  anti-hen  antibodies  (some  of  which 
will  react  also  with  ovalbumins  of  other  avian  species). 

If  it  is  attempted  to  repeat  such  an  experiment  with  a  plant  ag- 
glutinin instead  of  an  antiserum  from  an  animal,  the  results  are 
generally  different.  Absorption  with  one  type  of  cell  of  a  lectin  that 
agglutinates  two  different  types  of  cells  nearly  always  removes  both 
types  of  antibodies.  If,  for  example,  we  try  to  make  the  lima  bean 

TABLE  6-1 

Effect  of  Absorption  on  Agglutinating  Activity  of  10  Per  Cent  Solution  of  Lima 
Bean  (Sieva)  Proteins'' 


Extract, 

diluted 

Test  cells 

Ub 

1:2 

1:4 

1:8 

1:16 

1:32 

1:64 

1:128 

1:256 

1:512 

1:1024 

Before  absorption 

Ai 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

3 

2 

d= 

B 

4 

4 

3 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

After  3  absorptions 

with  B  cells" 

Ai 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

3 

2 

1 

0 

0 

B 

± 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

*  Boyd  and  Shapleigh,  1954d. 

•^  U  =  undiluted. 

"  After  absorption,  0.05  ml.  of  the  indicated  dilution  of  the  protein  solution  was 
mixed  with  0.05  ml.  of  a  1%  suspension  of  erythrocytes  of  the  indicated  group 
and  the  mixture  centrifuged,  shaken,  and  read  microscopically. 


PLANT  AGGLUTININS   (LECTINS)   II  75 

lectin  more  specific  by  treating  it  with  B  cells  to  remove  the  anti-B, 
we  find  we  can  do  so  only  by  absorbing  an  amount  of  the  protein 
sufficient  to  reduce  the  lectin  concentration  to  such  a  point  that  it 
will  no  longer  agglutinate  1j  cells  (Table  6-1).  This  is  seen  from 
the  fact  that,  while  the  absorption  was  successful  in  lowering  the 
titer  of  the  lectin  against  B  cells  about  two  stages,  it  also  lowered 
the  titer  against  Ai  cells  two  stages  (Boyd  and  Shapleigh,  1954d). 

Another  indication  of  the  homogeneity  of  lectins  is  the  observation 
of  Morgan  and  Watkins  (1953)  :  the  agglutinin  of  SopJiora  japonica 
can  be  absorbed  by  either  Ai  or  B  cells,  but  the  agglutinin,  on  being 
eluted  from  either  type  of  cell,  still  agglutinates  A  and  B  cells  as 
before,  showing  that  no  separation  into  molecules  of  different  speci- 
ficities has  been  effected. 

This  homogeneity  of  the  lectins  possibly  sheds  light  on  what  their 
function  may  be  in  the  plant,  and  also,  because  of  its  contrast  with 
antibodies,  has  a  bearing  on  theories  of  antibody  formation. 

Specificity  of  Plant  Agglutinins 

We  have  already  seen  that  there  are  degrees  of  specificity.  The 
specificity  of  an  antibody  may  be  described  as  lozv  if  it  reacts  with 
a  large  number  of  antigens,  especially  if  they  are  closely  related 
chemically.  Specificity  is  said  to  be  sharp  if  an  antibody  reacts  only 
with  a  small  group  of  chemically  closely  related  antigens.  An  antibody 
may  be  said  to  have  absolute  specificity  if  it  reacts  with  only  one 
antigen. 

When  blood  group-specific  plant  agglutinins  were  first  discovered, 
it  was  natural  to  suppose,  since  their  reaction  with  the  blood  group 
antigens  was  thought  to  be  merely  a  chemical  accident,  that  their 
specificity  was  less  sharp  than  that  of  the  normal  isoagglutinins.  The 
contrary  has  proved  to  be  true,  at  least  in  some  cases. 

The  specificity  of  some  lectins  is  very  sharp.  The  anti-A  of  human 
group  B  plasma,  for  example,  reacts  nearly  as  well  with  Ao  as  with 
Ai  cells.  The  lectin  of  Doliclws  biflorus,  on  the  other  hand,  has  a 
much  greater  affinity  for  Ai  than  for  A2  (over  500  times  as  great), 
so  that  it  is  virtually  specific  for  Ai.  Human  anti-A  reacts  also  with 
the  Forssman  antigen,  the  J  substance  present  in  the  blood  of  some 
cattle,  the  R  antigen  present  in  some  sheep,  and  hog  A  substance. 


76  INTRODUCTION  TO  lAIMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

whereas  the  Dohchos  lectin  is  not  specilic  fur  any  of  these,  hnt 
detects  a  previously  undescrihed  heterogenetic  factor  present  in 
the  erythrocytes  of  sheep,  goat,  horse,  dog,  and  pig    (Bird,   1959). 

The  anti-A  of  lima  beans  is  somewhat  less  specific ;  its  affinity 
for  A2  is  higher,  and,  when  concentrated,  it  weakly  agglutinates 
B  cells  also.  The  anti-H  lectins  are  still  less  specific,  for,  when 
sufficiently  concentrated,  they  may  agglutinate  Ai  and  B  cells.  This, 
however,  might  be  because  human  erythrocytes  of  these  groups  con- 
tain some  H  antigen. 

In  addition  to  these  relatively  specific  lectins,  others  are  known 
which  seem  to  react  with  more  than  one  receptor  on  the  red  cell, 
such  as  A  and  B,  or  B  and  H.  Finally,  we  come  to  those  which 
agglutinate  human  cells  of  all  groups.  Even  these,  however,  may  have 
their  own  specificity,  as  I  shall  mention  later. 

As  we  shall  see  in  the  next  chapter,  human  isoagglutinins  react 
not  only  with  purified  A  and  B  substances  but  also  with  certain  frag- 
ments into  which  these  antigens  can  be  split,  as  by  hydrolysis.  In 
the  case  of  fragments  too  small  to  precipitate,  specific  activity  has  to 
be  demonstrated  by  the  inhibition  technique.  In  view  of  what  we 
know  about  antigenic  determinants,  we  should  expect  a  limit  to  this 
fragmentation  process ;  i.e.,  if  the  A  blood  group  antigen,  for  example, 
is  split  into  portions  that  are  too  small,  the  fragments  will  no  longer 
show  A  specificity  or,  in  other  words,  will  no  longer  inhibit  the  re- 
action of  anti-A  agglutinin  with  A  antigen.  It  was  found  the  smallest 
fragment  of  the  A  antigen  which  specifically  inhibited  the  reaction 
of  human  anti-A  antibody  with  the  A  antigen  is  a  disaccharide  con- 
taining A^-acetylgalactosamine  as  a  terminal  group.  (The  structure 
of  this  disaccharide  will  be  discussed  in  Chapter  7.)  Strikingly 
enough,  anti-A  agglutinins  from  plants  were  inhibited  not  only  by 
this  disaccharide  but  by  A^-acetylgalactosamine  itself  (Morgan  and 
Watkins,  1959).  From  this  observation  we  could  draw  either  of 
two  opposed  conclusions.  We  could  say  that  plant  anti-A  reagents 
are  less  specific  than  human  anti-A,  since  they  are  inhibited  by  a 
simpler  substance,  or  we  could  say  they  are  more  specific,  since 
they  cross-react  less  with  other  portions  of  the  A  antigen. 

In  the  case  of  anti-H  agglutinins  the  plant  reagents  have  not  proven 
to  be  any  less  specific  than  those  of  animal  origin.  The  anti-H  of  eel 
serum  is  inhibited  by  L-fucose,  and  L-fucose  inhibits  the  anti-H  of 


PLANT  AGGLUTININS   (LECTINS)   II 


n 


Lotus  tctragouolobits  and  Ulex  curopeus.  L-Fucose  does  not  inhibit 
the  anti-H  of  Cyfisits  sessilifolius  or  of  Laburnum  alpinum,  but  salicin, 
a  gkicoside  of  D-glucose  and  sahgenin,  does  (Bird,  1959).  If  this 
means  that  the  lectins  of  Cytisus  and  Laburnum  are  directed  toward 
a  part  of  the  H  antigen  different  from  that  recognized  by  the  animal 
anti-H  reagents,  it  might  suggest  that  the  specificity  of  the  lectins 
is  greater,  not  less  than  that  of  the  animal  agglutinins. 

The  anti-H  of  Lotus  tctragonolohus  is  inhibited  also  by  2-deoxy- 
L-fucose,  L-galactose,  6-deoxy-L-talose,  D-arabinose,  and  vV-acetyl- 
glucosamine.  Morgan  and  Watkins  (1953)  pointed  out  that,  except 
for  the  last,  all  the  inhibiting  sugars,  when  written  in  the  pyranose 
form,  have  the  same  configuration  at  carbon  atoms  3  and  4  (Fig.  6-2) . 
In  all  of  them  the  hydroxyl  groups  are  on  the  same  side  of  the  pyran 
ring  and  pointing  down. 

Kriipe  (1956)  noticed  that  the  sugars  which  inhibited  the  anti- 
(A-|-B)   agglutinin  of  Sopliora  japonica   (A^-acetyl-D-galactosamine, 


H.OH 


OH 
6-Deoxy-L-talose 


H.OH 


H.OH 


HO 

^6h 


H.GH 


D-Digitoxose 
Fig.  6-2.  Haworth    formulas    of    sugars    inhibiting    anti-H    of    Lotus    tctra- 
gonolohus. Arrows  point  to  carbons  3  and  4,  which  liave  the  same  configuration 
in  all  these  substances.    (Redrawn  from  Morgan  and  Watkins,   1953). 


78 


INTRODUCTION  TO  IMAIUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 


D-galactose,  lactose,  melibiose,  L-arabinose,  and  D-fucose)  also  all  had 
the  same  configuration  at  carbons  3  and  4.  Here,  too,  the  hydroxyl 
groups  at  carbons  3  and  4  are  at  the  same  side  of  the  ring,  but  are 
pointing  up,  which  is  just  the  opposite  of  that  found  in  the  sugars 
inhibiting  Lotus  (Fig.  6-3). 


CH2OH 


H,OH 


^  W  OH 

D-Galoctose 


CH2OH 


H.OH 
3H  H/' 

^^H  NHCOCH3 

A/-Acefyl-  D-galactosamine 


H,OH 


Fig.  6-3.  Hawortli  formulas  of  sugars  inhibiting  the  anti-(A-|-B)   of  Sophora 
japonica.  (Redrawn  from  Kriipe,  1956). 


Alakela  (1957),  who  made  a  much  more  extensive  study  of  plant 
agglutinins  and  their  inhibition  reactions,  suggested  that  monosac- 
charides fall  into  four  classes  with  respect  to  their  specific  inhibiting 
activity  for  plant  agglutinins  and  that  this  is  based  on  their  configura- 
tion at  carbons  3  and  4  (Fig.  6-4). 


PLANT  AGGLUTININS   (LECTINS)   II  79 

The  assignment  of  the  aldohexoses  and  aldopentoses  to  Makela's 
four  groups  and  the  steric  similarities  of  these  sugars  in  each  classi- 
fication are  shown  in  Fig.  6-5.  The  relation  between  the  pentoses  and 
hexoses  shown  in  books  on  organic  chemistry  is  based  on  possible 
synthetic  pathways  in  the  laboratory  and  does  not  always  show  the 
actual  spatial  relations  of  the  ring  structures. 

Kriipe  observed  that  the  agglutinin  of  Ricinus  communis  was  in- 
hibited by  sugars  which  fall  into  Makela's  group  2,  and  the  agglutinin 
of  Pisum  sativum  by  sugars  of  group  3.  Apparently  these  two  "non- 
specific" agglutinins  do  show  a  certain  degree  of  specificity.  In  his 


2 

-0. 


H0X3 

OH 


HO 


*o 


3 

•0. 


Fig.  6-4.  Clas.sification  of  pyranosc  forms  of  sugars  into  four  groups  on  the 
basis  of  the  configuration  of  carbons  3  and  4  (Makelii,  1957). 

more  extensive  study  Makela  found  many  other  leguminous  seeds 
having  agglutinins  which  fell  into  one  of  these  two  classes.  Other 
legumes  did  not  fall  into  either  class.  In  addition  to  seeds  with  ag- 
glutinins inhibited  by  sugars  of  groups  2  and  3,  Makela's  tables  give 
examples  of  seeds  not  inhibited  by  any  sugars  tested  but  inhibited 
by  blood  group  substances  and  some  seeds  that  are  not  inhibited  by 
any  of  the  substances  tried. 

Among  plants  the  seeds  of  which  contain  agglutinins  inhibited 
by  sugars  of  group  2  are  Bandeiraca  simplicifolia,  various  species  of 
Bauhinia,  Sophora  japonica,  various  species  of  Crotalaria,  various 
species  of  Cytisus,  various  species  of  Caragana,  Wisteria  cJiinensis , 
Coronilla  varia,  various  species  of  Erythrina,  and  Glycine  soja.  In- 
hibited by  sugars  of  group  3  are  Parkia  filicoidea,  Lathyrus  latifolitis. 


80  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

Lens  culinaris,  Pisuiit  sativum,  and  various  species  of  Vicia   (Table 
6-2). 


Fig.  6-5.  Steric  relations  of  aldopentoses  and  aldohexoscs    (Boyd,  1960). 


PLANT  AGGLUTININS   (LECTINS)  II  81 

TABLE  6-2 
Lectins^  Inhibited  by  Sugars  of  Group  2  and  3. 


Group  2  Group  3 

Bandeiraca  simpUcijoUa  Parkia  filicoidca 

Bauhinia  spp.  Lathynis  latifoliiis 

Sophora  japonica  Lens  culinaris 

Crotolaria  spp.  Pisuin  sativiDii 

Cytisus  spp.  Vicia  spp. 

Caragana  spp. 
Wisteria  ehinensis 
Coronilla  varia 
Erythrina  spp. 
Glycine  soja 

*  Extracted  from  plant  seeds  of  the  species  listed. 

It  seems  clear  that  these  plant  agglutinins  are  not  nonspecific,  but 
react  with  a  definite  chemical  structure  in  the  red  cell,  probably  one 
having  as  terminal  group  a  sugar  of  group  2  or  3,  as  the  case  may 
be.  It  happens  that  the  erythrocytes  of  all  human  beings  contain  both 
these  particular  receptors ;  so  therefore  no  individual  differences  are 
found  in  the  reactions  of  these  lectins  with  human  erythrocytes. 
Further  study  with  more  complicated  carbohydrates  will  enable  us 
to  make  a  better  guess  at  the  detailed  structure  of  these  receptors. 
As  to  the  receptors  with  which  other  plant  agglutinins  combine  we 
have  as  yet  no  clue. 

In  a  systematic  study  of  the  inhibition  of  two  "non-specific"  lectins, 
that  of  Ricinus  communis  and  that  of  Bauhinia  purpurea  (dialyzed 
free  of  the  group  2  sugars  making  it  A/'-specific),  Boyd  and 
Waszczenko-Zacharczenko  (1961)  found  considerable  similarities, 
but  some  differences.  Bauhinia  lectin  was  inhibited  by  sugars  of 
Makela's  group  3,  but  Ricinus  was  not.  It  was  concluded  that  the 
receptors  in  the  human  erythrocyte  with  which  these  two  lectins 
combine,  though  similar,  are  not  identical.  Both  lectins  were  inhil)ited 
by  "unnatural"  sugars  of  group  4. 

In  some  cases  the  addition  of  an  inhibiting  sugar  to  a  non-specific 
plant  agglutinin  does  not  suppress  all  activity  but  leaves  the  prepara- 
tion able  to  agglutinate  cells  of  certain  blood  groups,  thus  revealing  a 
new  specificity.  Makela  (1957)  found  that  the  agglutinin  oi  Bandeiraca 


82  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

simplicifolia  became  B-specific  when  tested  against  cells  suspended 
in  2  per  cent  glucose.  A  suitable  concentration  of  galactose  makes  the 
anti-(A+B)  agglutinin  of  Calpiirina  aurea  A-specific  (Bird,  1959). 
Boyd,  Everhart,  and  McMaster  (1958)  found  that  some  preparations 
of  Baiihinia  purpurea  were  nonspecific  (really  specific  for  sugars  be- 
longing to  group  2),  but  could  be  made  N-specific  by  the  addition  of 
D-galactose  or  other  sugars  of  group  2.  Most  nonspecific  plant  ag- 
glutinins, however,  do  not  develop  a  new  specificity  when  treated  with 
inhibiting  sugars  in  this  way.  The  three  lectins  just  mentioned  would 
seem  to  be  exceptional  in  this  respect. 

Role  of  Agglutinins  in  the  Plant 

We  do  not  really  know  the  role  in  the  plant  of  the  proteins  which 
we  recognize  by  their  ability  to  agglutinate  certain  types  of  erythro- 
cytes. In  speculating  about  this  role  we  may  follow  several  lines  of 
thought. 

One  possible  approach,  but  in  my  opinion  a  naive  one,  is  to  as- 
sume that  because  the  lectins  behave  like  antibodies  they  are  real 
antibodies.  There  are  several  arguments  against  this  assumption : 
(a)  Although  the  literature  on  plant  immunity  is  enormous,  it  has 
not  been  demonstrated  that  plants  manufacture  antibodies,  (b)  There 
is  no  evidence  that  the  plants  have  ever  been  exposed  to  the  blood 
antigens  with  which  their  lectins  react.  It  is  extremely  unlikely,  for 
example,  that  Vicia  graminea  has  ever  come  in  contact  with  the  blood 
group  N  antigen,  (c)  Lectins  may  occur  in  some  varieties  of  a 
species  and  be  absent  in  others.  This  difference  persists  even  when 
the  varieties  are  grown  in  identical  environments  ;  experiments  carried 
out  in  Puerto  Rico  have  indicated  that  the  difference  is  hereditary 
(Schertz,  Jurgelsky,  and  Boyd,   1960). 

Another  point  of  view  assumes  that  the  configuration  which  enables 
the  plant  proteins  to  combine  specificially  with  certain  blood  group 
antigens  is  merely  an  accidental  feature  of  their  structure  and  that 
the  proteins  are  present  in  the  seed  merely  as  storage  material,  or 
for  some  similar  purpose. 

A  third  point  of  view,  which  I  favor,  holds  that  it  is  no  accident 
that  the  lectins  are  adapted  to  combine  specifically  with  certain  car- 
bohydrates but  that  their  function  in  the  plant  is  to  combine  with. 


PLANT  AGGLUTININS   (LECTINS)  II  83 

transport,  and  perhaps  immobilize  in  the  seed  one  or  more  of  the 
carbohydrates  with  which  they  have  the  power  to  combine.  Kriipe 
(1956)  first  suggested  the  possible  role  of  the  lectins  as  "Kohlen- 
hydratfixierer"  ("carbohydrate  catchers"),  and  Boyd,  Everhart,  and 
McMaster  (1958)  also  thought  that  lectins  might  so  function  in  the 
plant. 

Lessons  from  the  Stutly  of  Lectins 

The  study  of  plant  agglutinins  promises  to  throw  new  light  on  the 
specificity  of  the  blood  group  antigens  and  on  the  nature  and  number 
of  carbohydrate  groupings  which  are  present  on  the  surface  of  the 
erythrocyte.  I  shall  discuss  this  in  the  following  chapter.  Study  of 
inhibition  reactions  of  the  lectins  has  already  thrown  considerable 
light  on  the  structure  of  the  ABH  antigens.  The  difference  in  specifi- 
city between  lectins  and  human  and  animal  agglutinins,  whether  we 
care  to  regard  this  difference  as  evidence  that  lectins  are  less  specific 
or  more  specific,  makes  lectins  particularly  suitable  for  a  study  by 
the  inhibition  reaction  of  the  cell  receptors.  (See  Chapter  7.) 

The  greater  homogeneity  of  the  lectins  with  regard  to  specificity 
presents  an  interesting  contrast  with  antibodies  and  might  suggest 
that  a  protein  molecule  which  has  a  certain  specificity  as  a  part  of  its 
role  in  metabolism  is  likely  to  be  more  uniform  in  this  respect  than  a 
gamma  globulin  mixture  which  has  acquired  a  certain  specificity  by 
some  process  of  natural  selection.  This  line  of  thinking  may  support 
the  antibody-formation  theory  of  Jerne  and  subsequent  modifications 
thereof. 

References 

Bird,  G.  W.  G.,  1959,  Brit.  Med.  Bull.  15,  165. 

Boyd,  W.  C.,  1960,  /.  Immunol.  84,  231. 

Boyd,  W.  C,  D.  L.Everhart,  and  M.  H.  McMaster,  1958,  /.  Immunol.  81,  414. 

Boyd,  W.  C,  and  E.  Shapleigh,  1954a,  Science  119,  419. 

Boyd,  W.  C.,  E.  Shapleigh,  and  M.  H.  McMaster,  1955,  Arch.  Biochcm.  Biophys. 

55,  226. 
Boyd,  W.  C.,  and  E.  Shapleigh,  1954d,  /.  Immunol.  73,  226. 

r^)Oyd,  W.  C,  and  E.  Waszczenko-Zacharczenko,   1961,    Transfusion,   1,  223. 

ICnsgraber,  A.,  M.  Krupe,  and  R.  Ensgraber-Hattingen,   1960,  Z.  Immunitats- 
forsch.  120,  340. 


84  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

Kabat,  E.  A.,  M.  Heidelbergcr,  and  S.  Hc/at,  1947,  J.  Biul.  Clinii.  168.  629. 
Kriipe,   M.,    1956,   Bhitgruppcnspccifischc   Pfliiiialiclic    Envcisckdrpcr    (Fhytny- 

glutin'me),  Ferdinand  Enke  Vcrlag,  Stuttgart. 
Makela,  O.,  1957,  Studies  in  Hcinagglutinins  oj  Lcginiiiiiosac  Scrcis,  Wcilin  and 

Goos,  Helsinki. 
Morgan,  W.  T.  J.,  and  W.  M.  Watkins,  1953,  Brit.  J.  Exptl.  Pathol.  34,  94. 
Morgan,  W.  T.  J.,  and  W.  M.  Watkins,  1959,  Brit.  Med.  Bull.  15,  109. 
Schertz,  K.  F.,  W.  Jurgelsky,  and  W.  C.  Boyd,  1960,  Proc.  Nat.  Acad.  Sci.  46, 

529. 
Schiff,  F.,  and  L.  Adelsberger,  1924,  Z.  Imiiiunitiitsforsch.  40,  335. 


CHAPTER  7 
Blood  Group  Antigens 


Sources  of  Antigens  for  Study 

The  human  erythrocyte  is  a  compHcated  structure,  the  blood  group 
antigens  apparently  making  up  only  a  small  part  of  its  mass.  It  is 
not  surprising,  therefore,  that  attempts  to  determine  the  structure  of 
the  blood  group  antigens  by  analyzing  material  isolated  from  erythro- 
cytes have  never  given  information  of  much  value.  Not  only  is  the 
starting  material  complex  and  the  desired  antigens  only  a  small  por- 
tion of  it,  but  the  antigens  seem  to  be  bound  in  some  way  to  the 
lipids,  and  possibly  to  the  proteins,  which  are  present  on  the  surface 
of  the  red  cell,  making  purification  extremely  difficult  (Morgan  and 
Watkins,  1959) .  If  it  were  not  for  the  much  more  abundant  occurrence 
of  the  blood  group  substances,  in  water-soluble  form,  in  the  saliva, 
gastric  juice,  ovarian  cyst  fluid,  and  meconium  of  secretors,  and  the 
occurrence  of  closely  related  antigens  in  hog  and  horse  stomach,  little 
would  be  known  today  of  the  chemistry  of  blood  group  substances. 

A  number  of  methods  of  isolating  and  purifying  blood  group  sub- 
stances from  the  sources  just  mentioned  have  been  described.  The 
extraction  with  cold  90  per  cent  phenol,  employed  by  Morgan  and 
King  (1943),  used  more  than  any  other  method,  eliminates  most  of 
the  accompanying  nonspecific  protein  and  other  impurities.  High- 
speed centrifugation  and  further  fractionation  from  water  and  other 
solvents   results   in   further  purification. 

Blood  Group  Substances  A,  B,  H,  and  Le"*. 

As  a  result  of  such  methods,  four  blood  group  substances  have  been 
obtained  in  amounts  sufficient  for  chemical  study :  A,  B,  H,  and  Le*. 

85 


86  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

The  Le^  antigen  (one  of  the  antigens  of  the  Lewis  blood  group  sys- 
tem) has  been  studied  nearly  as  thoroughly  as  the  ABH  antigens  be- 
cause it  also  occurs  in  water-soluble  form  in  body  fluids. 

Analytical  Results 

The  results  of  chemical  analyses  of  the  ABH  and  Le^  blood  group 
antigens  have  been  disappointing :  they  have  not  revealed  any  chemi- 
cal differences  that  can  be  correlated  with  dififerences  in  blood  group 
activity.  At  a  glance,  the  four  antigens  seem  very  much  alike.  They 
each  contain  the  same  two  sugar  components,  L-fucose  and  D-galactose, 
and  the  same  amino  sugar  components,  D-glucosamine  and  D-galac- 
tosamine.  They  also  contain  the  same  eleven  amino  acids  (Kabat, 
1956;  Morgan  and  Watkins,  1959).  The  role  of  the  amino  acids  is 
not  clear,  for  the  specificity  of  the  antigens  seems  to  be  determined 
mainly  by  the  carbohydrate  portions.  Morgan  believes,  however,  that 
the  blood  group  antigens  are  not  merely  a  loose  combination  of  a 
macromolecular  polysaccharide  with  protein  but  consist  of  carbo- 
hydrate chains  and  peptide  units  bound  together  by  primary  chemical 
bonds. 

Typical  analytical  values  for  preparations  of  the  specific  substances 
are  shown  in  Table  7-1.  The  observed  dififerences  are  within  the 
range  of  variation  found  with  different  preparations  of  the  same  anti- 
gen (Morgan  and  Watkins,  1959). 

From  such  data  we  are  forced  to  conclude  that  the  specific  serologi- 
cal dififerences  between  the  A,  B,  and  H  antigens  are  due  not  to 
dififerences  in  over-all  composition  but  to  variations  in  the  arrange- 

TABLE  7-1 

Typical  Analytic  Values  for  Preparations  of  Human  Blood  Group 
Antigenic  Substances" 

Substance      N,  %      Fucose,  %      Acetyl,  %      Hexosaniine,  %      Reduction,  % 


A 

5.4 

19 

9.0 

29 

54 

H 

5.3 

18 

8.6 

28 

50 

Le" 

5.0 

14 

9.9 

32 

56 

B 

5.6 

16 

7.0 

24 

52 

AB 

5.6 

17 

— 

26 

54 

Morgan  and  Watkins,  1959. 


BLOOD  GROUP  ANTIGENS  87 

ment  of  the  component  parts.  In  fact,  recent  evidence  suggests  that 
only  certain  parts  of  the  complex  polysaccharide  molecules  are  re- 
sponsible for  the  specific  serological  properties. 

Of  all  the  sugars  present  in  the  H  blood  group  substance,  for  ex- 
ample, only  L-fucose  (Fig.  7-1)  specifically  inhibited  the  agglutinat- 


Fig.  7-1. 

ing  action  of  an  anti-H  from  eel  serum.  Similar  results  were  obtained 
with  an  anti-H  of  plant  origin,  of  the  seeds  of  Lotus  tetragonolobus. 
It  was  also  found  that  anti-H  from  either  of  these  two  sources  was 
inhibited  more  strongly  by  a-methyl-L-fucopyranoside  than  by  the 
yt?-furanoside  or  by  fucose  alone.  These  results  suggested  that  l- 
fucose  is  an  important  part  of  the  H  substance  molecule ;  by  analogy 
with  Landsteiner's  findings  with  composite  haptens  (p.  40),  L-fucose 
is  probably  the  terminal  group  of  the  specific  part.  The  fact  that  the 
a-methylfucopyranoside  inhibited  better  than  the  /8-methylpyranoside 
suggested  that  the  fucose  was  connected  by  an  alpha  linkage  to  the 
next  residue  of  the  reactive  portion  of  the  H  molecule. 

The  first  information  concerning  the  role  of  a  particular  sugar  in 
the  specificity  of  the  A  substance  was  obtained  by  tests  on  anti-A 
reagents  of  plant  origin  (Morgan  and  Watkins,  1959).  Anti-A  lectins 
were  specifically  inhibited  by  A^-acetylgalactosamine  (Fig.  7-2). 
Most  of  the  human  anti-A  reagents  tested  were  not  inhibited  by  this 
amino  sugar  but  were  inhibited  by  the  disaccharide  0-a-A^-acetyl-D- 


H  NHCOCH3 

A/- Acetyl  -  D-galacfosamine 

Fig.  7-2. 


88  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPFXIFICITY 

galactosylaminoyl-(1^3)-D-galactose  (Fig.  7-Z).  This  suggests  that 
this  disaccharide  must  be  very  similar  to,  or  possibly  identical 
with,  the  terminal  disaccharide  portion  of  the  specific  part  of  the 
human  A  substance.  (Morgan  and  Watkins,  1959). 


'°k^ 

NX 

H^ 

VOH 

jA 

H 

NHCOCH3 

H,OH 


o-cf-ZV- Acetyl-  D-galactosylaminoyI- (I  -^3)  -  D -galactose 
Fig.  7-Z. 

Kabat  and  co-workers  (1956),  also  using  the  inhibition  technique, 
found  evidence  bearing  on  the  structure  of  the  specific  part  of  the  B 
antigen.  Of  the  monosaccharides  present  in  the  molecule,  D-galactose 
was  the  best  inhibitor  of  anti-B  antibodies,  but  the  galactose-containing 
disaccharide  melibiose,  the  trisaccharide  raffinose,  and  the  tetrasac- 
charide  stachyose  (Fig.  7-4)  inhibited  even  better  than  galactose 
alone  (Fig.  7-5).  This  would  have  been  expected  if  the  specific  part 
of  the  B  antigen  consisted  of  a  terminal  nonreducing  galactose  unit 
joined  by  an  alpha  linkage  to  another  sugar  unit.  That  the  linkage 
is  alpha  is  pretty  well  shown  by  the  fact  that  a-methylgalactoside 
inhibits  better  than  galactose,  but  the  /;?-galactoside  inhibits  not  as 
well  (Fig.  7-5). 

Kabat  was  also  able  to  draw  some  conclusions  about  the  sugar 
residue  next  to  galactose  in  the  specific  side  chain  of  the  B  antigen. 
It  could  not  be  glucose,  for  glucose  is  not  a  part  of  the  B  molecule. 
It  was  not  likely  to  be  another  galactose,  for,  if  it  were,  stachyose, 
which  contains  a  terminal  galactose  bound  by  a  l-»6  alpha  linkage  to 
another  galactose,  would  be  a  better  inhibitor  than  melibiose  or 
rafBnose,  where  the  sugar  next  to  galactose  is  glucose.  But  stachyose 
is  no  better  an  inhibitor  than  melibiose  or  raffinose.  According  to 
Kabat,  A'^-acetylglucosamine  is  the  only  remaining  possibility  for  the 
next-to-terminal  sugar  in  the  specific  side  chain  of  B  antigen. 


BLOOD  GROUP  ANTIGENS 


"°kr 

/A 

\ 

H^ 

N°" 

V 

1 

H 

r 

OH 

Sfachyose 
Fig.  7-4. 


I  I  1  II 


Galoctose  Melibiose        Roffinose  Stochyose 

ji-  Methylgalactoside  a-  Methylgolactoside 

Fig.  7-5.  Relative  inhibiting  power  for  anti-B  of  various  sugars  and  glycosides 
(redrawn  from  Kabat,  1956). 


90 


INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 


Some  of  this  information  may  eventually  see  practical  application, 
for  Kabat  suggests  that  the  introduction  of  a  number  of  melibiosyl 
residues  into  a  polysaccharide  would  endow  it  with  substantial  blood 
group  B  activity. 

How  many  other  sugars  are  present  in  the  active  side  chains  of 
the  A  and  B  molecules  is  not  known,  but  on  the  basis  of  his  determi- 
nations of  the  size  of  the  reactive  group  of  dextran  (p.  48)  Kabat 
believes  that  the  total  is  of  the  order  of  six.  This  would  mean  that 
in  the  light  of  our  present  knowledge  the  specific  portions  of  the 
A  and  B  molecules  would  resemble  the  structures  shown  in  Fig. 
7-6,  where  x  stands  for  a  number  of  the  order  of  four. 


H         NHCOCH3  H  OH 

A    Substance 


CHgOH 

/^ 

1"' 

"°A 

^" 

/°i^ 

A 

— 0 
\ 

lSS!i_ 

OH 

HO^ 

^OH 

y 

1~" 

H 

H 

NHC 

OCH3 

B    Substance 

X  =  approx.  4 
Fig.  7-6.  Suggested  structures  of  reactive  groups  of  blood  group   A 
substances. 


and   B 


Additional  and  independent  evidence  for  the  part  played  by 
L-fucose,  A^-acetylgalactosamine,  and  D-galactose  in  H,  A,  and  B 
specificity,  respectively,  was  obtained  by  Watkins  and  Morgan  (1955) 
from  the  results  of  enzyme  inhibition  by  these  sugars.  It  is  known 
that  an  enzyme  can  be  inhibited  by  an  excess  of  one  of  the  products 
of  its  action  on  its  substrate.  An  enzyme  preparation  was  available 
from  Trichomonas  foehts  which  destroyed  the  substrates  consisting 


BLOOD  GROUP  ANTIGENS 


91 


of  A,  B,  and  H  substances.  As  expected,  the  destructive  action  of 
the  enzyme  preparation  on  A  substance  was  inhibited  by  A^-acetyl- 
galactosamine,  the  action  on  B  substance  by  galactose,  and  the  action 
on  H  substance  by  fucose. 

There  is  at  present  no  clue  to  the  identity  of  the  monosaccharide 
unit  next  to  fucose  in  the  specific  part  of  the  H  substance.  Our  best 
picture  of  its  structure  is  shown  in  Fig.  7-7 ,  where  x  stands  for  a 
number  of  the  order  of  five. 


H   Substance 

X  =  approx.  5 
Fig.  1-1 .  Suggested  structure  of  blood  group  H  substance. 

Watkins  and  Morgan  (1957)  found  that  the  destruction  of  the 
serological  activity  of  the  Le"*  antigen  by  the  Trichomonas  enzymes  was 
inhibited  by  L-fucose,  which  suggested  a  role  for  this  sugar  in  the 
specificity  of  the  Le"*  antigen.  However,  the  agglutination  of  Le(a+) 


H 

Q^  ,.  NHCOCH3 

-[i  -  D  -  A/-  AcetylglucosaminoyI  ■ 

'  ^        \r 

H\OH  h/h 

H  OH 

/9-D-GalQCtosyl  - 

Fig.  7-8.  Suggested   structure  of   terminal   portion   of  blood   group   Le^   sub- 
stance (Morgan  and  Watkins,  1959). 


92 


INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 


red  cells  by  human  or  rabbit  anti-Lewis  sera  was  not  detectably  in- 
hibited by  L-fucose  or  by  any  other  components  of  the  blood  group 
substances.  Certain  oligosaccharides  containing  fucose  did  inhibit, 
however,  which  showed  that  a-L-fucopyranosyl  groupings  were  in- 
volved in  Le'  specificity  (Morgan  and  Watkins,  1959).  From  a 
study  of  the  inhibitory  activity  of  various  oligosaccharides,  mostly 
isolated  by  Kuhn  and  his  colleagues  from  human  milk  (Kuhn,  1957), 
Morgan  and  Watkins  suggest  that  the  terminal  portion  of  the  specific 
part  of  the  Le'  substance  is  a  trisaccharide  of  the  structure  shown 
in  Fig.  7-8. 

Action  of  Genes 
The  way  in  which  the  ABO,  secretor,  and  Lewis  genes  cooperate 
to  produce  the  various  blood  group  substances  found  in  the  body 
fluids  of  persons  of  different  genotypes  is  still  to  be  worked  out. 
Watkins  and  Morgan  (1959)  have  proposed  the  following  scheme 
as  a  first  approximation.  Three  independent  gene  systems,  L'  and  V, 
S'  and  s',  and  the  ABO  genes,  are  supposedly  involved.  In  various 


TABLE  7-2 
Possible  Genetic  Pathways  for  the  Production  of  Blood  Group  Substances.   I' 


Sequence  and  products  of 

gene  action 

Secretor  type 

Pre 
suh 

cursor                l'  gene 

Precursor     substance     (not         Nonsecretor  ABH 

stance               (inactive) 

acted  on  by  S',  A,  or  B  genes)          Nonsecretor  Le'' 

L'  gene 

(+  a-fucosyl  units) 

Le= 

sub 

s'  gene 

_^       Le'^  substance  (not  acted  on         Nonsecretor  ABH 

Stance             (inactive) 

by  A  or  B  genes) 

Secretor  Le" 

O  gene 

H  substance  + 

S'  gene 

( +  a-fucosyl  units) 

-^    Unconverted  Le'' 
+  Leb 

(inactive) 

H  substance         Le'' 

B  gene 

B  substance  -(- 

-^    Unconverted  H 

and  Le"  +  Le^ 

•ABH 

secretor 

-|-  Unconverted  Le* 

(+  a-galactosyl  units) 

A  substance  — 

■^    Unconverted  H 
and  Le»  -|-  Le^ 

(+  a-AT-acetyl 
galactosaminoyl  uints) 

Watkins  and  Morgan,  1959. 


BLOOD  GROUP  ANTIGENS 


93 


lAiii.i-;  7-,i 

Possible  (lenetic  I'athways  for  the  Production  of  Blood  Group  Substances.  II" 


Precursor  substan 


+  Inconvertcd  I.( 


B 

,, 

m'"c 

mene 

(inactive) 

i                            ^ 

[                                  ^ 

Asubst. 

1!  subst. 

II  s 

l.c' 

+  11+  I.C- 

+  11  +  u- 

+ 

-e' 

subst. 

+  l,c'' 

+  I.e'' 

+ 

I.e'' 

4' 

4- 

Sccrctor 

AliHsccre 

tor 

ABH  nonsecreto 

T>pe 

Le»  secretf 
Le""  secret 

■■ 

Le'' 

.onsecretor 

•  After  W 

itkins 

and  Morgan 

I9S9. 

recnrsor 

lis 

bstancc 

substance 

A.B.O 

A 

li 

genes 

Rcne 

gene 

I                    i                  ^                  i 

Rir         Asubsl.      Bsubsl. 
+11  +11 


Le""  nonsecrctor 


ways  they  act  to  modify  the  precursor  substance,  a  mucopolysac- 
charide which  is  believed  to  be  identical  with  the  material  found  in 
the  secretions  of  the  individuals  who  secrete  neither  A,  B,  or  H  nor 
Le^  or  Le**  substances.  The  U  gene  acts  to  add  a-fucosyl  units  to 
this  precursor  substance,  and  the  S'  gene  adds  still  more.  The  B 
gene  adds  a-galactosyl  units,  and  the  A  gene  adds  a-galactosaminoyl 
units  (see  Table  7-2). 

The  scheme  of  Table  7-2  is  inadequate  in  some  respects,  and 
Watkins  and  Morgan  suggest  replacing  it  by  the  more  complicated 
system  shown  in  Table  7-3. 


Other  Human  Red  Cell  Receptors 

Bauhinia  Receptor 
In  addition  to  the  red  cell  receptors  characteristic  of  the  various 
blood  groups,  there  are  a  number  of  receptors,  some  common  to  all 


94  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

human  erythrocytes,  about  which  a  certain  amount  of  information 
has  been  gained  by  a  study  of  the  inhibition  of  lectins  by  carbo- 
hydrates. Let  us  first  consider  a  receptor  detected  by  extracts  of 
Bauhinia  purpurea  (Boyd,  Everhart,  and  McMaster,  1958).  As  al- 
ready mentioned,  extracts  of  the  seeds  of  this  plant  can  be  specific  for 
the  N  antigen;  if  they  are  not  N-specific,  they  can  be  made  so  by 
adding  galactose  or  disaccharide  containing  galactose.  The  anti-N 
specificity  of  Bauhinia  extracts  depends  on  the  presence  of  sufficient 
amounts   of   one   or  more    sugars,    probably   galactose    or   galactose 

TABLE  7-4 
Inhibition  of  Dialyzed  Bauhinia  Extract  by  Carbohydrates* 


Cells 

Sugar, 

diluted 

Sugars 

U 

1:2 

1:4 

1:8 

1:16 

1:32 

1:64 

1:128 

1:256 

Melibiose 

M 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

H 

MN 

0 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

4 

4 

N 

0 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

Raffinose 

M 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

y2 

H 

MN 

0 

2 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

4 

N 

2 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

Lactose 

M 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

3 

MN 

0 

0 

0 

0 

1 

3 

3 

3 

N 

0 

0 

0 

2 

4 

4 

4 

4 

M 

0 

0 

0 

0 

1 

3 

3 

3 

L-Arabinose 

MN 

1 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

N 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

4 

4 

4 

D-Galactosamine  HCl 

M 

0 

0 

0 

3 

3 

3 

4 

4 

(neutralized) 

MN 

0 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

4 

4 

N 

0 

3 

3 

3 

3 

4 

4 

4 

D-Galactose 

M 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

3 

3 

MN 

0 

0 

0 

0 

1 

2 

3 

4 

N 

0 

V2 

1 

2 

3 

3 

4 

4 

Stachyose 

M 

0 

0 

0 

1-,^ 

2 

3 

3 

3 

MN 

0 

0 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

N 

0 

0 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

^  Equal  amounts  of  the  carbohydrate  solution,  lectin,  and  cell  suspension  were 
mixed.  The  symbol  U  means  that  the  carbohydrate  solution  (O.IM)  was  used 
undiluted.  The  numbers  signify  strength  of  agglutination,  4  being  the  strongest 
(all  the  erythrocytes  stuck  together  in  one  large  clump).  Negative  reactions  are 
recorded  as  0. 


BLOOD  GROUP  ANTIGENS  95 

derivatives.  Removal  of  these  sugars  by  dialysis  makes  Bauhinia 
purpurea  extracts  nonspecific;  that  is,  they  then  agglutinate  human 
blood  irrespective  of  blood  group.  The  effect  of  certain  sugars  on 
such  nonspecific  Bauhinia  extracts  is  shown  in  Table  7-4. 

It  vv^ill  be  seen  that  the  nonspecific  activity  of  Bauhinia  extracts 
is  inhibited  by  sugars  of  Makela's  group  2.  It  may  even  be  that  the 
red  cell  receptor  detected  by  nonspecific  Bauhinia  extracts  is  the 
same  as  that  detected  by  other  plant  agglutinins  which  are  inhibited 
by  group  2  sugars.  No  adequate  comparison  has  yet  been  made.* 
From  the  inhibiting  power  of  the  disaccharide,  trisaccharide,  and 
tetrasaccharide  containing  galactose,  it  can  be  assumed  that  the 
Bauhinia  receptor  is  an  oligosaccharide  containing  at  least  one  more 
unit  beyond  galactose.  It  probably  contains  several  monosaccharide 
units,  although,  if  it  does,  one  can  conclude  that  the  next-to-terminal 
unit  is  not  galactose,  as  in  stachyose,  for  this  sugar  is  not  a  very  good 
inhibitor  here.  Although  the  Bauhinia  receptor  has  some  features 
in  common  with  the  B  receptor,  it  is  obviously  not  identical  with 
it  since  it  occurs  in  all  human  erythrocytes.  As  a  matter  of  fact, 
B   substance  does  not  react  with  the   Bauhinia  agglutinin. 

Peanut  Receptor 
Another  receptor  has  been  detected  with  the  aid  of  extracts  of 
ordinary  peanuts.  This  plant  agglutinin  is  also  inhibited  by  sugars 
of  group  2  (Table  7-5).  That  galactose  is  the  most  effective  monosac- 
charide inhibitor  suggests  that  galactose  is  the  terminal  group  of 
this  receptor  also.  The  receptor  consists  of  more  than  one  sugar 
unit,  however,  since  two  disaccharides,  trehalose  and  lactose  (the 
former  not  even  containing  galactose),  inhibit  better  than  galactose. 
Two  other  disaccharides  containing  only  glucose  (maltose  and  cel- 
lobiose)  also  inhibit  well.  The  inhibitory  power  of  the  three  all- 
glucose  disaccharides  and  the  fact  that  lactose  contains  glucose  sug- 
gest that  glucose  may  be  the  next-to-terminal  group  in  the  peanut 
receptor.  This  is  supported  by  the  observation  that  glucose  itself 
has  some  inhibiting  power.  The  effectiveness  of  trehalose  suggests 


*  In  my  laboratory  we  have  recently  made  a  detailed  comparison  of  two 
lectins  that  are  inhibited  by  group  2  sugars  (those  from  BauJiiiiia  purpurea 
and  Ricinus  communis) ,  and  obtained  evidence  that  the  two  receptors  are  not 
identical    (Boyd   and   Waszczenko-Zacharczenko,    1961). 


96 


INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 


TABLE  7-5 
Inhibition  of  Peanut  Lectin  (Anti-Gy)  by  Sugars^ 
Sugar,  diluted 


Undil. 

1:2 

1:4 

1:8 

1:16 

1:32 

1:64 

1:128 

Saline 

(control) 

+  + 

+  + 

+  + 

+  + 

+  + 

+  + 

+  + 

+  + 

D-Galactose 

0 

0 

0 

0 

+  + 

+  + 

+  + 

+  + 

L-Arabinose 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

+  + 

+  + 

+  + 

+  + 

D-Arabinose 

+  + 

+  + 

++ 

+  + 

+  + 

+  + 

+  + 

+  + 

D-Glucose 

0 

+ 

+ 

+  + 

+  + 

+  + 

+  + 

+  + 

D-Mannose 

++ 

+  + 

+  + 

+  + 

+  + 

+  + 

+  + 

+  + 

Cellobiose 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

± 

+ 

+  + 

Maltose 

0 

0 

0 

0 

+  + 

+  + 

+  + 

+  + 

Trehalose 

0 

0 

0 

0 

+ 

+ 

+  + 

+  + 

Melibiose 

0 

0 

0 

0 

± 

± 

+  + 

+  + 

Lactose 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

*  +  =  Agglutination  of  test 

cells,  0  = 

=  no  aggl 

utination. 

that  the  peanut  receptor  contains  glucose  as  the  next-to-terminal 
unit,  possibly  linked  to  the  terminal  galactose  by  a  l^-l  link  (the 
linkage  in  trehalose).  The  peanut  agglutinin,  in  spite  of  a  presumed 
galactose  terminal  unit,  is  not  inhibited  by  B  substance  and  in  that 
respect  resembles  the  Bauhinia  agglutinin.  The  two  receptors  are 
different,  however,  since  the  peanut  receptor,  unlike  the  Bauhinia  re- 
ceptor, is  not  found  on  all  human  erythrocytes.  Another  sign  of 
difference  is  that  the  peanut  agglutinin  is  inhibited  by  sugars  (cello- 
biose, trehalose,  melezitose,  and  maltose)  which  do  not  inhibit  the 
Bauhinia  agglutinin. 

There  thus  seem  to  be  at  least  three  receptors  containing  galactose 
as  a  terminal  unit,  one  of  them  present  on  all  human  red  cells,  the 
others  only  on  those  of  certain  individuals.  Their  structure  in  the 
light  of  our  present  scanty  information  is  shown  in  Fig.  7-9. 

It  has  already  been  mentioned  that  plant  agglutinins  inhibited  by 
sugars  of  Maleka's  group  3  react  with  a  red  cell  receptor  present 
on  all  human  red  cells.  It  would  seem  likely  that  the  terminal  unit 
in  this  receptor  is  a  sugar  of  group  3.  Since  Makela  found  mannose 
the  best  inhibitor  for  such  agglutinins,  one  could  hazard  the  guess  that 


BLOOD  GROUP  ANTIGENS 


97 


CHaOh 

OH 

H0\°1. 

H 
B   Substance 

n       . — 

^ 

1 

H 

NHCOCH 

CH20H 


H  OH 

Bauhinia    receptor 


CH2OH 


Peanut    receptor  (Gy) 
Fig.  7-9.  Suggested  structure  of  the  terminal   portions  of  three  receptors  of 
the  human  red  cell  which  contain  galactose  as  a  terminal  monosaccharide  unit 
(Boyd,  1960). 

the  terminal  unit  is  mannose.   We  cannot  go  further  than   this  on 
the  information  now  available. 

The  RH  Receptors 
In  my  laboratory  we  recently  applied  the  specific  inhibition  tech- 
nique to  a  study  of  the  Rh  blood  group  receptors.  Hackel,  Smolker,  and 
Fenske  (1958)  reported  that  anti-Rh  sera  are  inhibited  specifically 
by  a  number  of  ribonucleic  acid  derivatives,  which  suggested  that  the 
Rh  antigens  are  at  least  partly  ribonucleotide  in  nature.  We  found 
that  human  anti-D  serum  is  also  inhibited,  weakly  it  is  true,  but 
apparently  specifically,  by  the  "unnatural"  sugars  of  Makela's  group 
4,  including  L-mannose,  L-glucose,  and  D-gulose  (Table  7-6).  It  is 
not  inhibited  by  the  "natural"  enantiomers  of  these  sugars  or  by 
any  other  sugars  we  have  tried. 


98  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

TABLE  7-6 

Inhibition  of  Anti-D  by  0.2M  Solutions  of  Various  Sugars'* 


Serum, 

diluted 

Substance  added 

Undiluted 

1:2 

1:4 

1:8 

1:16 

1:32 

Saline  (control) 

3 

3.5 

4 

4 

3 

2 

D-Glucose(3) 

4 

3 

3.5 

3.5 

1.5 

1 

L-Glucose  (4) 

3 

2.5 

0 

0 

0 

0 

D-Mannose  (3) 

3.5 

3 

3 

3.5 

2.5 

0 

L-Mannose  (4) 

2.5 

2 

0 

0 

0 

0 

D-Gulose  (4) 

0 

1 

0 

0 

0 

0 

»  Numbers  indicate  strength  of  agglutination,  from  4  =  complete  agglutination, 
to  0  =  no  agglutination.  The  numbers  in  parentheses  after  the  names  of  sugars 
indicate  the  group  of  the  sugar  in  Makela's  (1957)  classification  (see  Figs.  6-4 
and  6-5). 

The  results  suggest  that  the  D  receptor  may  contain  a  sugar  of 
group  4  as  terminal  unit.  They  are  supported  by  the  observation 
that  streptomycin,  a  natural  glycoside  of  A''-methyl-L-glucosamine, 
and  rutinose  [6-0-(/3-L-rhamnosyl)-D-glucose]  also  inhibit  (Table 
7-7).  Streptomycin  does  not  inhibit  much  better  than  L-mannose  or 

TABLE  7-7 
Inhibition  of  Anti-D  by  Glycosides 


Serum, 

diluted 

Substance 

Undil. 

1:2 

1:4 

1:8 

1:16 

1:32 

Saline 

Rutinose  (4) 
Streptomycin 

(4) 

4 
4 
0 

4 
0 
0 

4 
0 
0 

3 
0 
0 

2 
0 
0 

0 
0 
0 

L-glucose.  This  is  not  surprising  considering  that  the  next-to-terminal 
unit  is  5-deoxy-3-formyl-L-lyxose,  which  one  would  not  expect  to 
find  in  red  cells  (Fig.  7-10),  though  such  preconceived  notions  may 
be  dangerous.  Rutinose,  however,  on  a  molar  basis  (the  solution 
available  was  only  0.14  as  strong  as  the  other  sugar  solutions  studied), 
inhibits  better  than  streptomycin  or  L-mannose,  which  might  suggest 


BLOOD  GROUP  ANTIGENS 


99 


0    (Streptose) 


(Streptidine) 


OH  H 

(A/-  methyl  -t-glucosomine) 

Streptomycin 
Fig.  7-10. 

that  the  next-to-terminal  unit  in  the  D  receptor  is  D-glucose  or  a 
similar  sugar.  The  likelihood  that  the  terminal  unit  of  rutinose, 
L-rhamnose  (Fig.  7-11),  is  the  terminal  unit  of  the  D  receptor 
is  diminished  by  the  observation  that  rhamnose  itself  does  not  inhibit. 


H,OH 


It  is  hardly  necessary  to  mention  that  a  knowledge  of  the  chemical 
structure  of  the  D  antigen  could  have  considerable  practical  value. 
It  might  enable  us  to  make  good  anti-D  agglutinins  by  immunizing 
animals,  which  is  now  impossible.  Injections  of  a  nontoxic  oligosac- 
charide with  high  D  activity  into  pregnant  women  might  possibly 
neutralize  the  anti-D  of  the  maternal  and  fetal  circulations  and  pre- 
vent erythroblastosis  in  the  infant. 

The  inhibition  behavior  of  anti-C  and  anti-E  seems  to  be  more 
complicated    (Table  7-8).  L-Glucose  has   some   inhibitory  effect   on 


100 


INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 


TABLE  7-8 
Inhibition  of  Anti-Rh  Sera  bv  D-  and  L-Glucose 


Sugar 

Serum, 

diluted 

Serum 

Undil. 

1:2 

1:4 

1:8 

1:16 

1:32 

Anti-D 

Saline 

3 

3.5 

4 

4 

j5 

2 

D-Glucose 

4 

3 

3.5 

3.5 

1.5 

1 

L-Glucose 

2.5 

2.5 

0 

0 

0 

0 

Anti-C 

Saline 

3 

3.5 

3.5 

3 

2 

1.5 

D-Glucose 

3 

3.5 

3 

3 

2 

1.5 

L-Glucose 

3 

3 

0 

0 

0 

0 

Anti-E 

Saline 

4 

4 

4 

3 

1.5 

0 

D-Glucose 

3.5 

0.5 

0 

0 

0 

0 

L-Glucose 

3 

1.5 

0 

0 

0 

0 

both  agglutinins,  but  anti-E  is  also  inhibited  by  D-glucose.  Other 
sugars  of  group  4  do  not  seem  to  inhibit  anti-C ;  therefore  I  have  no 
confidence  yet  that  the  terminal  unit  is  a  stigar  of  this  group  (Table 
7-9).  It  seems  possible  that  a  sugar  of  group  3  is  the  terminal  unit 

TABLE  7-9 
Inhibition  of  Anti-C 


Substance 


Undil. 


Serum,  diluted 


1:2 


1:4 


1:16 


1:32 


Saline 

D-Glucose  (3) 
L-GIucose  (4) 
D- 1  dose  (4) 
Rutinose  (4) 
Streptomycin  (4) 


4 

3.5 
0 
4 
3.5 

2.5 


3 

3 

0 

3.5 

0 

2.5 


of  the  E  receptor,  considering  the  effectiveness  of  sugars  of  this  group 
in  inhibiting  anti-E  (Table  7-10).  The  inhibition  by  L-allose,  a 
group  2  sugar,  is  unexpected  and  is  not  paralleled  by  inhibition  by 
other  group  sugars. 

If  it  should  prove  that  the  D  receptor,  and  possibly  the  C  and  E 


BLOOD  GROUP  ANTIGENS  101 


TABU 

<:  7-10 

Inhibition 

of  Anti- 

E 

Serum, 

diluted 

Substance 

Undil. 

1:2 

1:4 

1:8 

1:16 

1:32 

Saline 

3 

3.5 

3 

1.5 

2 

0 

D-Mannose  (3) 

0 

0 

2 

0 

0 

0 

D-Gliicose  (3) 

0.5 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

L-Mannose  (4) 

2 

dtz 

0.5 

0 

0 

0 

L-Glucose  (4) 

3 

1.5 

0 

0 

0 

0 

D-Gulose  (4) 

2 

3 

1.5 

0 

0 

0 

Rutinose  (4) 

4 

4 

2 

0 

0 

0 

Streptomycin  (4) 

3.5 

3.5 

1.5 

1.5 

0 

0 

L-AUose  (2) 

0 

± 

0 

0 

0 

0 

D-Galactose  (2) 

3.5 

4 

4 

3.5 

2 

0 

L-Arabinose  (2) 

3 

4 

4 

3.5 

3.5 

0 

receptors  as  well,  contains  a  sugar  of  group  4,  it  may  surprise  some 
people,  for  sugars  of  this  group  have  not  previously  been  found  in 
human  tissues.  We  may  still  expect  many  surprises  regarding  the 
natural  occurrence  of  sugars.  In  the  field  of  protein  chemistry  it  is 
commonly  assumed  that  only  one  enantiomer  of  each  amino  acid  occurs 
in  nature,  and  yet  Oncley  (1959)  has  pointed  out  reasons  for  doubting 
this.  The  finding  of  a  derivative  of  L-glucose  in  streptomycin  has 
already  shown  that  some  of  these  "unnatural"  sugars  occur  in  nature. 
In  the  next  chapter  it  will  be  seen  that  such  sugars  play  a  role  in 
the  antigens  of  Salmonella  and  certain  parasites. 

Since  the  above  was  written,  Dodd,  Bigley,  and  Geyer  (1960), 
starting  from  the  observation  that  the  receptor-destroying  mumps 
virus  liberates  from  human  erythrocytes  a  specific  anti-D  inhibitor, 
found  that  A^-acetyl-neuraminic  acid  and  other  compounds  related 
to  sialic  acid  inhibited  anti-D  but  not  anti-C  or  anti-E,  thus  pro- 
viding a  cltie  to  the  chemical  differences  between  D  and  the  other 
Rh  antigens.  In  my  laboratory  we  found  that  colominic  acid,  thought 
to  be  a  polymer  of  A^-acetyl  neuraminic  acid,  also  inhibits  anti-D 
specifically,  and  suggested  it  might  even  have  clinical  application 
in  preventing  erythroblastosis  fetalis    (Boyd   and  Reeves,    1961). 

We  have  also  found  other  substances,  including  some  amino  acids, 
not  closely  related  to  any  of  the  substances  discussed  above,  to  have 


102  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

considerable  inhibitory  power.  None  of  these  compounds  inhibited 
anti-A,  anti-B,  anti-H,  anti-M,  or  anti-N.  It  is  clearly  premature 
to  present  any  detailed  picture  of  the  structure  of  any  of  the  Rh 
antigens,  but  if  progress  continues  at  the  present  rate  something 
should  be  known  in  a  few  years  at  the  latest. 

References 

Boyd,  W.  C,  1960,  /.  Immunol,  85,  221. 

Boyd,  W.  C,  D.  L.  Everhart,  and  M.  H.  McMaster,  1958,  /.  Immunol.  81,  414. 

Boyd,  W.  C,  and  E.  Reeves,  1961,  Nature  190,  1123. 

Boyd,  W.   C,   and   E.  Waszczenko-Zacharczenko,   1961,    Transfusion,  1,   223. 

Dodd,  M.  C.  N.  J.  Bigley,  and  V.  B.  Geyer,  1960,  Science  132,  1398. 

Hackel,  E.,  R.  E.  Smolker,  and  S.  A.  Fenske,  1958,  Vox  Sanguinis  3,  402. 

Kabat,  E.  A.,  1956,  Blood  Group  Substances,  Academic  Press,  New  York. 

Kuhn,  R.,  1957,  Angew.  Chem.  60,  23. 

Morgan,  W.  T.  J.,  and  H.  K.  King,  1943,  Biochem.  /.,  37,  640. 

Morgan,  W.  T.  J.,  and  W.  M.  Watkins,  1959,  Brit.  Med.  Bull.  15,  109. 

Oncley,  J.  L.,  1959,  Rev.  Mod.  Physics  31,  30. 

Watkins,  W.  M.,  and  W.  T.  J.  Morgan,  1955,  Nature  175,  676. 

Watkins,  W.  M.,  and  W.  T.  J.  Morgan,  1957,  Nature  180,  1038. 

Watkins,  W.  M.,  and  W.  T.  J.  Morgan,  1959,  Vox  Sanguinis  4,  97. 


CHAPTER  8 
Salmonella  Antigens 


Progress  in  bacteriology  was  greatly  aided  by  the  development  ot 
methods  of  staining  microorganisms  to  facilitate  their  microscopic 
observation.  The  staining  methods  were  developed  empirically.  Al- 
though their  mechanism  is  still  obscure,  two  of  them  are  now  known 
to  detect  fundamental  and  significant  differences  in  the  cellular 
structure  of  bacteria.  These  two  reactions  are  the  Gram  stain  and 
the  acid-fast  stain.  On  the  basis  of  their  behavior  toward  the  reagents 
used  in  the  two  reactions,  all  bacterial  species  may  be  classified  into 
three  broad  groups :  Gram-positive,  Gram-negative,  and  acid-fast. 
There  also  exist  intermediate  forms  with  poorly  defined  staining 
reactions   (Dubos,   1952). 

Endotoxins 

Gram-negative  bacteria  are  characterized  by  the  fact  that,  when 
they  are  dyed  with  a  basic  triphenylmethane  dye  such  as  gentian 
violet,  the  color  can  be  removed  by  washing  with  alcohol.  Gram- 
negative  bacteria  have  a  number  of  other  features  in  common.  One 
of  the  most  interesting  of  these  features  to  the  immunologist  is  their 
content  of  endotoxins.  These  characteristic  substances,  not  released 
to  any  great  extent  into  the  culture  medium  as  the  organism  grows 
(in  contrast  to  exotoxins  such  as  diphtheria  toxin),  can  be  obtained 
by  lysing  the  bacteria  or  by  extracting  them  with  trichloracetic  acid, 
diethylene  glycol,  etc.  They  are  toxic  in  animals  in  very  small  amounts 
(of  the  order  of  0.001  microgram  per  kilogram  of  body  weight),  pro- 
ducing fever,  leukopenia,  etc. 

103 


104 


INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 


The  first  important  step  in  the  study  of  endotoxins  was  the  de- 
velopment by  Boivin  (Boivin  and  Mesrobeanii,  1933)  of  a  method 
of  extracting  them  with  trichloracetic  acid.  Boivin  reported  that  the 
endotoxins  of  a  number  of  gram-negative  bacteria  consisted  mainly 
of  polysaccharide  and  lipid. 

Modern  knowledge  of  the  chemistry  of  endotoxins  derives  mainly 
from  the  work  of  Morgan  (1937,  1940,  1941,  1942)  and  Goebel 
(1945),  who  showed  that  endotoxins  are  complexes  containing  phos- 
phorylated  polysaccharide  and  protein.  Further  work  by  these  and 
other  workers  on  the  degradation  products  of  the  endotoxins  revealed 
that  they  have  the  make-up  shown  in  Table  8-1  (Westphal  and 
Liideritz,  1954). 

TABLE  8-1 
The  Endotoxin  Complex  of  the  Cell  Wall  of  Grain-Xegative  Bacteria'' 


Lipopolysaccharide-Protein-Lipid-Coniplex 


Lipopolysaccharide 
(iindegraded  poly 
saccharide) 


Phosphorylated 
polysaccharide 


Conjugated  protein 


Lipid  A 


Lipid  B 

(easily  split  off) 


Protein 


»  Westphal  and  Liideritz,  1954. 


It  appears  that  the  lipid  A  component  is  responsible  for  many  of 
the  toxic  effects  of  these  complex  substances  ( Schmidt,  Eichenberger, 
and  Westphal,  1958;  Westphal,  1960).  All  the  preparations  of  this 
component  examined  from  various  enterobacteria  seem  to  be  similar 
or  perhaps  identical  (Westphal,  1960),  containing  about  20  per  cent 
D-glucosamine,  7-8  per  cent  phosphoric  ester,  50  per  cent  long-chain 
fatty  acid  (including  hydroxy-fatty  acids),  and  a  peptide  side  chain 
containing  serine  and  dicarboxy  amino  acids. 


SALMONELLA  ANTIGENS  105 

Although  the  Hpid  A  component  of  the  endotoxins  of  the  gram- 
negative  bacteria  is  essential  for  many  of  the  endotoxic  manifesta- 
tions and  can  act  as  a  potent  adjuvant  in  the  production  of  antibodies 
(Westphal,  1960),  the  portion  which  determines  the  specificity  of 
protective  antibodies  is  the  polysaccharide  component.  Such  anti- 
polysaccharide  antibodies  do  not  protect  the  organism  producing  them 
against  the  pyrogenic  effects  of  endotoxin  if  it  is  experimentally  in- 
jected, but  they  do  account  for  the  species-specific  immunity  which 
generally  follows  recovery  from  an  infection  with  one  of  the  micro- 
organisms. Consequently  it  is  the  anti-polysaccharide  antibodies 
which  are  of  greatest  interest  to  immunologists.  Considerable  progress 
has  recently  been  made  in  the  study  of  the  chemical  basis  for  the 
immunological  differences  which  are  observed,  especially  in  the  group 
of  gram-negative  bacteria  known  as  the  Salmonella.  Before  we  can 
discuss  them  we  must  pause  to  recall  a  few  salient  facts  about  this 
important  group  of  microorganisms. 

The  Salmonella 

The  Salmonella  are  Gram-negative,  non-spore-forming,  motile 
bacteria  which  are  generally  pathogenic  for  both  man  and  animal. 
S.  typJwsa,  causative  agent  of  typhoid  fever,  .S".  paratyphi  A,  and 
possibly  ^.  sendai,  cause  disease  only  in  man. 

The  Salmonella  are  mostly  flagellated.  The  flagella  as  well  as  the 
body  of  the  organism  contain  antigens.  The  flagellar  antigens  are 
called  H  antigens,  the  somatic  antigens  O  antigens.  The  letters  origi- 
nated with  German  writers  who  observed  that  colonies  of  the  motile 
(i.e.,  flagellated)  Salmonella  on  agar  medium  were  surrounded  by  a 
"Hauch"  (breath  or  emanation),  while  colonies  of  the  nonmotile 
organisms  were  "Ohne  Hauch"   (without  emanation). 

The  H  antigens  are  of  two  kinds :  those  shared  by  a  number  of 
species  or  types,  and  those  peculiar  to  a  particular  species  or  type, 
or  shared  by  only  a  few  species  or  types.  Many  of  the  species  or 
types  are  diphasic ;  that  is,  at  one  stage  of  a  culture  the  specific 
flagellar  antigens  may  occur  (specific  phase),  whereas  at  another 
the  group  antigens  may  be  present  (group  phase).  Any  given  cul- 
ture of  such  an  organism  may  consist  entirely  of  one  or  the  other  of 
the  phases  or  may  contain  both.  A  bacillus  in  one  phase  usually  keeps 


106  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

the  same  phase  for  a  number  of  generations,  but  is  always  capable 
of  giving  rise  to  the  other  phase.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  the  antigens  of 
either  phase  may  occur  in  various  types,  although  the  specific  antigens 
are  generally  restricted  to  a  smaller  number  of  types  (Dubos,  1945). 
These  complicated  antigenic  properties  of  the  Salmonella  can  be  a 
source  of  confusion  unless  they  are  understood. 

TABLE  8-2 
Somatic  and  Flagellar  Antigens  in  Certain  Common  Salmonella* 


H  Ant 

igens 

Phase  I 

Phase  2 

Group 

Species 

0  Antigens'' 

(specific) 

(group) 

A 

S.  paratyphosa 

(I),  II,  XII 

a 



B 

S.  schottmuelleri 

(I),  IV,  (V), 

XII 

b 

1,2 

S.  typhim.uriinn 

(I),  IV,  (V), 

XII 

i 

1,2 

Ci 

S.  hirschfeldii 

VI,  VII, 

c 

1,5 

S.  choleraesuis 

VI,  VII 

c 

1,5 

S.  oranienburg 

VI,  VII 

m,t 

— 

S.  niontevideo 

VI,  VII 

g,m,s 

— 

Co 

S.  newport 

VI,  VIII 

e,h 

1,2 

D 

S.  typhosa 

IX,  XII, 

d 

— 

S.  enteritidis 

(I),  IX,  XII 

g,m 

— 

S.  gallinarum 

I,  IX,  XII 

— 

— 

S.  pullorum 

I,  IX,  XII 

— 

— 

E 

S.  anatum 

III,  X 

e,h 

1,6 

*  Modified  from  a  table  in  Bacterial  and  Mycotic  Infections  of  Man,  edited  by 
R.  J.  Dubos,  1952.  Courtesy  of  Dr.  Dubos,  Dr.  H.  R.  Morgan,  J.  B.  Lippincott 
Co.,  and  the  National  Foundation  for  Infantile  Paralysis. 

•^  Parentheses  indicate  that  the  antigen  is  not  invariably  present. 

It  was  formerly  the  practice  to  designate  the  somatic  (O)  antigens 
by  Roman  numerals,  as  shown  in  Table  8-2,  but  following  a  decision 
made  in  1953  at  the  Sixth  International  Congress  of  Bacteriology  in 
Rome,  the  workers  who  have  recently  contributed  so  much  to  our 
knowledge  of  the  chemical  structure  of  these  antigens,  employ 
Arabic  numerals.  I  shall  follow  this  usage.  It  was  former  practice 
to  denote  the  species  flagellar  antigens  by  small  Roman  letters,  and 
the  group  flagellar  antigens  by  Arabic  numerals.  Thus  Salmonella 
nczvport  possesses  O  antigens  VI  and  VIII,  species  H  antigens  e  and 


SALMONELLA  ANTIGENS  107 

h,  and  group  H  antigens  1  and  2.  From  here  on,  however,  we  shall 
be  speaking  of  5".  ncivport  as  possessing  O  antigens  6  and  8.  The 
flagellar  antigens  will  not  come  into  the  picture,  because  I  do  not 
intend  to  discuss  them  further. 

The  antigenic  structure  of  the  Salmonella  has  been  studied  in 
great  detail  by  Kauffman  (1937)  and  White  (1926)  ;  the  classifica- 
tion of  these  authors,  based  on  the  somatic  and  flagellar  antigens, 
is  in  common  use.  In  general,  the  species  of  Salmonella  are  divided 
into  groups  on  the  basis  of  similarity  with  respect  to  the  O  antigens, 
and  the  species  within  a  group  are  often  differentiated  according  to 
differences  between  their  H  antigens  (Kauffmann,  1950,  1951).  The 
species  have  been  arranged  in  groups  designated  A,  B,  C,  etc.,  ac- 
cording to  similarities  in  the  content  of  O  antigens.  All  this,  it  should 
be  remembered,  was  done  purely  on  the  basis  of  serological  evidence. 

Chemistry  of  the  Polysaccharide  Component 
of  Salmonella  Antigens 

On  hydrolysis,  the  Salmonella  polysaccharides  split  into  monosac- 
charides and  phosphoric  acid.  Chromatographic  study  of  the  sugars 
shows  that  they  represent  a  fairly  complicated  mixture ;  a  single 
polysaccharide  may  consist  of  six  to  seven  different  sugars,  in- 
cluding hexosamines  (glucosamine  and  galactosamine),  heptoses, 
hexoses,  pentoses,  and  deoxy  sugars  (Davies,  1955;  Mikulaszek 
et  al.,  1956;  Davies,  1960).  The  dideoxy  sugars  move  faster  on 
chromatograms  than  the  other  sugars  do,  and  their  discovery,  based 
on  this  property,  by  Staub  (1952)  and  Westphal  (1952)  was  a  new 
fact  of  great  immunochemical  interest.  They  play  a  very  important 
role  in  the  structure  of  the  Salmonella  antigens  because : 

(a)  Brief  acid  hydrolysis  of  the  Salmonella  lipoidpolysaccharides 
always  splits  off  these  dideoxy  sugars  before  significant  amounts  of 
other  sugars  are  released.  This  shows  that  the  deoxy  sugars  are 
terminal  and  acid  labile  in  the  branched  polysaccharide  structure. 
It  is  known  (see  above,  pp.  39-40)  that  the  terminal  groups  play 
a  predominant  role  in  hapten  specificity. 

(b)  When  pathogenic  "smooth"  Salmonella  forms  change  to  the 
nonpathogenic  "rough"  forms,  the  fast  chromatographic  sugar  com- 
ponents in  hydrolysates  of  the  antigens  are  missing,  although  the 
endotoxic  lipoid  A  component  is  still  present. 


108 


INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 


These  dideoxy  sugars  are  all  3,6-dideoxyhex()se.s,  and  five  have  so 
far  been   identified  in  natural  antigens    (Table  8-3). 

TABLE  8-3 
Naturally  Occurring  3,6-Dideoxyhexoses^ 


Name 

First  found  in 

References 

Abequose 

Endotoxin  of  S.  abortus  eqiii 

Westphal,  Liideritz,  Fromme, 
and  Joseph    (1953). 

Tyvelose 

Endotoxin  of  S.  typhosa 

Pon  and  Staub  (1952),  West- 
phal, Fromme,  and  Joseph 
(1953). 

Ascarylose 

Glycolipid  of  eggs  of  Para- 

Fouquey,  Polonsky,  and  Lederer 

scans  cquorum 

(1957). 

Paratose 

Endotoxin  of  S.  paratyphi 

Davies,  Fromme,  Liideritz, 
Staub,  and  Westphal    (1958). 

Colitose 

Endotoxin      of      Eschenchia 

Liideritz,     Staub,     Stirm,     and 

coli    0    111 

Westphal    (1958). 

=*  Westphal, 

1960. 

The  structures  of  these  dideoxyhexoses  are  shown  in  Fig.  8-1. 
It  will  be  noted  that  two  of  them,  colitose  and  ascarylose,  have  the 
configuration  of  the  "unnatural"  L-series  of  hexoses,  which  are  sus- 
pected of  playing  a  role  in  the  structure  of  the  human  Rh  antigens 
(see  Chapter  7).  This  does  not  necessarily  mean  that  any  serological 
similarities  between  the  Salmonella  antigens  and  the  Rh  blood  group 
antigens  are  to  be  expected,  although  this  is  a  point  which  so  far  as 
I  know  has  not  been  tested.  But  it  does  tend  to  confirm  our  suspicion 
that  the  "unnatural"  sugars  are  more  widely  distributed  in  nature 
than  was  expected.  What  their  relative  abundance  will  turn  out  to 
be  is  another  question. 


Relation  of  Structure  of  Salmonella 
Antigens  to  Specificity 

Comparison  of  the  results  of  chromatographic  analyses  of  Sal- 
monella antigens  with  their  position  in  the  Kaufifmann-White  classi- 
fication (Staub,  Tinelli.  Liideritz,  and  Westphal,  1959;  Staub,  I960: 
Westphal,    Liideritz,    Staub,    and    Tinelli,    1959)    showed    that    the 


SALMONELLA  ANTIGENS 


109 


H 

An, 

\ 

my 

)iH,OH 

1 

H 

H 

Colitose 

(3,6-D 

'ideoxy- 

-L-galoctose) 

CHj 

S— 

-V 

)JH,OH 

1 

H 

— r 

OH 

Porafose 

(3,6-  Dideoxy 

-D-g 

lucose) 

CH, 

H0> 

H 

HO/ 

JH.OH 

H 

H 

Tyve 

lose 

(3,6-  Dideoxy- 

•D-  monnose) 

Abequose 
(  3,6- Dideoxy- D- galactose) 


H,OH 


Ascorylose 
(3,6- Dideoxy- L-  mannose) 


Fig.  8-L  Five  naturally  occurring  3,6-dideoxyhexoses. 


terminal  dideoxy  sugars  did  play  an  important  antigenic  role,  as  ex- 
pected. Each  Salmonella  species  produces  only  one  such  sugar,  and 
this  sugar  is  characteristic  of  the  group.  A,  B,  etc.,  into  which  the 
species  falls  in  the  Kaufifmann- White  scheme.  Paratose  is  characteris- 
tic of  species  in  group  A,  for  example,  and  colitose  of  group  O  (Table 
8-4). 

It  has  been  further  shown  (Staub,  Tinelli,  Liideritz,  and  Westphal, 
1959)  that  different  dideoxyhexoses  function  as  terminal  groups 
of  various  antigenic  factors  of  the  Kauffmann- White  scheme,  abequose 
being  the  terminal  unit  of  antigen  4  of  group  B,  tyvelose  of  antigen  9 
of  group  D,  and  colitose  of  antigen  35  of  group  O. 

There  seems  to  be  no  evidence  that  more  than  one  of  these  3,6- 
dideoxyhexoses  occurs  in  the  endotoxin  of  any  one  species  of 
Salmonella.  When  a  3,6-dideoxyhexose  does  occur  it  always  occupies 
the  terminal  position  in  a  side  chain  of  the  antigenic  determinant  of 


110 


INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 


TABLE  8-4 

Carbohydrate  Structural  LInits  of  Specific  O  Antigens  (Endotoxins)  of  Salmonella 

Groups  A,  B,  D,  and  O'^ 

(Heptoses  and  aminosugars  not  inchided) 


6-Deoxy- 

3,6-Dideoxy- 

Kauffmann- 

Hexoses 

1    .   i 

hexoses 

o 

he 

xoses 

i 

o 

8 

White 

CJ            '~            " 

G 

^ 

1) 

2 

I 

Group  species 

antigens 

O 

O 

1 

C2J 

< 

£ 

H 

A  5.  paratyphi 

1,2,12 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

B  S.  schoUmuellen 

1,4,5,12 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

B  5.  typhimurium 

1,4,5,12 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

B  S.  abortus  equi 

4,12 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

B  S.  budapest 

1,4,12 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

B  S.  Stanley 

4,5,12 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

B  S.  salinatus 

4,12 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

D  5.  typhosa 

9,12 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

D  5.  enteriditis 

1,9,12 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

D  5.  gallinarum 

1,9,12 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

D  S.  dar-es-salaam 

1,9,12 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0  S.  adelaide 

35 

+ 

+ 

+ 

0  6'.  monschaui 

35 

+ 

+ 

+ 

"  Westphal,  1960. 

the  carbohydrate  antigen.  This  does  not  mean  that  other  sugars  can- 
not be  terminal,  for  glucose  and  rhamnose  can  occur  in  this  position. 

As  would  have  been  expected  on  the  basis  of  what  we  have  learned 
in  earlier  chapters  of  this  book,  the  most  informative  way  of  studying 
the  terminal  sugar  of  these  antigens  was  found  to  be  by  the  inhibition 
reaction.  Staub,  Westphal,  and  colleagues  (Staub  and  Tinelli,  1957; 
Staub  et  al.,  1959)  took  advantage  of  the  fact  that  degree  of  in- 
hibition can  be  measured  quantitatively  if  the  reaction  inhibited  is 
the  precipitation  of  a  soluble  antigen  by  a  precipitating  antibody, 
see  above,  p.  20 ;  they  made  use  of  soluble  antigens  obtained  by 
acetic  acid  lysis  of  the  microorganisms  and  purification  by  Freeman's 
method  (1942)  of  the  product  (Table  8-5). 

In  this  table  PsTy  stands  for  the  polysaccharide  extracted  from 
5".  typhosa,  PsTyB  for  the  polysaccharide  from  S.  schottmuelleri 
(formerly    paratyphoid    B),    and    PsTyox   for   the   carbohydrate    of 


SALMONELLA  ANTIGENS 


111 


TABLE  8-5 

Specific  Inhibition  of  Precipitation  of  Salmonella  Antigens  by 
Anti-5.  typhosa  Antiserum* 


Horse 

anti-typhoid  i 

;erum 

Rabbit  anti-typhoid 

serum 

Inhibitor 

reacted  with 

reacted  w 

ith 

PsTyb 

PsTyo.« 

PsTyBd 

PsTyb 

PsPtRd 

(12,9)" 

(9) 

(12) 

(12,9) 

(12) 

Glucose 

3 

2 

3 

58 

73 

Galactose 

5 

0 

3 

25 

26 

Mannose 

4 

10 

0 

19 

25 

Rhamnose 

23 

2 

85 

11 

10 

Tyvelose 

27 

66 

0 

7 

0 

*  Staub  et  al.,  1959.  Numbers  indicate  per  cent  inhibition. 

^  Polysaccharide  extracted  from  S.  typhosa. 

"  PsTy  oxidized  with  periodic  acid. 

<^  Polysaccharide  from  5.  schottmuelleri  (formerl}-  paratyphoid  B)  =  S.  para- 
typhi B. 

«  Somatic  antigens  9  and  12  of  the  KaulTman — White  scheme.  The  italic  number 
indicates  the  antigen  which  characterizes  group  D,  the  group  that  includes 
5.  typhosa. 

S.  typhosa  after  treatment  with  periodic  acid.  The  reason  for  inckid- 
ing  such  oxidized  antigens  in  the  studies  is  that  periodic  acid  destroys 
substances  possessing  two  adjacent  hydroxyl  groups,  such  as  terminal 
ghicose  or  galactose.  Terminal  3,6-dideoxyhexoses,  however,  do  not 
possess  such  a  combination  of  hydroxyls  and  are  not  attacked. 

From  the  results  obtained  with  the  horse  anti-typhoid  serum  shown 
in  Table  8-5,  Staub  et  al.  (1959)  concluded  that  tyvelose  is  the 
terminal  sugar  of  antigen  9  and  rhamnose  that  of  antigen  12. 

It  will  be  seen  from  Table  8-5  that  the  results  obtained  with  the 
rabbit  serum  were  quite  different  from  those  of  the  horse  serum. 
The  precipitation  of  the  polysaccharide  of  S.  typhosa  (PsTy)  by 
horse  anti-typhoid  was  inhibited  significantly  only  by  rhamnose  and 
tyvelose,  whereas  these  sugars  inhibited  precipitation  of  the  same 
antigen  by  rabbit  anti-typhoid  very  poorly.  Glucose  was  much  more 
active  with  rabbit  serum.  The  difference  in  inhibition  of  precipitation 
of  the  polyoside  of  6^.  scJwttiniiellcri  (PsPtB)  was  even  greater.  It 
was  therefore  concluded  that  antigen  12,  common  to  S.  typhosa  and 


112  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEAIICAL  SPECIFICITY 

^.  schottinuclleri,  contains  a  side  chain  terminating  in  glucose  as 
well  as  one  terminating  in  rhamnose. 

Similar  studies  carried  out  by  Staub  et  al.  on  antisera  to  .S".  sclioff- 
muelleri  (containing  antigens  4,  5,  and  12)  showed  that  abequose  in- 
hibited the  precipitation  of  PsPtB  and  especially  of  PsPtBox-  This 
showed  that  abequose  is  the  terminal  unit  of  either  antigen  4  or  5. 
Since  abequose  and  antigen  4  are  found  in  all  Salmonella  of  group  B, 
but  antigen  5  is  lacking  in  some  members  of  this  group,  Staub  et  al. 
concluded  that  abequose  plays  no  role  in  antigen  5.  This  was  con- 
firmed by  the  observation  that  the  precipitation  of  an  extract  of 
S.  typhimurimn,  which  contains  no  5  antigen,  is  inhibited  by  abequose 
and  by  the  finding  that  when  all  the  antibody  precipitable  by  an  ex- 
tract of  this  5".  typJiiniuriitui  was  removed  from  the  anti-PsPtB 
serum,  the  action  of  the  serum  on  PsPtB  was  not  inhibited  by  the 
abequose. 

Staub  et  al.  (1959)  suggest  that  the  dideoxyhexoses  may  play  an 
especially  important  role  in  the  specificity  of  the  Salmonella  antigens, 
not  only  because  they  are  always  terminal,  but  because  the  two  hydro- 
phobic CH2-groups  they  contain  are  able  to  approach  much  closer 
to  the  corresponding  surface  of  the  antibody  than  the  hydrophilic 
CHOH-groups,  thus  strengthening  the  van  der  Waals  forces  between 
the  antigenic  determinants  and  the  antibody  (see  Chapter  9). 

Cross-Reactions 

As  a  result  of  extensive  studies  similar  to  those  just  outlined,  Staub 
et  al.  concluded  that  although  distinct  Salmonella  antigens  generally 
have  different  terminal  sugars,  this  is  not  always  the  case.  For  in- 
stance, abequose  occurs  at  the  extremity  of  both  antigens  4  and  8, 
and  glucose  at  the  extremity  of  antigens  1  and  12.  It  seems  reasonable 
to  conclude  that  in  such  cases  the  next-to-terminal  sugar  is  difTerent, 
or  attached  in  a  different  way.  In  order  to  test  this  idea,  the  authors 
carried  out  quantitative  cross-reactions  with  a  number  of  polysac- 
charides. Some  of  their  results  are  shown  in  Table  8-6. 

From  the  precipitation  observed  with  the  galactomannans  of  gum 
ghatti,  lucerne,  and  clover,  Staub  concluded  that  the  Salmonella  an- 
tigen 4  has  structural  similarities  with  these  polysaccharides ;  for. 
whenever  the  antibodies  to  antigen  4  were  removed,  precipitation  of 


SALMONELLA  ANTIGENS 


113 


TABLE  8-6 

Cross-Reactions  of  Horse  Serums  for  5.  schottmuelleri  and  S.  typhosa 
with  Certain  Polysaccharides" 


Precipitating 

serum  s 

ibsorbed  w 

ith: 

—          PsPtB 

PsPtBox      PsTy 

PsTm>' 

Antibody  re- 

(•^,5,12)        — 

(12) 

(^,5) 

(5) 

maining  for 

Polysaccharide 

antigens 

1.  Anti-5. 

schottmuelleri  serum 

Galactomannan 

of 

Gum  ghatti 

270             19 

40 

— 

— 

Lucerne 

255             28 

— 

243 

2 

Clover 

200            25 

— 

— 

— 

Dextran 

67             — 

— 

33 

2.  Anti-5.  typhosa 

Antibody  re- 

P,12             9 

maining  for 

antigens 

Dextran 

108               7 

*  Staub  et  al.,  1959.  Numbers  indicate  micrograms  of  precipitate  nitrogen. 
^  Polysaccharide   from    S.    typhimuriuni.    Other   antigens   abbreviated    as    in 
Table  8-5. 


the  galactomannans  was  reduced  virtually  to  zero.  Antibody  to  anti- 
gen 12,  on  the  other  hand,  seems  not  to  cross- react  with  these  galacto- 
mannans, as  is  shown  by  the  fact  that  removal  of  anti-12  by  absorp- 
tion with  polysaccharide  of  5".  typhosa  does  not  mtich  afifect  the  pre- 
cipitation of  the  serum  with  lucerne. 

The  antibodies  precipitable  by  dextran  are  seen  to  be,  at  least  in 
part,  anti-12  antibodies,  since  removal  of  anti-12  by  treatment  with 
PsTy  considerably  reduces  the  amount  of  precipitation  with  dextran. 
This  is  shown  even  more  clearly  by  the  fact  that  removal  of  the 
anti-12  from  the  anti-^'.  typhosa  serum  eliminates,  for  all  practical 
purposes,  precipitation  with  dextran. 

From  these  results  Staub  and  her  co-workers  concluded  that  anti- 
gen 12  contains  glucose  units  linked  as  they  are  in  dextran.  They 
felt  they  could  not  decide  whether  these  glucoses  were  in  the  side 
chain  which  terminates  in  rhamnose  or  part  of  a  chain  terminating 


114  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

in  glucose.  They  further  conckided  that  antigen  4  contains  groupings 
similar  to  those  present  in  the  galactomannans.  These  polysaccharides 
contain  long  chains  of  mannose  linked  1^4,  with  occasional  side 
chains  consisting  of  galactose  linked  1^6,  as  shown  in  the  following 
scheme : 

galactose  galactose 


(1-6) 


(1-6) 


— (1-^4)  mannose  (1— »4) — mannose — (1-^4)  mannose  (l->4) — 
It  is  evident  that  the  precipitability  of  anti-4  antibodies  by  these 
galactomannans  is  due  to  their  specificity  for  a  terminal  galactose,  a 
galactose-mannose  group,  or  a  chain  of  mannose  linked  1— >4.  The 
last  possibility  is  eliminated  by  the  fact  that  oxidized  paratyphoid 
polysaccharide  still  precipitates  this  antibody,  for  mannose  linked 
1^'4  would  be  destroyed  by  periodic  acid  oxidation.  The  probability 
that  the  cross-reaction  is  due  to  a  terminal  galactose  was  diminished 
by  the  failure  of  Heidelberger  and  Cordoba  (1956)  to  obtain  cross- 
reactions  with  other  polysaccharides  containing  terminal  galactoses. 
Also,  periodic  acid  oxidation  would  destroy  a  terminal  galactose,  yet 
the  oxidized  polysaccharide  is  still  able  to  absorb  out  the  anti-4 
antibodies.  One  is,  therefore,  led  to  conclude  that  the  grouping  com- 
mon to  antigen  4  and  the  galactomannans  is  the  galactose-mannose 
grouping.  But,  since  antigen  4  terminates  in  a  nonoxidizable  sugar 
and  the  only  such  sugar  present  is  abequose,  the  terminal  portion 
of  antigen  4  may  be : 

abequose — galactose — mannose 

Staub  et  al.  (1959)  were  able  to  detect  a  weak  cross-reaction  be- 
tween S.  schottmuelleri  and  5.  nezvport  owing  to  the  terminal 
abequose  which  forms  part  of  antigen  4  in  the  former  and  part  of 
antigen  8  in  the  latter.  This  cross-reaction  took  place  with  horse 
serum  only,  which  suggested  that  the  horse  produces  antibodies  spe- 
cific for  the  terminal  sugar  more  readily  than  the  rabbit  does. 

In  later  work  Staub  et  al.  established  the  terminal  sequence  of 
sugars  in  antigens  1  and  12  as  : 

o-glucose — galactose — mannose — rhamnose 
The  linkages  between  the  glucose  and  galactose  are  different  in  the 


SALMONELLA  ANTIGENS 


lis 


Abequose 


Poratose  Rhamnose 


Glucose 


GROUP  A    (I,  2,  12) 
)Tyvelose 


Rhamnose 

Glucose 


GROUP   B    ((I),  4,  5,  12) 


GROUP   D    (9,  12) 


GROUP   Cg  (6,  8) 


GROUP  P   (35)  E.  coli 

Fig.  8-2.  Scheme  showing  our  present  knowledge  of  the  role  of  known  sugars 
in  the  specificity  of  some  Kauffmann- White  antigens  (Staub,  1959).  Ellipses 
indicate  bacteria,  projecting  chains  O  antigens. 

two  antigens,  probably  1-^6  in  antigen  1  and  1— >4  in  antigen  12. 
(Staub,  1960;  Stocker,  Staub,  Tinelli,  and  Kopacka,  1960;  Tinelli 
and  Staub,  1960). 

A  summary  of  the  conclusions  of  Westphal,  Staub,  et  al.  about  the 


116  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

antigenic  structure  of  several  Salmonella  species  in  terms  of  chemi- 
cal structure  of  the  Kaufifmann- White  classification  is  shown  in  Fig. 
8-2.  To  anybody  familiar  with  the  (largely  unavoidable)  vagueness 
of  serological  methods  of  classifying  bacteria,  the  concreteness  of 
the  new  results  will  seem  like  a  ray  of  light  in  a  dark  room.  We  may 
confidently  anticipate  that  this  ray  will  grow  brighter  until  the  whole 
intricate  structure  is  illuminated. 

References 

Boivin,  A.,  and  L.  Mesrobeanu,  1933,  Cowpt.  rend.  soc.  hiol.  112,  76,  611,  1009; 

113,490;  114,  307  ff. 
Boivin,  A.,  and  L.  Mesrobeanu,  1935,  Rev.  immunol.  1,  553. 
Boivin,  A.,  and  L.  Mesrobeanu,  1936,  Rev.  immunol.  2,  113. 
Boivin,  A.,  and  L.  Mesrobeanu,  1937,  Rev.  immunol.  2,  113,  3,  319. 
Davies,  D.  A.  L.,  1955,  Biochem.  J.  59,  696. 

Davies,  D.  A.  L.,  1960,  Advances  in  Carbohydrate  Chem.,  in  press. 
Davies,  D.  A.  L.,   I.  Fromme,  O.  Liideritz,  A.   M.   Staub,  and   O.  Westphal, 

1958,  Nature  181,  822. 
Dubos,  R.  J.,  1952,  Bacterial  and  Mycotic  Infections  of  Man,  2nd  ed.,  Lippincott, 

Philadelphia. 
Dubos,  R.  J.,  1945,  The  Bacterial  Cell  in  Its  Relation  to  Problems  of  Virulence, 

Immunity  and  Chemotherapy,  Harvard  University  Press,  Cambridge. 
Fouquey,  C.  J.  Polonsky,  and  E.  Leder,  1957,  Bull.  Soc.  Chim.  Biol.  39,  101. 
Freeman,  G.  G.,  1942,  Biochem.  J.  36,  340. 
Goebel,  W.  F.,  1945,  /.  Exptl.  Med.  81,  315. 
Heidelberger,  M.,  and  F.  Cordoba,  1956,  J.  E.vptl.  Med.  104,  375. 
Kaufifmann,    F.,    1950,    The   Diagnosis    of   Salmonella    Types,    C.    C.    Thomas, 

Springfield. 
Kaufifmann,  F.,  1951,  Enterobacteriaccae ,  Ejnar  Munksgaard,  Copenhagen. 
Kaufifmann,  F.,  1937,  Z.  Hyg.  Ifektionskrankh.  120,  177. 
Liideritz,  O.,  A.  M.  Staub,  S.  Stirm,  and  O.  Westphal,  1958,  Biochem.  Z.  330, 

193. 
Mikulaszek,  E.,  et  al.,  1956,  Ann.  inst.  Pasteur  91,  40. 
Morgan,  W.  T.  J.,  1937,  Biochem.  J.  31,  2003. 
Morgan,  W.  T.  J.,  and  S.  M.  Partridge,  1940,  Biochem.  J.  34,  169. 
Morgan,  W.  T.  J.,  and  S.  M.  Partride,  1942,  Brit.  J.  E.vptl.  Pathol.  23,  151. 
Morgan,  W.  T.  J.,  and  S.  M.  Partridge,  1941,  Biochem.  J.  35,  1140. 
Pon,  G.,  and  A.  M.  Staub,  1952,  Bull.  soc.  chim.  biol.  34,  1132. 
Schmidt,  G.,  E.  Eichenberger,  and  O.  Westphal,   1958,  Experientia    14,  289. 
Staub,  A.  M.,  1960,  Ann.  inst.  Pasteur  98,  814. 
Staub,  A.  M.,  1960,  Ann.  inst.  Pastetir,  98,  814. 

Staub,  A.  M.,  and  R.  Tinelli,  1957,  Bull.  soc.  chim.  biol.  39  (Suppl.  1),  65. 
Staub,  A.  M.,  R.  Tinelli,  O.  Liideritz  and  O.  Westphal,  1959,  Ann.  inst.  Pasteur 

96.  303. 


SALMONELLA  ANTIGENS  117 

Stockcr,  B.,  A.  M.  Staub,  R.  Tinelli,  and  B.  Kopacka,  1960,  Ann.  insf.  Pasteur 

98,  505. 
Tinelli,  R.,  and  A.  M.  Staub,  1960,  Bull.  soc.  chini.  biol..  42,  583,  601. 
Westphal,  O.,  1960,  Angnv.  Chcm.  72  (Dec.) 
Westphal,  O.,  1952,  Angczv.  Chcm.  64,  314. 
Westphal,  O.,  and  O.  Liideritz,  1954,  Angezv.  Chcm.  66,  407. 
Westphal,  O.,  O.  Liideritz,  I.  Fromme,  and  N.  Joseph,  1953,  Angczv.  Chcm.  65, 

555. 
Westphal,  O.,  O.  Luderitz,  A.  M.  Staub,  and  R.  Tinelli,  1959,  Zcntr.  Baktcriol. 

I.  Orig.  174,  307  ff. 
White,   P.   B.,   1956,  Further  Studies  t>l   the  Salmouella   Group.  Great   Britain 

Med.  Res.  Council  Special  Rep.  Series  No.  103,  1951,  London. 


CHAPTER  9 

Union  of  Antibody  with  Antigen : 
Thermodynamics 


The  exact  mechanisms  by  which  antibodies  produce  their  effects 
have  not  been  cleared  up  in  all  cases,  but  that  the  first  step  is  com- 
bination of  the  antibody  and  antigen  is  not  in  dispute.  It  is  therefore 
of  interest  to  inquire  into  the  forces  involved  and  the  firmness  of 
the  union.  A  proper  treatment  of  these  points  will  require  the  intro- 
duction of  a  few  elementary  thermodynamic  notions. 

Forces  Involved 

Landsteiner  (1936)  pointed  out  that  the  covalent  bond  (e.g., 
the  bond  holding  the  two  carbons  together  in  ethane,  H3C — CH3) 
does  not  generally  form  fast  enough  and  is  not  reversible  enough 
to  be  a  plausible  explanation  of  antibody-antigen  reaction  and  that 
some  compounds  which  can  react  with  antibodies  cannot  form  covalent 
bonds.  Similar  arguments  probably  rule  out  the  coordinate  link  or 
semipolar  double  bond. 

We  are  left  with  three  possibilities :  coulomb  forces,  van  der  Waals 
forces,  and  hydrogen  bonding.  Coulomb  forces  are  those  causing 
positive  and  negative  charges  to  attract  each  other.  All  antibodies 
and  many  antigens  are  proteins,  and  it  is  pertinent  to  remark  that 
prominent  among  the  charged  groups  in  protein  molecules  are  the 
positive  free  e-amino  groups  ■ — NH3+  of  lysine  and  the  negatively 
charged  free  carboxy  groups  — COO~  of  the  dicarboxylic  amino 
acids  such  as  aspartic  acid.  A  separated,  fixed,  pair  of  positive  and 
negative  charges  constitutes  a  dipole.  It  is  easy  to  see  how  dipoles 

118 


UNION  OF  ANTIBODY  WITH   ANTIGEN 


119 


+  -+  -+  -    + 


Schemes  of  dipole  association 


First  step 


Second   step 


Third   step 


Attraction   of  o  dipole  by  an  ion 
Fig.  9-1.  Schemes    showing    dipole-dipole    association    and    attraction    of    a 
dipole  by  an  ion. 


may  attract  other  dipoles  as  a  result  of  coulomb  forces,  or  attract 
positive  or  negative  ions  (Fig.  9-1). 

Van  der  Waals  forces  constitute  the  most  general  intermolecular 
attraction  and  may  operate  between  any  two  molecules.  They  depend 
not  upon  permanent  but  upon  instantaneous  dipole  moments.  A  mole- 
cule which  has  no  permanent  dipole  moment,  for  example  methane 
(CH4),  may  have  at  a  certain  instant  an  instantaneous  dipole  mo- 
ment when  the  center  of  charge  of  the  rapidly  moving  negative  elec- 
trons surrounding  the  carbon  nucleus  lies  to  one  side  of  the  center 
of  charge  of  the  positive  nucleus.  This  instantaneous  dipole  moment 
produces  an  instantaneous  electric  field  which  may  influence  another 
molecule  in  the  immediate  neighborhood.  As  a  result  the  electrons 
of  the  second  molecule  move  relative  to  their  nucleus  in  such  a  way 
as  to  produce  a  force  of  attraction  for  the  first  molecule. 

Van  der  Waals  forces  decrease  very  rapidly  with  distance,  being 
inversely  proportional  to  the  seventh  power  of  the  distance,  and  are 


120  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

consequently  negligible  when  two  molecules  are  separated  by  any  ap- 
preciable distance.  They  are  quite  strong  between  molecules  that 
can  bring  parts  of  their  "surfaces"  into  close  contact. 

Hydrogen  bonds  (also  relatively  short-range j  consist  essentially 
of  a  hydrogen  atom  which  is  attracted  simultaneously  to  two  dififerent 
atoms.  For  example,  the  two  oxygens  in  salicylaldehyde   (Fig.  9-2) 

.0. 


-c=o 


Salicylaldehyde 
Fig.  9-2. 

are  connected  by  a  hydrogen  bond.  Many  of  the  unusual  properties 
of  water  are  due  to  hydrogen  bonding.  It  is  believed  that  hydrogen 
bonds  play  an  important  part  in  maintaining  the  characteristic  con- 
figurations of  protein  molecules. 

The  role  of  coulomb  forces  in  holding  antibody  and  antigen  to- 
gether was  removed  from  the  realm  of  pure  hypothesis  by  the  ex- 
periments of  Singer  (1957).  This  worker  pointed  out  that  if  a  nega- 
tively charged  group  is  involved  in  an  antibody-antigen  bond,  it  is 
possible  to  calculate  the  effect  of  pH  on  antibody-antigen  combination. 
The  assumption  is  made  that,  if  the  negative  group  is  in  the  antigen, 
the  antibody  contains  a  corresponding  positively  charged  group,  and 
vice  versa.  For  our  present  purposes  it  is  immaterial  which  molecule 
contains  the  negative  group.  Singer  and  Campbell  (Singer,  1957) 
suggested  that,  if  there  is  one  negative  group  characterized  by  an 
intrinsic  hydrogen  ion  association  constant  K^  and  if  we  neglect  the 
nonspecific  repulsion  between  antibody  (Ab)  and  antigen  (AG) 
molecules,  the  following  relation  should  hold  in  the  acid  region : 

log  (l/K-l/Ko)    =\og(Ku/Ko)  -  pH  (1) 

where  K  is  the  apparent  equilibrium  constant  at  a  given  pH  for  the 
reaction 

Ab+Ag;eAbAg 
and  A'o  is  the  value  of  K  at  neutral  pH  where  both  the  positive  and 


UNION  OF  ANTIBODY  WITH   ANTIGEN 


121 


the  negative  group  are  fully  ionized.  A  similar  relation  would  apply 
in  the  alkaline  region.  If  two  negative  and  two  positive  groups  were 
critically  involved  in  each  Ab-Ag  bond,  the  expected  relation  would 
now  contain  a  (pH)-  and  a  2(pH)  term. 

Singer  tested  this  relation  by  ultracentrifugal  observations  on  Ab- 
Ag  mixtures  at  different  pH.  Typical  results  are  shown  in  Fig.  9-3, 


Fig.  9-3.  Ultracentrifugal  diagrams  of  mixtures  of  bovine  serum  albumin 
and  its  antibody  at  various  pH.  Sedimentation  is  proceeding  in  the  direction  of 
the  arrow.  Ag  stands  for  antigen,  Ab  for  antibody,  a  for  an  antibody-antigen 
complex  thought  to  be  AgoAb,  b  represents  a  complex  thought  to  be  AgsAb-, 
and  5  is  gamma  globulin.  At  pH  less  than  4.5,  progressively  larger  amounts  of 
free  gamma  globulin  (antibody)  appear,  while  the  amounts  of  the  complexes 
diminish  (Singer,  1957). 

which  shows  the  sedimentation  diagrams  of  mixtures  of  bovine 
serum  albumin  and  rabbit  anti-bovine  serum  albumin.  As  the  pH 
falls,  more  and  more  free  gamma  globulin  (antibody)  appears  in  the 
mixture  while  the  amount  of  the  antibody-antigen  complexes  de- 
creases. The  changes  are  clearly  a  function  of  pH*  and  were  fomid 
to  be  entirely  reversible. 

Enough  results  at  different  pH  were  obtained  to  show  that  the 
linear  relation  predicted  by  the  equation  holds  quite  well  (Fig.  9-4). 
This  was  found  to  be  true  for  both  systems  studied,  namely,  oval- 
bumin-antiovalbumin    and    bovine    serum   albumin-antibovine-serum- 


*  Habeeb  et  al.  (1959),  however,  conclude  from  chemical  modification  studies 
that  "the  removal  of  the  positive  charge  on  the  same  amino  groups  of  Ab  by 
an  increase  of  the  pH  of  the  solution,  instead  of  by  acetylation,  might  have 
the  same  effect  on  the  Ab  molecule  and  its  capacity  to  precipitate  witli  a 
large  Ag  molecule.  The  generally-observed  dissociation  of  Ag-Ab  bonds  in 
alkaline  solution  might  therefore  be  attributable  to  such  a  deformation  of  the 
Ab  molecule,  rather  than  ...  to  titration  of  specific  critical  groups  within  the 
Ab  sites." 


122 


INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 


albumin.  The  constant  A'h  had  in  both  cases  a  vahie  of  about  105, 
which  is  consistent  with  the  idea  that  a  carboxyl  group,  — COO~, 
is  critically  involved  in  the  antibody-antigen  bond  in  these  systems, 
and  must  be  ionized  for  maximum  bond  strength.  Singer  concluded 
that  the  attraction  of  this  group  for  its  complementary  positive  group 
accounts  for  about  half  of  the  strength  of  the  antibody-antigen  bond 
in  these  cases.  The  remainder  is  presumably  due  to  some  or  all  of 
the  other  forces  mentioned  above. 


-3.0 

1 

'               1 

1         1 

- 

-3.4 

- 

- 

- 

ffV 

- 

-3.8 

- 

- 

" 

O^v 

" 

-4.2 

1 

1 

1                      1 

\. 

3.2 


3.6 


pH 


Fig.  9-4.  Effect  of  pH  on  antibody-antigen  equilibrium  in  the  bovine  serum 
albumin  system,  plotted  according  to  equation  (1).  The  slope  of  the  line  is 
-1.2  (Singer,  1957). 


In  the  case  of  the  attraction  of  antibody  to  /'-(/''azophenylazo)- 
benzene  arsenate,  Nisonofif  and  Pressman  (1957)  found  that  the 
negatively  charged  - — COO~  group  contributed  over  4.8  kcal./mole 
to  the  binding  energy,  again  indicating  the  presence  of  a  positive 
charge  in  the  combining  group  of  the  antibody.  The  uncharged 
/j-phenylazo  group  contributed  2.3  kcal./mole. 

There  are  a  number  of  reasons  for  believing  that  the  van  der  Waals 
forces  are  among  the  most  important  of  the  non-coulomb  forces.  One 
of  the  arguments  supporting  this  belief  derives  from  the  fact  that  the 


UNION  OF  ANTIBODY  WITH   ANTIGEN  123 

strength  of  the  antibody-antigen  bond  is  greatly  decreased  if  the 
hapten  or  antigen  combining  group  is  sHghtly  changed  in  shape. 
This  is  shown  by  work  with  haptens  of  known  chemical  constitution, 
such  as  the  experiments  discussed  in  Chapter  1,  and  by  measurements 
of  the  bond  strength  for  groups  of  related  haptens,  discussed  below. 
The  strong  influence  of  shape  suggests  that  close  contact  between  the 
various  atoms  of  the  combining  group  of  the  antibody  and  the  atoms 
of  the  haptens  or  antigenic  combining  group  is  necessary  for  a 
strong  antibody-antigen  bond.  Such  closeness  of  contact  accords  well 
with  the  suggestion,  made  by  Hooker  and  Boyd  (1941),  Pauling  and 
Pressman  (1945)  (Fig.  2-12),  and  Karush  (1956),  that  the  com- 
bining group  of  the  antibody  may  in  fact  be  a  cavity  into  which  the 
hapten  or  antigen  combining  group  fits  snugly.  Close  fit  would  make 
the  van  der  Waals  forces  strong,  and  any  change  in  the  hapten  or 
antigen  combining  group  that  lessened  that  fit  would  markedly  weaken 
the  strength  of  the  bond,  which  is  precisely  what  we  observe. 

Although  in  the  two  systems  studied  by  Singer  the  non-coulomb 
forces  (which,  if  the  argument  in  the  preceding  paragraph  is  valid, 
may  be  second  in  importance)  were  thought  to  account  for  only 
about  half  the  strength  of  the  antibody-antigen  bond,  there  are 
cases  where  the  non-coulomb  forces  presumably  account  for  the 
entire  bond. strength.  These  cases  apply  to  antigens  which  do  not  con- 
tain positively  or  negatively  charged  groups  in  their  specifically  re- 
active portions.  Good  examples  of  such  antigens  are  provided  by  the 
blood  group  substances  (Chapter  7).  Here,  no  positive  or  negative 
groups  are  present,  at  least  not  in  the  portions  responsible  for  the 
antigenic  specificity.  Yet  the  blood  group  antigens  combine  firmly  and 
typically  not  only  with  antibody  but  with  the  blood  group-specific 
plant  proteins  I  have  called  lectins  (Chapter  6).  These  reactions  have 
been  studied  quantitatively  (Kabat,  1956;  Boyd,  Shapleigh,  and 
McMaster,  1955).  Karush  (1958)  believes  that  the  forces  between 
antibody  and  carbohydrate  antigens  are  mainly  hydrogen  bonds. 

Wurmser  and  Filitti-Wurmser  (1950)  suggest  that  the  combining 
energy  of  the  isohemagglutinins  with  their  receptors  on  the  human 
erythrocyte  is  equivalent  to  that  of  about  four  hydrogen  bonds  or 
twenty  van  der  Waals  bonds.  Before  we  can  discuss  such  quantitative 
estimates  further  it  will  ])e  necessary  to  go  into  some  of  the  concepts 
of  thermodvnamics. 


124  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

Energy 

We  shall  need  to  discuss  only  the  first  two  laws  of  thermody- 
namics. The  first  law  is  well  known  and  today  needs  only  to  be 
stated  to  be  believed.  It  is  simply  that  energy  can  neither  be  created 
nor  be  destroyed.  It  is  understood  that  we  are  not  thinking  of  changes 
involving  changes  in  atomic  nuclei ;  if  we  were,  we  should  have  to 
formulate  the  law  more  broadly. 

From  the  first  law  of  thermodynamics  it  follows  that  no  perpetual 
motion  machine  of  the  "first  type,"  i.e.,  one  getting  all  or  part  of  its 
energy  from  nowhere,  can  ever  be  constructed.  The  total  energy  of  a 
completely  isolated  system,  therefore,  remains  constant  (If  the  sys- 
tem is  not  isolated  its  total  energy  may  change  from  time  to  time.) 
We  designate  this  total  energy,  which  may  be  made  up  of  heat  (  which 
Count  Rumford  proved  to  be  a  form  of  energy )  or  of  mechanical 
or  chemical  energy  and  at  times  of  other  forms,  as  E.  The  science 
of  thermodynamics  grew  out  of  a  study  of  the  process  by  which  heat 
may  be  converted  by  suitable  machines  partly  into  work.  If  we  let 
Q  stand  for  the  heat  content  of  the  system  and  W  for  the  work  done, 
we  may  write  the  simple  equation 

AE  =  ^Q  -  AW  (2) 

which  states  that  the  increase  in  the  total  energy  of  the  system, 
a£,  equals  the  heat  taken  up,  AQ,  minus  the  work  done,  AlV.  This 
is  a  statement  of  the  first  law  of  thermodynamics  in  symbols. 

If  we  consider  an  extremely  small  change  in  the  system  and  ignore 
certain  questions  of  mathematical  rigor,  we  may  replace  the  finite 
dift'erences  AE,  AQ,  and  AlV  by  the  differentials  dE,  dQ,  and  dW, 
and  write 

dE  =  dQ  -  dW  (3) 

The  meaning  of  this  equation  is  not  as  obvious  as  the  beginner 
might  think.  It  looks  as  if  the  equation  means  that,  if  you  measure 
the  infinitesimal  increase  in  the  total  energy  of  a  system,  you  can 
show  experimentally  that  it  equals  the  experimentally  determined  in- 
finitesimal absorption  of  heat  minus  the  experimentally  determined 
amount  of  work  done.  But  this  is  not  the  meaning  at  all,  for  we  have 
no  "energy  meter"  with  which  we  can  measure  the  total  energy  of 
a  system,  or  even  the  change  in  total  etiergy.  The  onl}'  way  we  have 


UNION  OF  ANTIBODY  WITH   ANTIGEN  125 

of  getting  dE  is  by  measuring  ciQ  and  dlJ^  and  taking  the  difference. 
It  looks  as  if  equation  (3)  is  a  trivial  tautology. 

This  is  not  the  case,  however,  because  there  is  an  essential  dif- 
ference between  dE  on  one  hand  and  dQ  and  dW  on  the  other 
(Klotz,  1950).  For  dE  is  an  exact  differential,  and  dQ  and  dlV  are 
not.  The  meaning  of  the  mathematical  term  exact  differential  is  dis- 
cussed in  textbooks  of  the  calculus.  Here  we  need  only  recall  that, 
if  a  differential  dX  is  exact,  the  values  of  A'  at  two  different  points, 
.Yi  and  Xo,  depend  solely  on  the  initial  and  final  values  of  the  in- 
dependent variables  of  which  X  is  a  function,  whereas,  if  dX  is  inexact, 
the  values  of  X  depend  upon  the  particular  route  we  take  from  Xi 
to  Xo.  In  physics,  if  the  pressure  P  and  volume  V  of  steam  in  an  en- 
gine are  fixed,  the  values  of  the  other  variables  such  as  the  tem- 
perature T  are  thereby  determined.  Since  the  values  of  P  and  V 
determine  the  state  of  the  system,  P  and  V  are  called  the  independent 
variables.  We  could  have  chosen  other  sets  of  two,  such  as  P  and 
T  or  V  and  T,  but  in  the  study  of  heat  engines,  where  thermodynamics 
originated,  the  set  P,  V  is  particularly  useful. 

We  find  that  specifying  P  and  V  does  not  uniquely  determine 
Q  or  W ,  for  the  amount  of  heat  a  system  may  take  up  can  vary  in 
spite  of  this,  and  it  is  well  known  that  the  portion  of  the  heat  a 
machine  converts  into  work  depends  on  the  efficiency  of  the  machine. 
Consequently,  dQ  and  dW  are  inexact  differentials  and  final  values 
of  Q  and  VV  depend  not  merely  on  the  final  values  of  P  and  V,  but 
on  the  route  we  choose  in  getting  from  the  state  Pi,  V\  to  Fo.  f^2- 
Two  possible  routes  are  shown  schematically  in  Fig.  9-5. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  value  of  E  is  completely  determined  by  P 
and  V,  and  no  matter  what  route  we  take  from  Pi,  ]\  to  P^.  V2, 
the  final  value  of  E,  E^,  will  he  the  same.  Consequently,  if  we  go  from 
point  1  to  point  2,  then  back  to  point  1  (this  we  call  a  reversible 
cyclic  process),  AP  must  equal  zero,  while  AQ  and  AfF  will  in 
general  be  different  from  zero.  All  this  is  a  mere  restatement  of  the 
first  law  of  thermodynamics,  but  it  is  of  the  greatest  importance. 

A  thermodynamic  quantity  which  depends  only  upon  the  values 
of  the  independent  variables  is  called  a  thermodynamic  junction. 
Thus,  the  total  energy  E  is  such  a  function.  Knowing  that  P  is  a 
thermodynamic  function,  we  can  write  other  expressions  which  are 
also  thermodynamic  functions.   For  example,  if  we  write 


126 


INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 


Fig.  9-5.  Two  possible  reversible  routes  from  state  1  to  state  2. 


H 


E  +  PV 


(4) 


it  is  obvious  that  //  is  a  thermodynamic  function,  for  we  have  seen 
that  E  depends  solely  on  the  values  of  P  and  V,  and  the  product 
PV  depends  only  on  these  variables.  Therefore  dH  is  an  exact  dif- 
ferential. The  quantity  H  is  called  the  total  heat,  or  enthalpy. 
Enthalpy  is  important  because,  when  the  pressure  remains  constant, 
which  it  does  during  most  chemical  reactions,  the  change  in  enthalpy 
is  equal  to  the  heat  absorbed  or  heat  given  off,  as  follows : 

±(AH)p  =   ±(A(2)p  (5) 

The  subscript  P  indicates  that  the  variable  P  (pressure)  remains 
constant.  The  sign  convention,  positive  for  heat  absorbed  and  nega- 
tive for  heat  given  off,  was  more  natural  in  the  study  of  heat  en- 
gines than  it  is  in  chemistry,  but  is  now  firmly  established. 

A//  is  interesting  because  in  many  cases  a  large  negative  \H 
for  a  chemical  reaction  goes  along  with  a  strong  tendency  for  the  re- 
action to  go  spontaneously.  Indeed  it  was  long  believed  that  —(\H)p 
was  the  proper  measure  of  the  spontaneity  of  a  reaction.  It  was 
eventually  found  that  not  — (AH)p  but  the  change  in  another  thermo- 
dynamic  function,   the   free   energy,    is   the   proper   measure   of   the 


UNION  OF  ANTIBODY  WITFI   ANTIGEN  127 

spontaneity  of  a  chemical  reaction.*  The  more  spontaneous  a  reac- 
tion, the  stronger  the  chemical  bonds  formed.  But  before  we  can  dis- 
cuss free  energy  we  must  introduce  the  second  law  of  thermody- 
namics. 

Entropy 

Going  back  to  equation  (3),  we  may  rewrite  it  as  follows: 

dQ  =  (IE  -\-  dW  (6) 

If  the  pressure  on  a  system  remains  constant,  any  work  done  is  the 
product  of  the  change  in  volume  times  the  pressure,  thus 

dQ  =  dE  -\-  PdV  (7j 

Since  we  know  that  £  is  a  function  of  P  and  V,  we  have,  by  an  ele- 
mentary and  purely  formal  application  of  the  calculus 

dE  =  {dE/dV)  dV  +  (dE/dP)  dP  (8) 

where  g  indicates  partial  differentiation.  Substituting  in  equation  (6), 
we  obtain 

dQ  =  (dE/dV  +  P)  dV  +  (dE/dP)  dP  (9) 

Since  dQ  is  not  an  exact  differential,  equation  (9)  cannot  be  inte- 
grated as  it  stands.  It  is  shown  in  the  calculus  (e.g.,  Osgood  1925) 
that,  whenever  you  have  an  equation  of  the  form 

dQ  =  XdV  -\-   YdP  (IC) 

where  X  and  Y  are  functions  of  the  variables  P  and  V,  there  is  al- 
ways an  integrating  factor  B  =  j(P,V),  in  fact  a  number  of  such 


*A   reaction  may  be  spontaneous   and,  nevertheless,   not  take  place  at  any- 
appreciable  rate  of  speed  under  ordinary  conditions.    For  example,  the  reaction 

2H2  -1-  O2  ^  2H..0 

has  a  large  negative  \H  and  is  also  spontaneous  by  the  free  energy  criterion 
(see  below).  Nevertheless,  mixtures  of  gaseous  hydrogen  and  oxygen  can  be 
stored  indefinitely  at  ordinary  temperatures  and  pressures.  The  reaction  is 
spontaneous,  however,  as  is  clear  from  what  happens  when  an  electric  spark 
is  passed  through  the  mixture. 


128  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

functions  of  P  and  /',  such  that  when  both  sides  of  equation  ( 10 )  are 
multipHed  by  one  of  them,  the  product  B  dQ  becomes  an  exact 
differential.  In  the  present  case  such  a  function  is  easily  found.  The 
simplest  one  is  \/T.  Multiplying  by  \/T,  we  obtain 

dQ/T  =  [{dE/dV  +  P)/T]dV  +  [{dE/dP)/T]dP         (11) 

That  dQ/T  is  an  exact  differential  is  proved  in  thermodynamics 
(Klotz,  1950)  by  showing  that  dQ/T  is  an  exact  differential  (a) 
for  an  ideal  gas  carried  through  a  certain  sequence  of  reversible 
changes  called  a  Carnot  cycle,  (b)  for  any  substance  carried  through 
a  Carnot  cycle,  and  (c)  for  any  substance  carried  through  any  re- 
versible cycle. 

The  sequence  of  changes  which  constitute  a  Carnot  cycle  is  so 
simple  and  symmetrical  that  it  is  easy  to  show  that,  for  such  a  cycle 
and  by  virtue  of  part  (c)  of  the  above-mentioned  proof  for  any 
reversible  cycle, 

W/Q2  =  {T,  -  T,)/To  (12) 

where  W  is  the  work  done  by  the  system  during  the  cycle,  Qo  is 
the  heat  taken  in  at  the  higher  temperature  To,  and  Ti  is  the  lower 
temperature.  The  fraction  W/Qo  is  called  the  efficiency  of  the  cycle. 
In  thermodynamics  it  is  further  proved  that  (a)  the  efficiency  of 
a  real  substance  carried  through  a  Carnot  c}-cle  cannot  be  greater 
than  that  of  an  ideal  gas  and  cannot  be  less,  and  (b)  the  efficiency 
of  any  substance  carried  through  any  reversible  cycle  is  the  same  as 
that  of  an  ideal  gas  carried  through  a  Carnot  cycle.  The  fraction 
IV/Q2  is  therefore  the  maximum  theoretical  efficiency  of  any  heat 
engine  which  takes  in  heat  Qo  at  temperature  To  and  returns  part 
of  the  heat  to  the  surroundings  at  temperature  T].  The  efficiency  of 
an  actual  engine  will  be  less  than  this :  it  is  impossible  for  the 
efficiency  of  any  engine,  actual  or  theoretical,  to  be  more. 

Since  dQ/T  is  an  exact  differential,  it  can  be  integrated.  As  a 
result  of  this  integration  we  shall  obtain  a  function  of  the  independent 
variables  P  and  V.  This  is  a  new  thermodvnamic  function,  and  we 
can  give  it  a  name.  The  name  of  the  new  function  is  entropy.  It  is 
represented  by  the  symbol  S.  and  we  write 

dS  =  dQ/T  (13) 


UNION  OF  ANTIBODY  WITH   ANTIGEN  129 

The  discovery  that  the  integral  of  dQ/T*  defines  a  new  thermo- 
dynamic function  constitutes  also  a  discovery  of  the  second  law  of 
thermodynamics.  It  is  probahly  the  best  way  of  introducing  the  con- 
cept of  entropy,  which  is  not,  like  the  concepts  of  temperature,  pres- 
sure, heat  content,  etc.,  an  obvious  generalization  of  ideas  already 
more  or  less  familiar  to  the  non-scientist  but  a  subtle  and  powerful 
new  concept.  The  best  attempt  to  explain  the  concept  in  words  is  to 
say  that  it  is  a  measure  of  the  disorder  of  a  system,  or  of  the  extent 
of  the  loss  of  availability  of  energy. 

The  second  law  of  thermodynamics  can  be  stated  in  words  in  a 
number  of  other  ways,  though  none  of  them  adequately  suggests  the 
significance  and  applicability  of  the  principle.  For  example,  we  may 
say  that  no  heat  engine  can  produce  work  by  taking  a  quantity  of  heat 
from  the  environment  at  a  certain  temperature  and  returning  the 
unused  heat  to  the  environment  at  the  same  temperature.  Such  an 
engine  would  be  a  perpetual  motion  machine  of  the  "second  type," 
and  the  second  law  of  thermodynamics  asserts  that  no  such  machine 
can  ever  be  constructed. 

The  significant  thing  about  the  second  law  for  chemists  is  that  it 
provides  a  valid  measure  of  the  tendency  of  a  process  to  take  place, 
when  the  change  in  entropy 

(the  subscripts  meaning  volume  and  energy  are  constant)  is  large 
and  positive,  the  process  will  tend  to  take  place  spontaneously,  and 
this  tendency  is  greater  the  larger  a5"f,£;. 

Free  Energy 

Although  fine  for  the  processes  that  take  place  in  heat  engines, 
as  a  measure  of  the  spontaneity  of  a  chemical  reaction  ^.Sv.e  has  its 
drawbacks.  In  chemical  reactions,  the  volume  of  the  system  often 
does  not  remain  the  same  and  the  energy  practically  never  does. 
Pressure  and  temperature  are  usually  constant  but  volume  and 
entropy  vary.  Consequently,  we  want  a  new  thermodynamic  function. 


*  The  dQ  in  the  definition  of  entropy  must  be  the  heat  absorbed  in  a  re- 
versible process  and  is  sometimes  written  explicitly  rfQrev. 


130  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

let  us  say  F,  such  that  Ft,p  =  j(V,S).  We  can  get  this  rather  simply 
by  the  definition 

F  =  H  -  TS  (14) 

It  is  easy  to  show  that  F  is  a  function  of  V  and  5"  when  P  and  T 
are  constant.  So  is  TS,  obviously :  when  T  is  constant  it  is  a  function 
of  5"  alone.  From  our  original  definition  of  H  we  have 

H  =  E  -\-  PV  (15) 

When  P  is  constant,  PF  is  a  function  of  V  only.  We  saw  above  that 
£  is  a  function  of  P  and  V  only ;  consequently,  when  P  is  constant, 
£  is  a  function  merely  of  V.  Therefore, 

F  =  H  -  TS  =  E  +  PV  -  TS  (16) 

is  a  function  of  V  and  S.  Consequently,  the  thermodynamic  function 
F  defined  by  this  expression  is  a  function  of  V  and  S.  The  new  func- 
tion is  called  the  Gibbs  free  energy. 

When  T  and  P  are  constant,  we  have  from  equation   (16) 

A£p,r  =  A£  +  PAF  -  rA5  (17) 

Now,  from  equation  (3)  above,  we  have  Aii  =  AQ  —  Al>F.  If  we 
ignore  complications  such  as  osmotic  effects,  the  only  work  the  system 
does  is  mechanical,  MV  =  P  AV,  and  AE  =  AQ  —  P  AV.  Substitut- 
ing this  into  equation  (17),  w^e  obtain 

AFp,T  =  AQ  -  PAV -\-  PAV  -  TAS  (18) 

From  the  definition  of  entropy,  AQ  =  T  AS  ior  a.  reversible  process, 
we  find  that  for  a  reversible  process,  or  at  equilibrium, 

AFp,T  =  O  (19) 

If  the  pressure  does  vary  but  the  temperature  continues  to  remain 
constant,  we  have  from  equation  (16) 

dF  =  dE  +  P  dV  +   J'  dP  -  T  dS 

Again,  dE  =  dQ  -  P  dV  =  T  dS  -  P  dV,  and  we  obtain 

dPr  =  VdP 

For  a  perfect  gas  we  have  PV  =  nRT,  or  V  =  nRT/P,  so  that 


UNION  OF  ANTIBODY  WITH   ANTIGEN  131 

dF=  -  {nRTdP)/P 

Integrating,  we  obtain 

F^  -  f.,  =   _AF  =  nRT\n{Pi/P2)  (20) 

Spontaneously,  a  perfect  gas  can  only  expand  ;  it  cannot  spontaneously 
contract.  In  other  words,  the  pressure  can  only  decrease.  From  this 
we  see  that  in  a  spontaneous  reaction  AF  will  be  negative.  The  larger 
the  negative  value  of  AF,  the  greater  the  tendency  of  the  process  to 
go. 

Strictly,  equation  (20)  applies  only  to  a  perfect  gas.  But  it  also 
applies  without  serious  error  to  many  real  gases.  If  we  replace  Po 
and  Pi  by  the  thermodynamic  activities,  which  for  the  dilute  solu- 
tions used  in  immunochemistry  do  not  differ  appreciably  from  the 
molar  concentrations,  we  may  apply  this  equation  to  antibody  and 
antigen  solutions. 

Free  Energy  and  Equilibrium 

We  now  proceed  to  derive  an  important  relation  between  AF  and 
the  equilibrium  constant  of  a  chemical  reaction.  Let  us  suppose  we 
have  a  reaction  between  two  perfect  gases  A  and  B,  to  give  two 
other  perfect  gases,  C  and  D.  Then  if  we  represent  the  numbers 
of  moles  involved  by  lower  case  letters,  a,  h,  c,  and  d.  the  initial 
pressures  as  Pa  and  Pb,  and  the  final  pressures  as  Pc  and  Pd>  we 
have  to  write 

aA{PA)  +  bB{PB)  -^  cC(Pc)  +  dD(P,>)  +  AF  (21) 

where  AF  represents  the  change  in  free  energy  which  accompanies 
the  reaction.  In  order  to  compare  free  energy  changes,  and  therefore 
tendencies  of  reactions  to  take  place,  we  need  free  energy  changes 
where  the  starting  and  stopping  points  are  always  the  same ;  in 
other  words,  all  reactants  must  start  at  a  standard  state  and  finish 
up  in  a  standard  state.  In  the  case  of  gases  the  standard  state  is 
atmospheric  pressure.  In  the  case  of  dissolved  substances,  which  we 
mostly  deal  with  in  immunochemistry,  the  standard  state  is  unit 
activity. 

We  can  find  the  free  energy  change,  called  the  standard  free 
energy  change  and  represented  by  AF°,  which  would  result  if  the 


132  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

reacting  gases  shown  in  equation  (21)  started  at  atmospheric  pres- 
sure and  the  products  ended  up  at  atmospheric  pressure.  We  simply 
systematically  add  to  equation  (21)  a  series  of  equations,  each  one 
of  which  carries  one  of  the  gases  from  the  standard  pressure  to  the 
partial  pressure  Pa,  Pb,  etc.,  actually  observed,  adding  also  each 
time  the  free  energy  change  which  such  a  change  in  pressure  entails. 
For  instance,  the  first  equation  we  add  is 

aA{PA  =  1)  -^  aA{PA  =  Pa),     AF  =  oRT\n{PA/\)      (22) 

After  performing  all  these  additions  we  combine  the  logarithmic 
terms  and  obtain 

AF°  =  AF+  RT\n[(PAy(PB)W{Pcy{PDy] 


AF°  =  AF  -  RT\n[{Pcy{PDY/{PAY{PBy]  (23) 

If  the  amounts  a,  b,  etc.,  and  the  pressures  Pa,  Pb,  etc.,  are  those 
found  at  equilibrium,  the  free  energy  change  AF  in  the  reaction 
shown  in  equation  (21)  is  zero,  and  the  term  AF  drops  out.  And 
since  we  see  that  the  expression  whose  natural  logarithm  appears 
in  (23)  is  in  that  case  simply  the  equilibrium  constant  K,  equation 
(23)  reduces  to 

AF°  =   - RT  In  K  (24) 

which  is  the  relation  we  were  seeking.  Again  we  see  that  when 
there  is  a  strong  tendency  for  the  reaction  as  written  to  go  to  the 
right  (K  is  large),  AF°  will  be  large  and  negative. 

The  equilibrium  constant  of  a  reaction  is  a  measure  of  the  extent 
to  which  a  reaction  goes  to  completion.  The  standard  free  energy 
change,  which  can  be  calculated  from  it,  is  thus  a  proper  measure 
of  the  strength  of  the  chemical  bonds  that  are  formed,  and  broken, 
during  the  reaction.  Whenever  the  equilibrium  constant  of  a  reaction 
can  be  measured,  we  can  calculate  the  standard  free  energy  change. 
If  we  know  AF°,  we  can  calculate  the  entropy  change  A^"",  if 
AH°  is  known  from  calorimetric  measurements,  by  using  equation 
(14)  in  the  form  AF°  =  AH°  —  T  A5"°.  A//°  has  been  measured 
directly  for  only  a  few  immunochemical  reactions.  When  it  cannot 
be  measured  it  can  often  be  calculated  from  van't  Hoff's  equation 


UNION  OF  ANTIBODY  WITH   ANTIGEN  133 

^(In  K)/dT  =  AH°/RT'  (25) 

If  we  assume  A//°  is  independent  of  T  in  the  range  of  temperatures 
studied,  we  can  integrate  equation   (25)   to  obtain 

\n(K,/Kr)  =  -  {AHyR)[l/T,  +  l/T^]  (26) 

which  makes  it  possible  to  estimate  AH°  if  observations  on  the 
equihbrium  constant  are  available  at  two  different  temperatures. 
In  fact  this  is  the  commonest  way  of  obtaining  AH°. 

References 

Boyd,  W.  C,  M.  Shapleigh,  and  McMaster,  1955,  Arch.  Biochem.  Biophys.  55, 

226. 
Habeeb,  H.  F.  S.  A.  et  al.,  1959,  Biochim.  ct  Biophys.  Acta  34,  439. 
Hooker,  S.  B.,  and  W.  C.  Boyd,  1941,  /.  Immunol.  42,  419. 
Kabat,  E.  A.,  1956,  Blood  Group  Substances,  Academic  Press,  New  York. 
Karush,  F.,  1956,  /.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  78,  5519. 
Karush,  F.,  1958,  Trans.  N.  Y.  Acad.  Sci.  20,  581. 
Klotz,  I.  M.,  1950,  Chemical  Thermodynamics,  Prentice-Hall,  Englewood  Cliff's, 

N.  J. 
Landsteiner,  L.,  1936,  The  Specificity  of  Serological  Reactions,  C.  C.  Thomas, 

Springfield. 
Nisonoff,  A.,  and  D.  Pressman,  1957,  /.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  79,  1616. 
Pauling,  L.,  and  D.  Pressman,  1945,  /.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  67,  1003. 
Osgood,  W.  F.,  1925,  Advanced  Calculus,  Macmillan,  New  York. 
Singer,  S.  J.,  1957,  /.  Cellular  Comp.  Physiol.  50,  Suppl.  1,  51. 
Wurmser  R.,  and  S.  Filitti-Wurmser,  1950,  Biochim.  et  Biophys.  Acta  4,  238. 


CHAPTER  10 
Energy  of  Antibody-Antigen  Reactions 


Direct  Calorimetry 

In  the  early  days  of  immunochemistry,  methods  were  not  available 
for  measuring  the  amounts  of  free  antigen  or  antibody,  or  both,  re- 
maining after  antibody  and  antigen  have  reacted.  Therefore  calcula- 
tion of  the  free  energy  change  from  direct  measurements  of  the  equi- 
librium constant  was  not  possible.  The  earlier  estimates  of  the  strength 
of  the  antibody-antigen  bond  were  based  on  attempts  to  measure  the 
heat  of  reaction  AH.  It  will  be  seen  from  equation  (14)  in  the  previous 
chapter,  which  we  can  rewrite  as  follows, 

AF°  =  AH°  -  TAS°     T  =  const.  (1) 

that  if  the  entropy  change  were  zero,  AH°  would  equal  AF° ,  and 
such  a  measurement  would  be  an  adequate  measure  of  the  strength 
of  the  antibody-antigen  bond.  In  fact,  we  may  regard  equation  (14) 
as  a  statement  that  in  order  to  make  AH°  a  reliable  index  of  the 
tendency  of  the  reaction  to  take  place,  we  have  to  correct  it  by  al- 
lowing for  the  entropy  change  AS°  .  A  positive  entropy  change  will 
make  a  negative  AF°  still  more  negative,  a  negative  entropy  change 
will  make  it  less  negative  or  even  positive.  Somewhat  unexpectedly, 
recent  work  suggests  that  in  serological  reactions  AS°  is.  in  fact,  not 
large,  though  usually  not  zero. 

Nevertheless,  not  too  much  has  been  learned  about  antibody- 
antigen  reactions  by  direct  calorimetry.  The  first  attempt,  by  Bayne- 
Jones  (1925),  gave  results  that  we  now  know  were  nearly  a  million 
times    the    correct    value.    Two    later    determinations,    the    first    by 

134 


ENERGY  OF  ANTIBODY-ANTIGEN  REACTIONS  135 

Kistiakowsky  and  his  group  (Boyd  et  al.^  1941),  and  the  second  by 
Steiner  and  Kitzinger  (1956),  gave  —40  and  —6  kcal  per  mole  of 
antibody,  respectively.  I  doubt  if  this  difiference  v^as  due  to  experi- 
mental error ;  more  likely  it  should  be  traced  to  differences  in  features 
between  the  two  very  different  antibody-antigen  systems  used. 
Steiner  and  Kitzinger 's  result  agrees  better  with  values  of  AH° 
calculated  indirectly  for  other  serological  reactions,  as  we  shall  see 
below. 

Free  Energy  from  Equilibrium  Measurements 

Various  methods  have  been  used  to  measure  the  equilibrium  be- 
tween free  antibody  and  antigen  and  their  compounds,  or  between 
antibody  and  hapten  and  their  compounds,  including  (i)  equilibrium 
dialysis,  (ii)  direct  analyses  of  precipitates  and  supernatants,  (iii) 
electrophoretic  and  ultracentrifugal  observations,  and  (iv)  light  scat- 
tering. Details  of  the  experimental  procedures  will  have  to  be  found 
in  the  references  cited.  Here  we  may  say  merely  that  all  are  methods 
of  determining  or  calculating  the  concentrations  at  equilibrium  of  free 
antibody,  free  antigen,  free  rapten,  or  compounds  thereof.  From  such 
measurements  the  equilibrium  constant  K  and  AF°  can  be  calculated. 
If  measurements  can  be  made  at  more  than  one  temperature,  AH° 
and  AS°  can  also  be  estimated. 

Of  the  above  methods,  (i)  and  (iv)  are  applicable  only  to  simple 
antibody-hapten  systems,  the  former  only  to  univalent  hapten  sys- 
tems. Method  (iii)  can  be  applied  to  systems  in  which  the  antibody 
is  reacting  with  a  protein,  but  application  of  the  method  may  in  some 
cases  disturb  somewhat  the  very  equilibrium  which  it  is  desired  to 
measure.  Method  (iv)  does  not  disturb  the  equilibrium. 

In  applying  method  (iii),  allowance  must  be  made  for  the  fact 
that  antibody  is  divalent,  at  least  usually,  and  protein  antigens  are 
multivalent  (Epstein,  Doty,  and  Boyd,  1956).  Therefore,  if  we 
measure  the  equilibrium  in  which  each  antibody  is  combined  with  as 
many  antigen  molecules  as  possible  (two  in  the  case  of  divalent  anti- 
body), in  the  presence  of  free  antigen  and  the  compound  AG,  where 
A  represents  antibody  and  G  represents  antigen,  our  equilibrium 
constant  corresponds  to 

(AG2)/(G)  (AG)  =  K  (2) 


136  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

What  we  are  interested  in,  however,  is  the  strength  of  a  single 
antibody-antigen  bond.  The  compound  Ad:-  contains  two  such  bonds, 
and  each  mole  of  free  antigen  G  contains  %'  moles  of  free  combining 
sites,  where  v  is  the  valence  of  the  antigen.  Consequently,  we  have  to 
obtain  the  value  of  K\  where  K'  is  the  equilibrium  constant  corre- 
sponding to  the  equilibrium 

(antibody-antigen  bonds)/ 

(free  antigen  sites)  (free  antibody  sites)  =  K'     (3) 

by  waiting 

2(AG2)A(G)  (AG)  =  K' 
or 

K'  =  {2/v)K  (4) 

Therefore,  the  standard  free  energy  of  a  single  antibody-antigen  bond 

A7^°,  equals  -RTXnK'  =   -RTlnK  -  RT\n{2/v),or 

AF°,  =   -RTlnK  +  RT\niv/2)  (5) 

The  exact  value  of  the  correction  will  depend  on  the  valence  of  the 
antigen  and  the  exact  nature  of  the  reaction  the  equilibrium  state  of 
which  is  being  studied. 

As  an  illustration,  let  us  consider  the  results  of  Baker  et  al.  (1956) 
on  the  reaction  of  anti-benzenearsonic  acid  antibodies  with  ben- 
zenearsonic  acid-azo-bovine  serum  albumin  (bovine  serum  albumin 
coupled  with  diazotized  arsanilic  acid ) .  The  reaction  studied  by  these 
workers  was 

A' ;  +  AG  ^  AC- 
and    their    bovine    serum    albumin    contained    thirteen    introduced 
benzenearsonic  acid  azo  groups  per  molecule.  They  calculated  a  AF° 
of  — 5.2  kcal.  per  mole.  From  the  above  this  is  equivalent  to  a  bond 
free  energy  change  AFi°  of 

-5.2  -\-  7?rin(13/2) 
or 

-5.2  +  1.1  =  -4.1  kcal. /bond 
Contrary  to  expectations,  this  value  is  less  (i.e.,  more  positive)  than 


ENERGY  OF  ANTIBODY-ANTIGEN  REACTIONS  137 

the  value  of  —7.4  kcal.  per  bond  found  by  Epstein,  Doty,  and  Boyd 
(1956)  for  the  reaction  of  anti-benzenearsonic  acid  antibodies  with 
the  divalent  hapten  T  (terephthalanilide-/',/''-diarsonic  acid)  (Fig. 
10-1). 


H203As<'  p>NHOC<r  ^CONH<^  ^AsOaH, 

Fig.  10-1.  Divalent  hapten  used  by  Epstein,  Doty,  and  Boyd  (1956). 

It  would  have  been  expected  that  the  benzenearsonic  acid  groups 
in  the  coupled  bovine  serum  albumin,  being  coupled  through  the  azo 
linkage  with  tyrosine  and  histidine  residues  just  as  in  the  coupled 
protein  used  for  immunization,  would  correspond  to  the  combining 
sites  of  the  antibody  better  than  the  amide-coupled  benzenearsonic 
acid  groups  of  the  hapten  T.  Epstein,  Doty,  and  Boyd  suggested 
that  the  decreased  bond  strength  was  due  to  some  unfavorable  feature 
in  the  orientation  of  the  groups  in  the  coupled  protein. 

In  dealing  with  multivalent  antigens  which  may  combine  simul- 
taneously with  a  number  of  molecules  of  antibody,  the  mathematical 
problems  of  formulating  the  reaction  become  formidable  unless  we 
introduce  simplifying  assumptions.  The  simplest  assumption  is  that 
the  free  energy  of  combination  of  an  antibody  molecule  with  a  com- 
bining site  of  the  antigen  is  the  same  for  all  such  sites  and  is  not 
afifected  by  the  number  of  antibody  molecules  which  have  already  com- 
bined with  the  antigen.  With  the  aid  of  this  assumption,  which  can 
hardly  be  strictly  true  but  which  is  certainly  adequate  as  a  first  ap- 
proximation, we  can  easily  solve  the  problem,  as  shown  by  Linder- 
str0m-Lang  (1924),  von  Muralt  (1930),  Eowler  (1936),  Wyman 
(1943),  and  Klotz  (1946).  If  we  let  the  association  constant  for 
the  formation  of  a  single  antibody-antigen  bond  be  K,  and  the  num- 
ber of  combining  sites  on  the  antigen  molecule  (or  cell)  be  ;//,  we 
find  the  ratio  r  of  antibody  molecules  combined  with  an  antigen  mole- 
cule (or  cell)  to  be 

r  =  mKiA)/l\  +  A'(A)]  (6) 

where  (A)  is  the  concentration  of  free  antibody. 

A  summary  of  the  principal  thermodynamic  studies  on  the  antibody- 
antigen  or  antibody-hapten  reaction  is  given  in  Table  10-1. 


138 


INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 


S 

Ji 

u 

o 

-a 

W 

J 

H 

m 

< 

c< 

H 

<" 

03     ~ 


°9 

II  •=  oa" 

1^  T!  "" 

1      00    00 

00           Ov 

z  1  ^ 

^  -H  -H 

O    ro    O    O    t^ 

4^     -H     ^ooiq 

—  oo-Hc^t^oodoo 

<»     -H    (>J    (M    ™                1 

1 

^     -M      u 

-  rt  g 

§  H  -^ 

VD 

OJ    O     fcuO 

(N 

r^   (M 

"n  00  00  vo  ■^  t^  ON 

£  '-'   — 

:§  -H  -H 

1  .^  1 

O    (TJ    O    O    1^ 

r-j    O    (>i    d    -;   !>.■   O^    ro' 

-S  fe  :s 

^      1                       1 

II     .=     0) 

1        '                       ' 

1             1       1       1       1       1       1 

1 

^it 

CQ  ^    § 

-    tn     en 

.5     '"     <« 

O   o)   r^4 

rv)          tN 

00  o  o" 

1   -H  -H 

d        d 

2^     ^     .., 

^      lO    lO    vO 

1      CVJ    lO    -+    00    ^)    CN    in 

^    _0    T3 

O   *^    lO    lO    On 

"^      1        1        1        1 

.  liS  00  t^  NO  w  1^  vd 

2    1    1    1    1    1    1    1 

5  *i  cn 

CO 

1        '        '        '        ' 

.H    I-  "o 

>     OJ     3 

^1! 

d 

,-^          ,— -  ^^ 

II  -v  a 

c 

^,  r^   ^  O   -H 

c  -^ 

c:j-  c-  2^  C-  c. 

ssssssss 

T3 

£ 

.s"  "^"^  "S 

^ 

HJ 

^_^ 

S   o    S 

-o 

_> 

^  s  - 

03 

' 

"2  3^ 

U3 

+ 

S  tj   >. 

■§ 

a     =   -T3 

•5- 

^c^l 

S 

u 

+ 

=    c    c 

IK 

<u 

(!!) 
(!!!) 
(!!!) 

na 

fn  r;^  •=■  .T  o  .o  o  .-^i^ 

o 

11     «    rt 

c 

<    S    "1 

(U 

s 

CI 

<  U  Q  Q  CQ 

cq  Q  CQ  fc  U  W  U 

nj 

rt   .5     c5   "cS 

nj 

e  oj 

^'  ^  ^  ! 

1 

-M      3 

^ 

o 

^1 

,  Hey 
,  HSA 
.  BSA 
,  0 

,  Car  boxy 

-a 

'lis 

3 

iJ 

o     -a 

-H    CN    PO    '*    lO 

vd  i-^  00  o\  d  -^  CN  qJ 

T-H      .rt      .^H 

ENERGY  OF  ANTIBODY-ANTIGEN  REACTIONS 


139 


TABLE   10-la 
Reactions  for  which  Data  Are  Presented  in  Table  10-1 

A.  nA  +  G^  A„G 

B.  A  +  A„-iG  ;=i  A„G 

C.  A  +  2G  ^  AG2 

D.  AG  +  G  ;^  AG2 

E.  A  +  2H  ^  AHo 

F.  Haptenic  group  +  antibody  site  ^  hapten-antibody  bond 

A  =  antibody,  G  =  antigen,  H  =  hapten. 


AsOjHj 


N  =  N  — 
COOH 


HO 


SO3H 


N^N- 


CH, 


CONHC6H4ASO3H2 


CONHCcH.AsO^H, 


./^ 


CHNHCO< 

coo  ^ 


>N(CH3)2 


N(CH,U 


Fig.  10-2.  Structures  of  haptens  referred  to  in  Table  10-1. 


140  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

References  for  Table  10-1 : 

1.  Baker,  M.   C,   D.  H.  Campbell,   S.   I.   Epstein,   and   S.   J.   Singer,   1956, 
/.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  78,  312. 

2.  Boyd,  W.  C,  J.  B.  Conn,  D.  C.  Grcgs',  G.  B.  Kistiakowsky,  and  R.  M. 
Roberts,  1941,  /.  Biol.  Chem.  139,  787. 

3.  Carsten,  M.  E.,  and  H.  N.  Eisen,  1955,  /.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  77,  1273. 

4.  Epstein,  S.  I.,  P.  Doty,  and  W.  C.  Boyd,   1956,  /.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  78, 
3306. 

5.  Haurowitz,  P.,  C.  F.  Crampton,  and  R.  Sowinski,  1951,  Federation  Proc. 
10,  560. 

6.  Karush,  P.,  1950,  /.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  72,  2705. 

7.  Karush,  P.,  1956,  /.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  78,  5519. 

8.  Karush,  P.,  1957,  /.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  79,  3380. 

9.  Singer,  S.  J.,  and  D.  H.  Campbell,  1955,  /.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  77,  3499. 

10.  Singer,  S.  J.,  and  D.  H.  Campbell.  1955,  /.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  11,  4851. 

11.  Smith,  E.  L.,  et  al.,  1952,  /.  Biol.  Chem.  199,  789. 

12.  Steiner,  R.  P.,  C.  Kitzinger,  and  T.  H.  Benzinger,  1956,  Research  Rept. 
Vaval  Med.  Research  Inst.  14,  73. 


Significance  of  Thermodynamic  Constants 

The  figures  in  Table  10-1  present  some  unexpected  features.  Most 
surprising,  perhaps,  is  that  AF°  is  generally  not  large ;  —9  kcal  per 
mole  seems  to  be  about  an  upper  limit.  This  is  not  a  large  value  for 
standard  free  energy  changes.  The  free  energy  of  formation  of  water, 
for  example,  is  — 54.65  kcal.  per  mole  (for  two  hydrogen-oxygen 
bonds)  ;  that  of  carbon  monoxide  is  —33.0  kcal.  per  mole  (for  one 
carbon-oxygen  bond).  On  the  other  hand,  it  can  be  seen  from  Fig. 
10-3  that  the  free  energy  changes  involved  in  the  formation  of  the 
antibody-antigen  bond  are  sufficient  to  cause  the  reaction  to  go  sub- 
stantially to  completion  if  the  reagents  are  concentrated.  (This  figure 
shows  the  relation  between  the  equilibrium  constant  K  and  the  free 
energy  change.  Also  shown  is  the  per  cent  of  product  B  at  equilibrium 
in  a  hypothetical  reaction  A  ^  B.) 

Not  only  are  the  values  of  AF°  small  by  physical  and  chemical 
standards,  but  the  values  for  the  different  reactions  are  surprisingly 
alike,  suggesting  that  no  antibody-antigen  reaction  is  likely  to  have 
a  large  free  energy  change.  If  antibody  is  formed  through  contact 
with  a  molecule  or  portion  of  a  molecule  of  antigen  or  with  some 


ENERGY  OF  ANTIBODY-ANTIGEN  REACTIONS 


141 


Per  cent  of  B 

10 

20 

30 

40            50            60 

70 

80 

90 

4 

- 

1 

1 

1 

1                1                 1 

1 

1 

1 

- 

3 

V 

- 

2 

\ 

V 

- 

0 

-1 

- 

^— - 

— - 

-^ 

- 

-2 
-3 

— 

^ 

-4 

- 

1 

1       1 

1      1     1     1     1                 1 

1        1 

1      1      1 

1 

- 

3     4    5 


10    20 


0.05    0.1       0.2     03    0.4  0.5  1.0  2.0 

Equilibrium  constant  {K) 
Fig.  10-3.  Relation  between  standard  free  energy  change  (AF°)  of  a  reaction 
A-^B  and  the  equilibrium  constant.  Also  shown  is  relation  between  AF"  and 
the  per  cent  composition  of  the  equilibrium  mixture  with  respect  to  B.  (Slightly 
modified  from  H.  B.  Bull,  1951,  Physical  Biochemistry,  2nd  ed.,  Wiley,  New 
York,  by  permission). 

intracellular  template  which  causes  part  of  the  new  molecule  to  have 
a  configuration  complementary  to  the  antigenic  determinant,  a  small 
value  for  AF°  is  understandable.  An  antibody  molecule  that  possessed 
too  strong  an  affinity  for  the  fixed  antigen  molecule  or  intracellular 
template  would  have  difficulty  leaving  its  place  of  formation  and 
getting  into  the  circulation,  as  has  been  pointed  out  by  Pauling 
(1940)  and  Singer  (1957). 

Another  unexpected  feature  of  Table  10-1  is  that  the  values  of 
A^°,  with  two  exceptions,  are  positive  instead  of  negative.  When 
antibody  molecules  combine  with  a  molecule  of  antigen,  their  freedom 
of  motion  is  restricted,  and  this  loss  of  freedom  constitutes  a  loss  of 
"configurational  entropy."  Therefore,  one  would  expect  antibody- 
antigen  reactions  to  be  accompanied  by  a  decrease  in  entropy.  The 
positive  values  reported  therefore  demand  explanation. 

It  has  generally  been  supposed  that  the  positive  values  for  A5° 


142  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

are  due  to  the  fact  that  in  most  cases  there  is  mutual  neutralization 
of  positive  and  negative  charges  (see  p.  120),  with  resulting  loss 
of  attraction  for  water  molecules.  Restoring  freedom  of  motion  to 
water  molecules  previously  bound  to  the  antigen  or  antibody  surface 
causes  an  increase  in  entropy,  and  this  might  be  more  than  enough 
to  compensate  for  the  loss  of  entropy  due  to  the  decreased  mobility 
of  the  antibody  molecules.  For  instance,  Epstein,  Doty,  and  Boyd 
(1956)  calculated  that  in  the  reaction  studied  by  them  the  release 
of  about  twenty-four  water  molecules  accounted  for  the  observed 
A6"°.  In  line  with  this  argument,  Karush  (1958)  found  a  negative 
entropy  change  of  about  nine  units  for  the  reaction  of  antibody  with 
his  lactose-hapten  "lac,"  where  there  is  no  charge  to  be  neutralized. 

The  one  large  negative  entropy  change  in  study  1  of  Table  10-1  is 
harder  to  explain.  However,  it  should  be  remembered  that,  in  the 
first  place,  it  is  based  on  a  value  of  AF°  which  was  merely  assumed 
and,  in  the  second  place,  hemocyanin  is  a  rather  special  antigen  in  a 
number  of  ways,  being  much  larger  and  more  multivalent  than  most 
antigens  and  constituting  an  associating  and  dissociating  system. 
Steiner  and  Kitzinger  (1956)  suggested  that  a  change  in  the  state  of 
association  of  the  hemocyanin  might  account  for  the  large  enthalpy 
change  observed  and  for  the  large  negative  entropy  change  calculated 
from  this  value. 

A  third  feature  of  the  results  of  Table  10-1  is  that  the  enthalpy 
(heat  content)  changes  are  small,  with  the  exception,  again,  of  that 
found  in  study  1.  Aside  from  this  perhaps  atypical  value,  the  largest 
enthalpy  change  in  the  table  is  the  — 9.7  kcal.  per  mole  calculated  by 
Karush  (1958)  for  the  reaction  of  antibody  with  the  "lac"  hapten. 
This  is  definitely  on  the  small  side  when  compared  with  the  AH° 
of  —94.03  kcal.  per  mole  for  the  reaction  of  hydrogen  and  oxygen  to 
form  water,  or  the  — 26.4  kcal.  per  mole  for  the  reaction  of  carbon 
and  oxygen  to  form  carbon  monoxide.  It  is  also  of  interest  that,  in 
all  cases  where  AH°  is  not  zero,  or  so  close  to  zero  that  its  exact 
magnitude  is  not  known,  it  is  negative,  i.e.,  the  reaction  is  exothermic. 

The  enthalpy  changes  of  all  the  antibody-antigen  or  antibody-hapten 
reactions  studied,  with  the  exception  of  that  in  study  1,  are  too  small 
to  account  for  the  firmness  of  the  bond  and  the  fact  that  the  reaction 
goes  to  substantial  completion.  Obviously,  in  many,  perhaps  most, 
cases  the  major  portion  of  the  driving  force  of  the  reaction  AF°  is 


ENERGY  OF  ANTIBODY-ANTIGEN  REACTIONS  143 

contributed  by  the  term  T  ^S°  and  is  thus  due  to  the  positive  entropy 
change  (equation  (25). 

In  spite  of  the  relative  weakness  of  the  antibody-antigen  or  anti- 
body-hapten  bond,  antibodies  display  very  sharp  specificity,  as  we 
have  already  seen.  For  instance,  when  Karush  compared  the  reac- 
tions of  anti-"lac"  antibody  with  lactose  with  the  reaction  of  the 
same  antibody  with  cellobiose,  he  found  a  value  for  Ai^"  of  — 5.52 
kcal.  per  mole  for  lactose  and  only  — 1.96  kcal.  per  mole  for  celloboise, 
although  the  only  difference  between  the  two  sugars  is  the  arrange- 
ment of  the  hydrogen  and  hydroxyl  groups  on  carbon  number  4 
of  the  terminal  hexose  unit  (Fig.  10-4).  This  again  accords  with 
the  notion  that  the  hapten  fits  quite  precisely  into  a  portion  of  the 
antibody. 

The  importance  of  close  fit  of  antibody  to  hapten  is  also  shown 
by  the  work  of  Nisonoff  and  Pressman  (1957)  who  found  that 
substitution  of  an  iodine  atom  ortho  to  the  carboxy  group  of  the 
benzoate  ion  decreased  the  antibody-hapten  combining  energy  by 
2.4  kcal.  per  mole.  Substitution  of  an  iodine  in  the  meta  position 
decreased  the  binding  energy  by  about  0.7  kcal.  per  mole. 

It  has  been  known  for  some  time  that  the  antibody  molecules  in 
any  given  antiserum  are  heterogenous  (references  in  Boyd  1956). 
This  heterogeneity  manifests  itself,  among  other  ways,  by  differences 
in  their  specific  affinity  (Karush,  1958;  Epstein,  Doty,  and  Boyd, 
1956;   Nisonoff   and    Pressman,    1958).    This   means   that   the    AF° 


CHjOH  H 

Lactose 


144 


INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 


for  the  antibodies  of  an  antiserum  will  be  different  for  the  different 
antibodies ;  combination  of  antigen  or  hapten  will  be  firmer  with  some 
than  with  others.  Heterogeneity  of  antibody  is  responsible,  for  ex- 
ample, for  the  fact  that  the  relation  between  r/c  and  r,  where  r  is  the 
average  number  of  hapten  molecules  bound  per  antibody  molecule 
and  c  is  the  concentration  of  free  hapten,  is  not  a  linear  one  (see  Fig. 
10-5).  It  was  suggested  by  Pauling,  Pressman,  and  Grossberg 
(1944)  that  the  standard  free  energy  of  combination  of  the  various 
antibody  molecules  may  follow  the  distribution  of  the  normal  error 
function  (Gaussian  distribution)  (see  Fig.  2-4).  This  suggestion  has 
been  worked  out  in  detail  by  Karush  (Karush  and  Sonenberg, 
1949;  Karush,  1956). 

If  Kq  is  the  average  binding  constant  and  a  a  measure  of  the 


( \J 

1                    1                    1 
7.1°  C. 

1                    1 

60 

~ 

~ 

50 

- 

- 

40 

— 

25°  C.             \ 
\                 \ 

~ 

30 

- 

\   \ 

- 

20 

- 

•• 

\ 

°\ 

- 

10 

1                    1                    1 

1      ^^1 

Fig.  10-5.  Binding  results  at  25  °C.  and  7.1  °C,  for  the  reaction  between  D-Ip 
hapten  and  purified  anti-D-Ip  antibody  (Karush,  1957,  1958).  The  points  are 
experimental  and  the  curves  theoretical. 


ENERGY  OF  ANTIBODY-ANTIGEN  REACTIONS  145 

range  of  values  of  K,  then  the  "normaHzed"  Gaussian  function 
(PauHng,  Campbell,  and  Grossberg,   1944)    is 

[1/V(7r)cr]exp[   -   \niK/Ko)/aY 

The  fraction  of  total  combining  sites,  n,  which  have  a  specified 
binding  constant  K  will  be,  for  an  infinitesimally  small  area  (in,  ex- 
pressed as  follows : 

dn/n  =  [1/  V  (7r)a]  exp[  -  \n(K/K,/a]-  d  \n{K/K,) 

From  this  Karush  and  Sonenberg  (1949)  found  (the  derivation  is 
given  by  Klotz,  1953)  that  the  fraction  of  antibody  sites  occupied, 
7'/n,  where  n  is  the  number  of  combining  sites  per  antibody  (found 
by  Karush  to  be  two  in  confirmation  of  much  earlier  work),  is  in 
terms  of  the  concentration  c  of  free  hapten,  as  follows : 

r/n  =   1   -  [  1/V  (tt)]  I       {[1   -  exp(  -  a^-)]/[i   +  ^V  exp(a'(7)]l  da 

where  a  is  [ln(A7A'o)]  A.  Karush  (1957,  1958)  found  that  if 
for  his  D-Ip  anti-D-I,,  system  he  took  the  heterogeneity  index  o-  of 
antibody  to  be  2.3,  the  above  equation  enabled  him  to  account  satis- 
factorily for  the  experimentally  formed  relation  between  r/c  and  r. 
(See  Fig.  10-5,  where  the  circles  are  the  experimental  points  and  the 
curves  are  theoretical.) 

Heat  of  Reaction  of  Isoagglutinins 

The  thermodynamic  constants  for  the  reaction  of  the  human  iso- 
hemagglutinins  have  been  estimated  by  Wurmser  and  Filitti-Wurmser 
(Filitti-Wurmser,  Jacquot-Armand,  and  Aubel-Lesure,  and  Wurmser, 
1954;  Wurmser  and  Filitti-Wurmser,  1957),  who  have  devoted  a 
great  deal  of  penetrating  thought  and  experimental  skill  to  the  prob- 
lem. The  methods  used  are  somewhat  different  from  those  involved 
in  the  studies  just  discussed  and  deserve  a  little  space  to  themselves. 

Wurmser  and  co-workers  showed  that  the  combination  of  iso- 
agglutinins  with  human  erythrocytes  is  reversible,  so  that  equilibrium 
considerations  apply.  We  can  use  equation  (25),  which  gives  us  a 
relation  between  the  equilibrium  constant  K  and  the  concentration  of 
free  antibody  at  equilibrium.  Equation  (6 )  contains  two  unknown 
constants :  the  number  of  combining  sites  on  a  red  cell,  in,  and  the 


146  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

association  constant  K.  Precise  values  of  m  are  not  yet  available, 
but  Wurmser  and  Filitti-Wurmser  devised  methods  of  calculation 
which  did  not  require  a  knowledge  of  m. 

If  we  invert  both  sides  of  equation  (6),  we  obtain 

\/r  =  \/m  +  \/mK(A)  (7) 

This  means  that  if  we  plot  the  reciprocal  of  the  number  of  moles 
of  agglutinin  combined  with  a  mole  of  red  cells  against  the  reciprocal 
of  the  concentration  of  free  agglutinin,  we  should  get  a  straight  line 
with  slope  1/mK.  If  we  make  such  determinations  at  two  different 
temperatures,  the  ratio  of  the  two  slopes  (l/mK2)/{l/mKi)  gives 
us  the  ratio  of  the  association  constants  at  these  two  temperatures, 
Kx/K2.  From  this  we  may  calculate  AH°  from  van't  Hoff's  equation 
(25)  (p.  133). 

The  amount  of  isoagglutinin  remaining  free  in  equilibrated  mix- 
tures of  erythrocytes  and  serum  cannot  be  estimated  with  sufficient 
accuracy  by  the  method  of  serial  dilutions  generally  used  to  estimate 
the  strength  of  an  agglutinating  serum,  and  the  quantitative  methods 
of  Heidelberger  and  his  school  are  not  sensitive  enough.  But  the 
Wurmsers  hit  upon  the  device  of  expressing  the  agglutinin  con- 
tent of  their  sera  in  terms  of  the  maximum  number  of  red  cells 
they  agglutinate,  and  of  determining  the  free  agglutinin  in  the  super- 
natant of  erythrocyte-agglutinin  mixtures  in  the  same  way.  This 
enabled  them  merely  by  cell  counting  to  obtain  the  data  for  determin- 
ing the  requisite  slopes  and  ratios  of  slopes  described  in  the  last  para- 
graph (Fig.  10-6). 

The  values  of  AH°  calculated  by  these  methods  are  shown  in  Table 
10-2.  It  will  be  seen  that  these  values  of  AH°  are  in  several  cases 
larger  than  the  rather  small  values  calculated  by  other  workers  for 
other  antibody-antigen  and  antibody-hapten  systems.  The  most  sur- 
prising feature  of  Table  10-2,  however,  is  the  marked  differences  in 
the  anti-B  isoagglutinin  values  obtained  from  the  blood  of  persons  of 
different  blood  group  and  even  of  different  genotype.  This  has  been 
confirmed  by  the  examination  of  the  serum  of  36  AiO  individuals,  six 
of  group  AiAi,  and  eight  of  group  OO.  The  anti-B  in  the  serum  of 
any  given  individual  seems  always  to  be  homogeneous.  This  homog- 
eneity is  in  marked  contrast  to  the  heterogeneity  found  for  immune 
antibodies  (p.  14)  and,  if  confirmed,  might  go  far  toward  supporting 


ENERGY  OF  ANTIBODY-ANTIGEN  REACTIONS 


147 


2.0 


0  0.5  1.0  1.5 

1 //V4  (reciprocol  of  concentration  of  free  onti-B)  xiO^ 
Fig.  10-6.  Relation  between  reciprocals  of  fraction  of  anti-B  agglutinin  com- 
bined with  erythrocytes  and  concentration   of  free  anti-B  agglutinin,  at  37  °C. 
and  25  °C.,  showing  linear  relationship  and  different  slopes  at  the  two  tempera- 
tures (Filitti-Wurmser  et  al.,  1954). 

TABLE  10-2 
Heat  of  Combination  of  Isohemagglutinins  with  Erythrocytes" 


Isoagglutinin 

Agglutinogen 

Genotype  of  donor 

Ai7°,kcal./mole 

Anti-B 

B 

AiO 

-16  ±  2 

Anti-B 

B 

AiAi 

-6.5  ±  1.1 

Anti-B 

B 

A2O 

-9 

Anti-B 

B 

GO 

-1.7  ±  0.4 

Anti-A 

Al 

BO 

-10  ±  3 

Anti-Ai 

Al 

BO 

-33  ±2.5 

"  Wurmser  and  Filitti-Wurmser,  1957. 

the  views  of  workers  such  as  Furiihata  (1927)  who  postulated  that 
the  isoaggkitinins  anti-A  and  anti-B  were  as  much  a  product  of  the 
blood  group  genes  as  the  agglutinogens  A  and  B  were.* 


''On  the  whole  the  less  probable  view,  see  Chapter  4,  p.  57. 


148  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

By  estimating  the  molecular  weights  of  the  isoagglntinins  and  by 
estimating  m  by  determining  the  amount  of  protein  nitrogen  taken 
up  by  erythrocytes  from  agglutinating  sera,  Wurmser  and  Filitti- 
Wurmser  were  able  also  to  obtain  approximate  values  for  the  free 
energy  and  entropy  changes  for  these  anti-B-B  reactions.  The  ap- 
proximate  molecular    weights    obtained    are    shown    in    Table    10-3. 

TABLE  10-3 
Approximate  Molecular  Weights  of  Human  Anti-B  Isoagglutinins* 


Genotype  of  donor 

M'^ 

AiO 
A,Ai 
GO 

~500,000 
-200,000 
-125,000 

"  Wurmser  and  Filitti-W'urmser,  1957. 
^  Molecular  weight. 

It    will    be    seen    that   the    different   kinds    of   anti-B,    according    to 
Wurmser,  also  differ  in  molecular  weight. 

The  calculated  free  energy  and  entropy  changes  are  shown  in 
Table  10-4.  It  will  be  seen  that  these  results  suggest  that  the  binding 
energies  AF°  are  not  very  different  for  the  three  kinds  of  anti-B,  but 
that  the  differences  in  AH°  correspond  to  significant  differences  in 
A^'".  Wurmser  and  Filitti- Wurmser  concluded  that  the  specific  com- 
bining groups  of  the  three  different  kinds  of  anti-B  are  not  very 
different  and  suggested  that  the  increase  in  entropy  which  results 
when  the  anti-B  of  group  O  serum  combines  with  B  erythrocytes  may 
be  connected  with  a  perturbation  of  the  entire  protein  molecule,  pos- 

TABLE  10-4 

Free  Energy  and  Entropy  Changes  for  Binding  of  Anti-B  Isoagglntinins 
by  B  Erythrocytes'' 

Genotype  of  donor  AF°,kcal./mole  A5°,e.u. 

GO  -9.2  -1-24 

AiAi  -9.5  +9.7 

A,0  -9.8  -20 

»  Wurmser  and  Filitti-Wurmser,  1957. 


ENERGY  OF  ANTIBODY-ANTIGEN  REACTIONS  149 

sibly  some  sort  of  reversible  denaturation  which  results  in  greater 
disorder  and  consequent  absorption  of  heat.  These  effects  might  mask 
the  evohition  of  heat  and  the  decrease  in  entropy  which  are  caused  by 
the  local  reaction  of  the  specific  combining  group  with  the  B  receptor 
on  the  cell. 

According  to  Wurmser  and  Filitti-Wurmser,  these  findings  in- 
dicate that  the  isoagglutinins  in  man  are  produced  not  by  a  process 
of  immunization,  as  antibodies  are  in  general,  but  directly  under 
control  of  the  blood  group  genes.  This  view,  if  correct,  would  sharply 
distinguish  these  "natural  agglutinins"  from  those  produced  by  im- 
munizing animals,  or  presumably  even  from  those  produced  by  in- 
jection of  A  and  B  blood  group  substances  into  human  volunteers. 

Kabat  (1956)  does  not  believe  such  a  distinction  exists,  and  does 
not  believe  there  are  such  substances  as  "natural  agglutinins."  He 
has  also  criticized  the  calculations  of  Wurmser  and  Filitti-Wurmser 
in  detail,  but  to  me  none  of  his  criticisms  seem  conclusive ;  indeed, 
some  seem  quite  beside  the  point.  (Cf.  Filitti-Wurmser,  Jacquot- 
Armand,  and  Wurmser,  1960.)  A  decision  as  to  the  validity  of  the 
Wurmser  and  Filitti-Wurmser  conclusions  will  have  to  await  con- 
firmation or  disproof  of  their  work  in  another  laboratory. 

References 

Baker,  M.  C,  D.  H.  Campbell,  S.  I.  Epstein,  and  S.  J.  Singer,  1956,  /.  Am. 

Chcm.  Soc.  78,  312. 
Bayne- Jones,  S.,  1925,  /.  Iiiiiiiuiiol.  10,  663. 

Boyd,  W.  C,  1956,  Fundamentals  of  Immunology.  Interscicnce,  New  York. 
Boyd,  W.  C,  J.  B.  Conn,  D.  C.  Gregg,  G.  B.  Kistiakowsky,  and  R.  M.  Roberts, 

1941,  /.  Biol.  Chem.  139,  787. 
PIpstein,  S.  I.,  P.  Doty,  and  W.  C.  Boyd,  1956,  /.  Am.  Chcm.  Soc.  78,  3306. 
Filitti-Wurmser,   S.,   Y.  Jacquot-Armand,   G.  Aubcl-Lesure,   and   R.   Wurmser, 

1954,  Ann.  Eugenics  18,  183. 
Filitti-Wurmser,  S.,  Y.  Jacquot-Armand,  and  R.  Wurmser,  1960,  Rev.  hematol. 

15,  201. 
Fowler,    R.    H.,     1936,    Statistical     Mechanics,     Cambridge    University     Press, 

Cambridge. 
Furuhata,  T.,  1927,  Japan  Med.  World  7,  197. 

Kabat,  E.  A.,  1956,  Blood  Group  Substances.  Academic  Press,  New  York. 
Karush,  F.,  1956,  /.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  78,  5519. 
Karush,  F.,  1957,  /.  Am.  Chcm.  Soc.  79,  3380. 
Karush,  F.,  1958,  Trans.  N.  Y.  Acad.  Sci.  20,  581. 
Karush,  F.,  and  M.  Sonenberg,  1949,  /.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  71,  1369. 


150  INTRODUCTION  TO  IMMUNOCHEMICAL  SPECIFICITY 

Klotz,  I.  M.,  1953,  Protein  Interactions,  in  H.  Neurath  and  K.  Bailey   (eds.), 

The  Proteins,  vol.  1,  part  B,  p.  727.    Academic   Press,  New  York. 
Linderstr0m-Lang,    K,   1924,  Compt.  rend.  trav.  lab.  Carhbcrg.  Ser.  cliim.   15, 

no.  7. 
von  Muralt,  A.,  1930,  /.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  52,  3518. 
Nisonoff,  A.,  and  D.  Pressman,  1957,  /.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  79,  1616. 
Pauling,  L.,  1940,  /.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  62,  2643. 
Pauling,  L.,  D.  Pressman,  and  A.  L.  Grossberg,  1944,  /.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  66, 

784. 
Singer,  S.  J.,  1957,  /.  Cellular  Comp.  Physiol.  50,  Supl.  1,  51. 
Steiner,  R.  P.,  C.  Kitzinger,  and  T.  H.  Benzinger,  1956,  Research  Kept.  Naval 

Med.  Research  Inst.  14,  73. 
Wurmser,  R.,  and  S.  Filitti-Wurmser,  1957,  Progress  in  Biophysics  7,  88. 
Wyman,  J.,  1944,  in  Cohn,  E.  J.  and  J.  T.  Edsall  (eds.),  Proteins,  Aniinoacids 

and  Peptides,  Reinhold,  New  York,  p.  451. 


Index 


A  antigen,  subdivisions  of,  53,  54 
A  substance,  formula,  90 

(hog),  75 
Abequose,  108,  110,  114,  115 

formula,  109 
ABH  blood  group  antigens,  85 

analytical  results,  86 
ABO  blood  groups,  51,  55 

complications  of,  55 
Abriis  prccatorins,  65,  66 
Absorption,  of  lectins,  74 

of  serum,  defined,  13 
iV- Acetylgalactosamine      (A^-Acetyl-D- 

galactosamine),  76,  77,  78,  87 
7V-Acetyl-D-galactosamine,  formula,  78 
A/'-Acetyl-D-glucosamine,  77 
A^'-Acetylneuraminic  acid,  101 
"Acquired     immunological     tolerance" 
(immunological  tolerance),  31,  2)6, 
2,7 
Agglutination,  heat  of,  145  fif. 

photographs  of  3 
Aldohexoses,  steric  relationships,  80 
Aldopentoses,  steric  relationships,  80 
D-Allose,  formula,  80 
L-Allose,  formula,  80 
D-Altrose,  formula,  80 
L-Altrose,  formula,  80 


Amino  acids,  inhibition  by,  102 
Analyses  of  blood  group  antigens, 
Anemia,  acquired  hemolytic,  27 
Anti-A-lectins,  66,  67,  76 

inhibition  of,  87 
Anti-Ai  lectin,  67,  75 
Anti-(A+B)  lectin,  77 
Anti-B  lectin,  68 
Antibodies,  formation  of,  29  ff. 

molecular  weight,  5 

nature  of,  4  fif. 

reactions  of,  2 

role  in  immunity,  1,  2 

specificity  of,  7 

valency  of,  29 
Antibody-antigen 

136 
Antibody-antigen 

involved,  118  fif. 
Antibody  molecules,  cavities  of,  2i 

models  of,  5 

photographs  of,  6 
Antigenic  determinants,  38,  42,  47 
Antigenicity,  34 
Antigens,  chemical  alteration  of,  8 

defined,  34 

molecular  weight  of,  35 
Anti-Gy  lectin,  inhibition  of,  96 
Anti-H  agglutinins,  54,  67,  76 
Anti-H  lectins,  67 


bond,    strength    of, 
combination,    forces 


151 


152 


INDEX 


Antihapten  antibodies,  detection  of,  10 
Anti-Lewis  agglutinins,  92 
Anti-M  from  horses,  70 
Anti-M  lectin,  67 
Anti-N  lectin,  67,  69 
D-Arabinose,  11,  96 

formula,  80 
L-Arabinose,  78,  96 

formula,  80 
Arachis  hypogaca,  70 
Ascarylose,  108 

formula,  109 
ATWOOD  and  SCHEINBERG,  68 
Autoantibodies,  27 
Autoimmunization,  2>7 
AVERY,    GOEBEL,   and    BABERS, 

45 
AVERY,     HEIDELBERGER,     and 
GOEBEL,  26 


B  substance,  formula,  90 

BAKER,  136 

Bandeiraca  siwplicifolia.  68,  79,  81,  82 

Basques,  61 

Bauhinia  purpurea.  81,  82,  94,  95 

Bauhinia  receptor,  93 

Beans,  66 

BIRD,  67,  82 

Blood  group  antigens,  85  ff. 

sources  of,  85 
Blood  groups,  inheritance  of,  52 
BOIVIN,  104 
"Bombay"  gene,  55 
BOORMAN  and  DODD,  58 
BOYD,  2,  7,  23,  35,  56,  80,  97,  135 
BOYD  and  BOYD,  55,  58 
BOYD,  EVERHART,  and  McMAS- 

TER,  67,  69,  94 
BOYD  and  REEVES,  101 
BOYD  and  REGUERA,  67 
BOYD  and  SHAPLEIGH,  55,  68,  75 
BOYD,  SHAPLEIGH,  and  McMAS- 

TER,  72,  123 


BOYD     and     WASZCZENKO- 

ZACHARCZENKO,  81,  95 
BURNET,  29,  36 
BURNET  and  FENNER,  30 


Calorimetry,  134 

Calpurnia  aurea,  82 

CAMPBELL,  27,  120 

CAMPBELL  and  BULMAN,  27 

Caragana  spp.,  79,  81 

Carbohydrate  haptens,  46 

Carbohydrates,  anttigenicity  of,  36 

Carnot  cycle,  128 

Cavities  in  antibody  molecule,  28 

CEBRA,  38 

Cellobiose,  95,  96 

Cellobioside,  B,  44 

Chimpanzees,  69 

Clover  gum,  113 

GLUTTON,  and  HARINGTON,  and 

YUILL,  2,  35 
Cold,  common,  1 
Colitose,  108,  110 

formula,  109 
Colominic  acid,  101 
Complement,  2 
CoroniUa  varia,  79,  81 
Coulomb  forces,  118 
Covalent  bond,  118 
Cross-reactions,  112 
Crotalaria  spp.,  79,  81 
Cytisus  sessijolius,  67 
Cytisus  spp.,  79,  81 


D  antigen,  structure  of,  98,  99 
DAVIES,  107 

5-Deoxy-3-formyI-L-lyxose,  98 
2-Deoxy-L-fucose,  77 
Deoxy  sugars,  77,  107,  108 
6-Deoxy-L-talose,  77 


INDEX 


153 


Dctcnninants,  antigenic,  38 

carbohydrate,  46 

peptide,  38 
Dextran,  36,  113 

antibodies  to,  46 

composition  of,  46 
Dicarboxylic  amino  acids,  118 
3,6-Dideoxyhexoscs,  108,  109 
Diethylene  glycol,  103 
D-Digitoxose,  Tl 
Diphasic  bacteria,  105 
Dipole,  attraction  by  an  ion,  119 
Dipole  association,  119 
DODD,  BIGLEY,  and  GEYER,  101 
DOTY,  36 

Dolichos  bifloriis,  67,  68,  75 
DUBOS,  36,  106 
Duffy  blood  groups,  62 


Eel,  53,  75 

EHRLICH,  29 

ELO,    ESTOLA,    and    MALM- 
STROM,  68 

Endotoxins,  103 
composition  of,  104 

Energy,  124 

ENSGRABER,   KRi)PE,  and  ENS- 
GRABER-HATTINGEN,   73 

Enthalpy  (H),  126 

Enthalpy  changes  in  serological  reac- 
tions, 138 

Entropy,  127  ff. 
defined,  128 

Entropy    change    in    serological    reac- 
tions, 138 

Enzymes,  inhibition  of,  91 
specificity  of,  64 

Erythrina  spp.,  79,  81 

EPSTEIN,  DOTY,  and  BOYD,  137, 
143 

Equilibrium  constant,  relation  to  free 
energy  change,  131-133 

Error  function,  14 


Erythroblastosis  fetaiis,  etiology  of,  58, 

59 
Escherichia  coli,  115 
Euonymus  eiiropcns.  68 
Exact  differential,  125 


FILITTI-WURMSER.    JACQUOT- 
ARMAND,     and      AUBEL- 
LESURE,   145 
FINLAND  and  CURNEN,  26 
First  law  of  thermodynamics,  124 
FISHER,  22 
Forssman  antigen,  75 
FOWLER,  137 
Free  energy,  129  ff. 

defined,  130 

and  equilibrium,  131 

from  equilibrium  measurements,  135 
Free  energy  changes  in  serological  re- 
actions, 138 
D-Fucose,  78 
L-Fucose,  76,  86,  91 
FURUHATA,  57,  147 


Galactomannans,  113 
D-Galactose,   78,   89,  95,   96,    110,    111, 
114 

antibodies  to,  25 

formula,  80 
L-Galactose,  77 

formula,  80 
Galactoside,  )3,  44 
Gamma  globulin,  5,  121 
GAUSS,  14 
Genes,  action  of,  92,  93 
Gentiobioside,  jS,  45 
"GIL,"  43 

Glucose,  antibodies  to,  25 
D-Glucose,  95,  96,  98,  110,  111,  115 

formula,  80 


154 


INDEX 


L-Glucose,  97,  98 

formula,  80 
Glucoside,  a,  44 

/3,  44 
Glycine,  40 
Glycine  soja,  79,  81 
Goat,  53 

GOEBEL,  46,  104 
GOEBEL,  AVERY,  and  BABERS, 

38,45 
GRABAR,  65 

Gram-negative  bacteria,  definition,  103 
Gram  stain,  103 
D-Gulose,  97,  98 

formula,  80 
L-Gulose,  formula,  80 
Gum  ghatti,  113 


H 


H  (enthalpy),  126 

H  antigens  (of  Salmonella),  105,  106 

H  blood  factor,  54 

H  substance,  formula,  91 

HABEEB,  121 

HACKEL,       SMOLKER,      and 

FENSKE,  97 
Hapten,  defined,  8 
Haptens,  carbohydrate,  46 

synthetic,  in  thermodynamic  studies, 

139 
HAUROWITZ,  29,  30,  35 
Heat  of  combination,  of  isoagglutinins 

with  erythrocytes,  147 
Henshaw  antigen,  58 
HEIDELBERGER  and  WOLFRAM, 

26 
Hemocyanin,  142 
Hexosamine,  86 
Homogeneity  of  lectins,  73,  74 
HOOKER,  2,  29 
HOOKER  and  BOYD,  13,  28,  35,  38, 

123 
Hunter  antigen,  58 
Hydrogen  bonding,  118 


Hydrogen  bonds,  120,  123 


D-Idose,  formula,  80 
L-Idose,  formula,  80 
Immunity,  defined,  1 
Immunological  tolerance,  36 
"Incomplete"  antibodies,  29 
Information  and  specificity,  32 
Inhibition,  19,  20,  47,  98.  100,  101 

of  anti-C,  100 

of  anti-D,  98,  100,  101 

of  antidextran  serum,  47 

of  anti-E,  100,  101 

of  enzymes,  91 

by  haptens,  19,  20 

principle  of,  16 

quantitative,  20,  110 
Inhibition  reactions,  15,  20,  110 
Invagination,  in  antibody  molecule,  29 
Isoagglutination,  enthalpy  changes,  en- 
tropy changes,  free  energy  changes 
in,  148 
Isoagglutinins,  heat  of  combination,  147 

molecular  weights  of,  148 

origin  of,  56 


J  substance  of  cattle  blood,  75 
JERNE,  29,  30,  31,83 


KABAT,  5,  36,  38,  47,  48,  86,  88,  89, 

90,  123,  149 
KARUSH,  64,  123,  143,  144,  145 
KAUFFMAN,  107,  108,  109,  115 
Kell  blood  groups,  62 
Kidd  blood  groups,  62 
KISKIAKOWSKY,  135 
KLOTZ,  125,  128,  137,  145 
KLOTZ,  WALKER,  and  PIVAN,  64 


INDEX 


155 


KOSYAKOV,  58,  62 
KRUPE,  67,  68,  11,  78,  79 


Laburnum  alpinum,  61 

Lactose,  78,  95,  96 

Lactoside,  jS,  45 

LANDSTEINER,  8,   13,   15,   38,   39, 

40,41,65,  118 
Landsteiner  blood  groups,  51 
LANDSTEINER  and  LEVINE,  57 
LANDSTEINER    and    VAN    DER 

SCHEER,  13,  24,  27 
LANDSTEINER  and  WIENER,  58 
Lafhynis  latifoliiis,  19,  81 
LAU,  65 

Lea  antigen,  85,  86 
Lea  substance,  formula,  91 
Lectin,  defined,  68 
Lectins,  64  ff. 
discovery  of,  66 
inhibition  of,  76 
lessons  from  study  of,  83 
role  in  plant,  82 
specificity  of,  75 
LEDERBERG,  8,  29,  31 
Lens  culinaris,  66,  80,  81 
Lentils  (see  Lens  culinaris) 
Leucine,  40 
Leukopenia,  31 
LEVINE,  69 
LEVINE,   CELANO,   LANGE,   and 

BERLINER,  70 
LEVINE  and  STETSON,  58 
LEWIS,  36 
Lewis  blood  groups,  62 
Lima  bean  lectin,  66,  72,  76 

properties  of,  72 
Lima  beans,  66,  68 
LINDERSTR0M-LANG,  137 
Lipopolysaccharides,  107 
Lotus  tctragonolobus,  67,  11,  81 
Lucerne  gum,  113 


Lupus  erythematosis,  31 

Lutheran  blood  groups,  62 

Lymphocytes,  31 

Lysine,  118 

Lysis,  2 

D-Lyxose,  formula,  80 

L-Lyxose,  formula,  80 


M 


MAKELA,  67,  78,  81,96 

Makela's   classification   of   sugars,   78, 

79,98 
MAKELA  and  MAKELA,  68 
Maltose,  95,  96 
Maltoside,  /3,  45 
D-Mannose,  96,  98,  110,  111,  114 

formula,  80 
L-Mannose,  97,  98 

formula,  80 
Marasmius  orcadcs,  68 
MAURER,  35 
MEDAWAR,  31 
Melibiose,  78,  96 

formula,  89 
a-Methyl-galactoside,  89 
;8-Methyl-galactoside,  89 
MILULASZEK,  107 
MNS  blood  groups,  57  flF. 
Molecular  weights  of  antibodies,  5,  148 
MORGAN,  36,  104 
MORGAN  and  KING.  85 
MORGAN  and  WATKINS,   54,  69^ 

75,  16,  11,  86,  87,  88,  92 
Mummies,  56 
Mushroom,  68 


N 


N  in  horse  erythrocytes,  70 
"Natural  agglutinins,"  149 
NISONOFF  and  PRESSMAN,  122, 
143 


156 


INDEX 


North  Africa,  61,  62 

O 

O  antigens  (of  Salmonella),  105 
O  blood  group,  51,  53 
OCCAM,  29 
ONCLEY,  101 

OTTENSOOSER      and      SILBER 
SCHMIDT,  67 


P  antigen,  57 
Paratose,  108,  110,  115 

formula,  109 
Paratyphoid  B  (see  SalmoncUa  schott- 

mucllcri) 
Parkia  filicoidca,  79,  81 
PAULING,  7,  28,  29.  30,  141 
PAULING  and  ITANO,  27 
PAULING  and  PRESSMAN.  123 
PAULING,    PRESSMAN,   and 

GROSSBERG,  14,  144 
"Peanut  receptor"  (Gy),  70,  95 

formula,  97 
Peptides,  antibodies  to,  39  ff. 
Periarteritis  nodosa,  Z7 
Periodic  acid.  111 
Phascolus  limcnsis,   var.    macrocarpus 

(see  Lima  beans) 
Pisiim  sativum,  80,  81 
Plant  agglutinins,  65  ff. 

specificity  of,  65,  66 
Pneumococcus,  57 
Polymers,  35,  36 
Precipitation   of    Salmonella   antigens, 

111 
Precipitations,  photographs  of,  3 
Precipitin  reaction,  with  A  substance, 
73 

of  lectins,  73 
PRESSMAN,  29 

Purpura,   idiopathic   thrombocytopenic, 
37 


Ouclluiig,  4 


R 


R  antigen  (sheep),  75 
RACE  and  SANGER,  55 
Raffinose,  formula,  89 
RENKONEN,  67 
Rh,  discovery  of,  58 

in  various  populations,  61 
Rh  antigens,  stability  of,  62 
Rh  blood  groups,  58  ff. 
Rh  inheritance,  60  ff. 
Rh  nomenclatures,  60 
Rh  receptors,  97  ff. 
L-Rhamnose,  99,  110,  111,  115 
Ribonucleic  acid  derivatives,  97 
D-Ribose,  formula,  80 
L-Ribose,  formula,  80 
Ricin,  agglutination  by,  65 

properties  of,  72 
Rici)ii(s  connniiiiis,  65,   66,   72,  79,  81, 

95 
Rickettsia,  7 

"Rough"  forms  (Salmonella),  107 
Rutinose,  98 

formula,  99 


S  (entropy),  128 
S  (secretor  gene),  58 
S  antigen,  57 
Saliva,  antigens  in,  55 
Salmonella,  described,  105 
Salmonella  abortus  cqui,  110 
Salmonella  adelaide,  110,  115 
Salmonella  anatum,  106 
Salmonella  antigens,  103  ff. 

structure  of,  112-116 
Salmonella  budapest,  110 
Salmonella  choleraesuis,  106 
Salmonella  dar-es-salaam,  110 
Salmonella  cnteriditis,  106,  110 


INDEX 


157 


SalnioncUa  galluiariuii ,  106,  110 

Salmonella  hirschjcldii,  106 

Salmonella  monschaui,  110 

Salmonella  montevideo,  106 

Salmonella  ncivport,  106,  107 

Salmonella  oranienhurg,  106 

Salmonella  paratyl>hi  A,  105,  115 

Salmonella  paratyphosa.  106,  110 

Salmonella  salinatus,  110 

Salmonella  pulloniin,  106 

Salmonella    schottmucllcri,     106,     110, 
112,  113,  115 

Salmonella  scndai,  105,  106 

Salmonella  Stanley,  110 

Salmonella  typhimuriunt,  106,  110,  112 

Salmonella  typhosa,  105,  106,  110,  111, 
115 

SANGER,  8,  55 

SCHIFF  and  SASAKI,  55 

SCHMIDT,  68 

SCHMIDT,  EICHENBERGER,  and 
WESTPHAL,  104 

Second  law  of  thermodynamics,  129 

Secretors,  55 
diagnosis  of  55,  69 

SELA,  35,  2,6 

Serological    reactions,    thermodynamic 
values  of,  138 

Serum  albumin,  64 

Shiga  bacillus,  53 

Silk,  38 

SINGER,  120,  122,  141 

SMITH,  7,  8,  56 

"Smooth"  forms  (Salmonella),  107 

Sophora  japonica,  68,  77,  79,  81 

Specificity,  effect  of  chemical  composi- 
tion on,  12 
of  enzymes,  64 
limitations  of,  26 
of  plant  agglutinins,  75 

Spontaneous  reactions,  127 

SPRINGER,  27 

Stachyose,  formula,  89 

STAHMANN,  35 

Statistical  methods,  20  fif. 


STAUB,  107,  108,  110,  113,  115 
STAUB  and  TINELLI,  110 
STAUB,     TINELLI,     LtJDERITZ, 

and  WESTPHAL,  108,  109 
STEINER    and    KITZINGER,    135, 

142 
formula,  99 
Stereoisomerism,  23  ff. 
Steric     relationship,     of     aldopentoscs 

and  aldohexoses,  80 
Streptomycin,  98 
Strychnine,  antibodies  to,  18 
Subgroups  of  ABO  blood  groups,  54 
SVENSSON,  5 
Switzerland,  61 


TALMAGE,  29,  31,  32 

D-Talose,  formula,  80 

L-Talose,  formula,  80 

Tartaric  acid,  antibodies  to,  24,  24 

TAYLOR  and  BOYD,  56 

Template  theory  of  antibody  formation, 

30 
Terminal  unit  of  antigenic  groups,  40 
Thermodynamic  function,  defined,  125 
Thermodynamics,  124  fif. 

first  law,  124 

second  law,  129 
TINELLI  and  STAUB,  115 
TISELIUS,  5 
Transfusion,  52 
Trehalose,  95,  96 
Trichloracetic  acid,  103 
Trichomonas  enzymes,  91 
Trypsin,  64 
Tyvelose,  108,  110,  111 

formula,  109 


U 


Ulex  europeiis,  54,  58 
Ulex   extract,   for   diagnosis   of  secre- 
tors, 69 


158 


INDEX 


"Univalent"  antibodies,  29 
Ultracentrifugal  observations,  on  anti- 
body-antigen mixtures,  121 
"Unnatural"  sugars,  97,  101 


Valency  of  antibodies,  29 

Van  der   Waals   forces,  21,   118.    119, 

123 
Van't  Hoff's  equation,  133,  146 
Vicia  cracca,  67 
Vicia  graminea,  69 
Vicia  spp.,  81 
VON  MURALT,  137 


W 


WESTPHAL,  104,  105,  107,  110 
WESTPHAL  and  LUDERITZ,  104 
WESTPHAL,  LUDERITZ,  STAUB, 

and  TINELLI,  108 
WHITE,  107,  115 
WIENER  and  PETERS,  58 
Wisteria  chincnsis,  79,  81 
WURMSER,  57,  145 
WURMSER  and  FILITTI-WURM- 

SER,  123,  145,  147,  148,  149 
WYMAN,  137 


D-Xylose,  formula, 
L-Xylose,  formula. 


WATKINS  and  MORGAN,  91 
Watkins    and    Morgan's    scheme    for 
gene  action,  92,  93 


YCAS,  26